GA0007764_08

Network Signal Tower
TYPE

NHB Series

Network Signal Tower with VoiceAnnunciator
TYPE

NHV Series

Instruction Manual[Web Version]

page

Notice to Customer

1. Before You Begin10

2. Models15

3. Package Contents

16

4. Part Names and Dimensions

17

5. Product Features and Functions

19

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering on

89

Thank you very much for purchasing our PATLITE product.

● Request the installation and wiring be performed by aprofessional contractor if construction work is involved.
● Prior to installation, read this manual thoroughly before
using this product to ensure correct use.
● Re-read this manual before conducting maintenance,
inspections, repairs, and so on.
If you have any questions about this product, pleasecontact the service and repair desk listed on thewebsite.
● Before using this product, update to the latest versionof the firmware.
You can download the latest version of the firmware
by registering as a member from our website.
● This manual describes functions supported by the
NHB Series and NHV Series.
Depending on the product that you are using, somefunctions may not be available or the screen layout
may differ from that shown in this manual.
To the Contractor● Prior to installation, read this manual thoroughly toensure it is installed correctly.
● Return this manual to the customer.

7. Before Use105

8. Operation

134

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

270

10. MIB List

367

11. Specifications

374

12. Troubleshooting

379

13. Replacement and Optional Parts

386

14. Free Software License Agreement387

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Table of Contents
1. Before You Begin＿ ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 10

1.1. About Safety Symbols………………………………………………………………………………… 10
1.2. Safety Precautions………………………………………………………………………………………11
1.3. About laws and regulations in each country………………………………………………………… 13
1.4. Trademarks……………………………………………………………………………………………… 13
1.5. Copyright………………………………………………………………………………………………… 14
1.6. Network Security……………………………………………………………………………………… 14

2. Models＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 15

2.1. NHB Series……………………………………………………………………………………………… 15
2.2. NHV Series……………………………………………………………………………………………… 15
2.3. Supported Additional Units…………………………………………………………………………… 15

3. Package Contents＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 16

3.1. NHB Series……………………………………………………………………………………………… 16
3.2. NHV Series……………………………………………………………………………………………… 16

4. Part Names and Dimensions＿ ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 17

4.1. NHB Series……………………………………………………………………………………………… 17
4.2. NHV Series……………………………………………………………………………………………… 18

5. Product Features and Functions＿ ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 19

5.1. Product Features……………………………………………………………………………………… 19
5.1.1. Installation………………………………………………………………………………………………… 19
5.1.2. PoE Support……………………………………………………………………………………………… 19
5.1.3. Multilingual Support……………………………………………………………………………………… 19
5.1.4. Operations When Connecting to a Cloud Environment……………………………………………… 20

5.2. Product Functions……………………………………………………………………………………… 20
5.2.1. Signal Tower, Buzzer, Audio Playback………………………………………………………………… 20
5.2.2. Voice Synthesizer………………………………………………………………………………………… 20
5.2.3. Monitoring the Status……………………………………………………………………………………… 21
5.2.4. Email detection…………………………………………………………………………………………… 21
5.2.5. Commands for Control of Communication……………………………………………………………… 22
5.2.6. Status Notification………………………………………………………………………………………… 22

5.3. Function Descriptions………………………………………………………………………………… 23
5.3.1. Signal Tower and Buzzer Notification Functions……………………………………………………… 23
5.3.2. Audio Playback Function………………………………………………………………………………… 24
5.3.3. Line Out Function………………………………………………………………………………………… 28
5.3.4. Voice Synthesizer Function……………………………………………………………………………… 28

2

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5.3.5. External Contact Output Function……………………………………………………………………… 29
5.3.6. Send Email Function……………………………………………………………………………………… 31
5.3.7. SNMP TRAP/Inform Transmission Function…………………………………………………………… 34
5.3.8. Send HTTP Command Function………………………………………………………………………… 34
5.3.9. Send HTTP Command Function………………………………………………………………………… 34
5.3.10. RSH/SSH Command Function………………………………………………………………………… 35
5.3.11. PNS Command Function (product compatibility commands)……………………………………… 43
5.3.12. PHN Command Function (product compatibility commands)……………………………………… 52
5.3.13. HTTP Command Reception Function………………………………………………………………… 54
5.3.14. SNMP Command Functions…………………………………………………………………………… 60
5.3.15. Ping Monitoring Function……………………………………………………………………………… 62
5.3.16. SNMP TRAP Reception Function……………………………………………………………………… 63
5.3.17. SNMP Device Monitoring Function…………………………………………………………………… 64
5.3.18. Detect Change in State of Contact Input……………………………………………………………… 67
5.3.19. Contact Input Match Detection………………………………………………………………………… 68
5.3.20. Detect Email Function…………………………………………………………………………………… 69
5.3.20.1. Reading Aloud Email Contents…………………………………………………………………… 70
5.3.20.2. Control by Email Contents………………………………………………………………………… 72
5.3.21. Clear Operation Function……………………………………………………………………………… 77
5.3.22. Self-test Function………………………………………………………………………………………… 79
5.3.23. Cloud Function…………………………………………………………………………………………… 80
5.3.24. USB Memory Function………………………………………………………………………………… 82
5.3.25. PLC Linkage Function…………………………………………………………………………………… 83
5.3.25.1. PLC Information Read Command Transmission/Reception Function………………………… 83
5.3.25.2. PLC Information Write Command Transmission Function……………………………………… 87
5.3.25.3. PLC Count Value Write Function…………………………………………………………………… 88
5.3.26. Internet Connection Check Function………………………………………………………………… 88

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering on＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 89

6.1. Attaching and Detaching Additional Units…………………………………………………………… 90
6.1.1. NHB Series, NHV Series………………………………………………………………………………… 90
6.1.2. Procedure for Attaching/Detaching LED Units………………………………………………………… 91
6.1.3. Procedure for Attaching/Detaching LED Units and Transmitter……………………………………… 91

6.2. Product Installation and Mounting Method………………………………………………………… 93
6.2.1. When Stationary…………………………………………………………………………………………… 93
6.2.2. Mounting on a Tripod……………………………………………………………………………………… 94
6.2.3. When Using Mounting Brackets (optional part)………………………………………………………… 95

6.3. Line Out Connection Method………………………………………………………………………… 99

3

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6.4. Digital Input/Output Wiring Method…………………………………………………………………… 100
6.4.1. Wiring procedures………………………………………………………………………………………

100

6.4.2. Circuit Diagram…………………………………………………………………………………………

101

6.5. LAN Cable Wiring Method…………………………………………………………………………… 102
6.6. Power Supply Method………………………………………………………………………………… 103
6.6.1. When Using AC Adapter Power Supply………………………………………………………………

103

6.6.2. When Using PoE to Supply Power……………………………………………………………………

104

6.6.3. Checking at Startup……………………………………………………………………………………

104

7. Before Use＿ ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 105

7.1. Enabling DHCP Function……………………………………………………………………………… 106
7.2. Setting Up Network Settings on the PC……………………………………………………………… 107
7.3. Setting Up User Authentication (User Name and Password)……………………………………… 110
7.4. Displaying the Web Setup Screen…………………………………………………………………… 111
7.5. Setting Up Product Network Settings………………………………………………………………… 114
7.6. Setting Up the Clock…………………………………………………………………………………… 116
7.7. Setting Up Security…………………………………………………………………………………… 118
7.8. Setting Up the Equipment Name, Installation Location, and Contact…………………………… 120
7.9. Setting Up the Buzzer………………………………………………………………………………… 121
7.10. Setting Up the Speaker Volume…………………………………………………………………… 122
7.11. Setting Up the Line Out Volume…………………………………………………………………… 123
7.12. Setting Up Audio Playback Mode…………………………………………………………………… 124
7.13. Setting Up LED Unit (Multi-color) and Transmitter Unit Settings………………………………… 125
7.14. Setting Up LED Unit Brightness Adjustment……………………………………………………… 126
7.15. Setting Up Normal Status…………………………………………………………………………… 127
7.16. Setting Up Voice Registration……………………………………………………………………… 128
7.16.1. Audio Registration……………………………………………………………………………………

128

7.16.2. Changing the Audio Title………………………………………………………………………………

130

7.16.3. Audio Line Out Output…………………………………………………………………………………

131

7.16.4. Playing and Stopping Audio Playback………………………………………………………………

131

7.16.5. Deleting Audio…………………………………………………………………………………………

131

7.17. Register Notification Sound………………………………………………………………………… 132
7.17.1. Notification Sound Registration………………………………………………………………………

132

7.17.2. Changing the Title of the Notification Sound………………………………………………………

133

7.17.3. Playing and Stopping the Notification Sound………………………………………………………

133

7.17.4. Deleting the Notification Sound……………………………………………………………………

133

8. Operation＿ ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 134

8.1. Notifying Equipment…………………………………………………………………………………… 134
8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification Settings………………………………………………

134

8.1.1.1. Setup Procedure……………………………………………………………………………………

134

4

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings………………………………………………………………

138

8.1.2.1. Setup Procedure……………………………………………………………………………………

138

8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings………………………………………………………

141

8.1.3.1. Setting Up Content of Send HTTP Command……………………………………………………

141

8.1.3.2. Setting Up Triggers for Send HTTP Command…………………………………………………

141

8.1.3.3. Setting Up State Change Transmissions…………………………………………………………

142

8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings…………………………………………………………………

143

8.1.4.1. Setting Up Contact Output…………………………………………………………………………

143

8.1.4.2. Setting Up Triggers for Contact Output…………………………………………………………

143

8.2. Using the Cloud………………………………………………………………………………………… 144
8.2.1. Using Microsoft Azure…………………………………………………………………………………

144

8.2.1.1. Setting Up Azure……………………………………………………………………………………

144

8.2.1.2. Setting Up Microsoft Azure Connection Settings………………………………………………

145

8.2.1.3. Using Device Twin…………………………………………………………………………………

146

8.2.1.4. Using Direct Method………………………………………………………………………………

148

8.2.1.5. Using Device-to-cloud message…………………………………………………………………

150

8.2.1.6. Using Cloud-to-device message…………………………………………………………………

154

8.2.2. Using AWS………………………………………………………………………………………………

157

8.2.2.1. Setting Up AWS……………………………………………………………………………………

157

8.2.2.2. Setting Up the AWS Connection…………………………………………………………………

161

8.2.2.3. Checking Connection with AWS IoT Core………………………………………………………

162

8.2.2.4. Using MQTT Subscribe Function…………………………………………………………………

163

8.2.2.5. Using MQTT Publish Function……………………………………………………………………

166

8.2.2.6. Using Device Shadow Function……………………………………………………………………

170

8.3. Checking and Controlling the Status of This Product……………………………………………… 172
8.3.1. Checking and Controlling the Status of This Product with Commands……………………………

172

8.3.1.1. Setting Up the Command Main Unit Operation Settings………………………………………

172

8.3.1.2. Checking the Signal Tower State…………………………………………………………………

179

8.3.1.3. Controlling Signal Tower States……………………………………………………………………

182

8.3.1.4. Controlling Audio……………………………………………………………………………………

185

8.3.1.5. Play Any Text…………………………………………………………………………………………

187

8.3.1.6 Clearing the Status of This Product………………………………………………………………

188

8.3.1.7. Checking the Contact Input/Output States………………………………………………………

189

8.3.1.8. Controlling Contact Output…………………………………………………………………………

190

8.3.1.9. Performing the Self-test Operation………………………………………………………………

192

8.3.2. Checking and Controlling the Signal Tower on the Web Setup Screen……………………………

193

8.3.2.1. Checking the Signal Tower States…………………………………………………………………

193

8.3.2.2. Controlling Signal Tower States……………………………………………………………………

193

5

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.3.3. Operating the Product with the Clear Button…………………………………………………………

194

8.3.3.1. Setting Up the Clear Operation Settings…………………………………………………………

194

8.3.3.2. Using Clear Button to Execute Clear Operation…………………………………………………

196

8.4. Monitoring……………………………………………………………………………………………… 197
8.4.1. Ping Monitoring…………………………………………………………………………………………

197

8.4.1.1. Setup Procedure……………………………………………………………………………………

197

8.4.2. SNMP TRAP Monitoring………………………………………………………………………………

206

8.4.2.1. Setup Procedure……………………………………………………………………………………

206

8.4.3. SNMP Device Monitoring………………………………………………………………………………

212

8.4.3.1. Setup Procedure……………………………………………………………………………………

212

8.4.4. Contact Input Status Monitoring………………………………………………………………………

222

8.4.4.1. Setting Up Contact Input Function………………………………………………………………

222

8.4.5. Contact Input Condition Monitoring……………………………………………………………………

227

8.4.5.1. Setting Up Contact Input Condition………………………………………………………………

227

8.4.6. Detecting Email…………………………………………………………………………………………

231

8.4.6.1. Setup Procedure……………………………………………………………………………………

231

8.4.7. Monitor PLC Equipment………………………………………………………………………………

239

8.4.7.1. Perform Basic Settings……………………………………………………………………………

239

8.4.7.2. Setting PLC Information Read Command Function……………………………………………

241

8.4.7.3. Setting PLC Information Write Command Function……………………………………………

243

8.4.7.4. Setting Count Value Write Function to the PLC…………………………………………………

244

8.5. Doing Maintenance…………………………………………………………………………………… 245
8.5.1. Checking the Product Settings…………………………………………………………………………

245

8.5.1.1. Screen Display Procedure…………………………………………………………………………

245

8.5.1.2. Using Status LED to Check the Status of this Product…………………………………………

247

8.5.1.3. How to Check the Internet Connection…………………………………………………………

248

8.5.2. Initializing This Product…………………………………………………………………………………

249

8.5.2.1. Initialization on the Web Setup Screen……………………………………………………………

249

8.5.2.2. Initialization with DIP Switches……………………………………………………………………

250

8.5.3. Restarting this Product…………………………………………………………………………………

251

8.5.3.1. Restarting from the Web Setup Screen…………………………………………………………

251

8.5.3.2. Restarting with the Reset Button…………………………………………………………………

252

8.5.4. Changing the Sound Volume…………………………………………………………………………

253

8.5.4.1. Adjusting the Volume on the Web Setup Screen………………………………………………

253

8.5.4.2. Adjusting the Volume with + / - Volume Control Buttons………………………………………

254

8.5.4.3. Muting the Volume…………………………………………………………………………………

255

8.5.5. Verifying the Self-test Operation………………………………………………………………………

256

8.5.5.1. Enabling the Test Button Function…………………………………………………………………

256

6

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.5.6. Changing User Authentication Settings………………………………………………………………

257

8.5.6.1. User Authentication Settings………………………………………………………………………

257

8.5.7. Exporting and Importing Product Settings (Configuration)…………………………………………

258

8.5.7.1. Extracting the Configuration………………………………………………………………………

258

8.5.7.2. Reading Configuration and Sound Packages Using USB Memory……………………………

259

8.5.7.3. Writing to Configuration……………………………………………………………………………

260

8.5.7.4. Writing Configuration and Sound Packages Using USB Memory……………………………

261

8.5.8. Updating Firmware………………………………………………………………………………………

262

8.5.8.1. Updating Firmware…………………………………………………………………………………

262

8.5.8.2. Updating Firmware Using USB Memory…………………………………………………………

263

8.5.9. Checking the Event Log ………………………………………………………………………………

264

8.5.9.1. Displaying the Event Log…………………………………………………………………………

264

8.5.9.2. Downloading the Log………………………………………………………………………………

264

8.5.9.3. Downloading Log Using USB Memory……………………………………………………………

265

8.5.9.4. Event Log contents…………………………………………………………………………………

266

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 270

9.1. Main Unit Settings……………………………………………………………………………………… 271
9.1.1. Function Activation ……………………………………………………………………………………

271

9.1.2. Network Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………

273

9.1.3. LTE Settings……………………………………………………………………………………………

275

9.1.4. Clock Settings……………………………………………………………………………………………

276

9.1.5. Basic Settings …………………………………………………………………………………………

277

9.2. Command Reception Settings………………………………………………………………………… 279
9.2.1. Socket Communication Settings………………………………………………………………………

279

9.2.2. RSH/SSH Command Reception Settings……………………………………………………………

280

9.2.3. SNMP Command Reception Settings ………………………………………………………………

284

9.3. Monitor Settings………………………………………………………………………………………… 286
9.3.1. Ping Monitoring Settings ………………………………………………………………………………

286

9.3.1.1. Individual Settings…………………………………………………………………………………

286

9.3.1.2. Group Settings………………………………………………………………………………………

289

9.3.2. TRAP Reception Settings………………………………………………………………………………

292

9.3.2.1. Basic Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………

292

9.3.2.2. Reception Settings …………………………………………………………………………………

294

9.3.3. SNMP Device Monitoring Settings……………………………………………………………………

297

9.3.3.1. Basic Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………

297

9.3.3.2. Match Detection Settings…………………………………………………………………………

299

9.3.3.3. Change Detection Settings ………………………………………………………………………

302

7

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9.3.4. Contact Input Setting …………………………………………………………………………………

305

9.3.4.1. Status Change Detection Settings ………………………………………………………………

305

9.3.4.2. Match Detection Settings …………………………………………………………………………

308

9.3.5. Mail Detection Setting …………………………………………………………………………………

311

9.3.5.1. Mail Server Settings…………………………………………………………………………………

311

9.3.5.2. Filter Rule Settings…………………………………………………………………………………

314

9.3.6. PLC Communication Function Settings………………………………………………………………

317

9.3.6.1. Basic Settings………………………………………………………………………………………

317

9.3.6.2. PLC Information Read Command Settings………………………………………………………

320

9.3.6.3. PLC Information Write Command Settings………………………………………………………

326

9.3.6.4. PLC Write Count Value Settings…………………………………………………………………

330

9.4. Notification Settings…………………………………………………………………………………… 334
9.4.1. SNMP Notification Settings ……………………………………………………………………………

334

9.4.2. Email Notification Settings ……………………………………………………………………………

338

9.4.3. HTTP Transmission Settings …………………………………………………………………………

344

9.5. Cloud Settings………………………………………………………………………………………… 346
9.5.1. Azure Connection Settings ……………………………………………………………………………

346

9.5.2. AWS Connection Settings………………………………………………………………………………

348

9.6. Main Unit Operation Settings………………………………………………………………………… 349
9.6.1. Clear Operation Settings………………………………………………………………………………

349

9.6.2. Test Button Setting………………………………………………………………………………………

351

9.6.3. Contact Output Setting…………………………………………………………………………………

352

9.6.4. Signal Tower Operation…………………………………………………………………………………

354

9.7. Voice Registration……………………………………………………………………………………… 356
9.7.1. Voice Registration………………………………………………………………………………………

356

9.7.2. Notification Sound Registration………………………………………………………………………

359

9.8. Management…………………………………………………………………………………………… 360
9.8.1. Settings Initialization……………………………………………………………………………………

360

9.8.2. Restart……………………………………………………………………………………………………

361

9.8.3. Configuration……………………………………………………………………………………………

362

9.8.4. Updating Firmware………………………………………………………………………………………

363

9.8.5. Event Log…………………………………………………………………………………………………

364

9.8.6. User Authentication Settings…………………………………………………………………………

365

9.8.7. Security Settings…………………………………………………………………………………………

366

10. MIB List＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 367

10.1. NHB Series …………………………………………………………………………………………… 367
10.2. NHV Series …………………………………………………………………………………………… 369
10.3. MIB Description……………………………………………………………………………………… 371

8

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

1. Before You Begin

11. Specifications＿ ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 374

11.1. NHB Series…………………………………………………………………………………………… 374
11.2. NHV Series…………………………………………………………………………………………… 376

12. Troubleshooting＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 379

12.1. Troubleshooting……………………………………………………………………………………… 379
12.1.1. Common to NHB and NHV Series…………………………………………………………………

379

12.1.2. NHB Series……………………………………………………………………………………………

382

12.1.3. NHV Series……………………………………………………………………………………………

383

12.1.4. NHV-D Series…………………………………………………………………………………………

384

12.1.5. NHV-P Series…………………………………………………………………………………………

385

13. Replacement and Optional Parts＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 386

13.1. Replacement Parts…………………………………………………………………………………… 386
13.2. Optional Parts………………………………………………………………………………………… 386

14. Free Software License Agreement＿ ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿ 387

14.1. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE………………………………………………………………… 387
14.1.1. Version 1.0……………………………………………………………………………………………

387

14.1.2. Version 2.0……………………………………………………………………………………………

391

14.1.3. Version 3.0……………………………………………………………………………………………

396

14.2. GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE…………………………………………………… 406
14.2.1. Version 2.1……………………………………………………………………………………………

406

14.2.2. Version 3.0……………………………………………………………………………………………

413

14.3. BSD License…………………………………………………………………………………………… 416
14.3.1. ２-Clause………………………………………………………………………………………………

416

14.3.2. ３-Clause………………………………………………………………………………………………

416

14.3.3. ４-Clause………………………………………………………………………………………………

417

14.4. Python Software Foundation License……………………………………………………………… 418
14.5. OpenSSL License…………………………………………………………………………………… 422
14.6. Open Software License 3.0………………………………………………………………………… 424
14.7. MIT License…………………………………………………………………………………………… 427
14.8. Apache License……………………………………………………………………………………… 428
14.9. Academic Free License……………………………………………………………………………… 431
14.10. Texas Instruments Incorporated Technology and Software Publicly…………………………… 434

9

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

1. Before You Begin

1. Before You Begin1.1. About Safety Symbols
To prevent injuries to the user and other personnel, as well as to prevent damage toassets, note the following:● The following symbols classify warnings and cautions, and describe the level of harm and damage that will occur
when the corresponding instructions are ignored.

WARNING

This symbol indicates, "Failure to follow the instructions may lead to deathor serious injury."

CAUTION

This symbol indicates, "Failure to follow the instructions may lead to injury
or property damage."● The following symbols classify and describe the content of associated messages.

Prohibited

This symbol identifies "Prohibited" operations that should never be carriedout.

Mandatory

This symbol identifies "Mandatory" instructions that should always be
carried out.
This symbol identifies general "Caution" related information.

10

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

1. Before You Begin1.2. Safety Precautions

WARNING● Do not modify or disassemble this product. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire or electric
shock.
● Do not use this product when there is condensation. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire orelectric shock.
● Do not use the product or leave the product with the LED unit either removed or cracked. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in fire or electric shock.
● Do not touch the AC plug with wet hands. Failure to follow this instruction could result in electric shock.
● Do not apply voltage that exceeds the acceptable range. The rated voltage is 100 to 240 VAC (AC adapter
input). If you apply more than the rated voltage, internal circuits will be damaged. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire or electric shock.

Prohibited● While power is still applied to the AC adapter, do not connect or disconnect the DC power plug. Failure tofollow this instruction could result in electric shock or equipment damage.
● Do not use or install the product in locations where liquids such as water is present, oil will splatter, or
locations that are humid or dusty. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, electric shock orequipment damage.
● Do not use or control this product in equipment or devices that, directly or indirectly, affect human life,
or in equipment or devices where a high degree of reliability is required. If this product is used for theseapplications, we cannot be held responsible in the event of death, injury, or property damage.
● Do not allow liquids on the product, and do not allow it to have contact with metallic objects. Failure tofollow this instruction could result in fire or electric shock.
● After installation, do not use this product to climb up onto equipment. Failure to follow this instruction will
result in product damage and/or falling off the machinery.
● Request the installation and wiring be performed by a professional contractor if construction work is
involved. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, electric shock, or falling of the product.
● Turn off the power before performing any electric wiring or product installation. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in electric shock.
● If an unusual condition occurs while using this product, such as emitting smoke, heat, abnormal odor,
or unusual sound, stop the application, disconnect the power, and contact your nearest PATLITE Sales
Representative.
● When plugging the AC adapter into an outlet, confirm there is no dust, and connect all the way to the rootof the power plug. Using the AC plug with dust on it could result in fire or equipment damage.

Mandatory● Regularly clean dust off the AC plug and outlet. Due to the tracking phenomenon, using a power plug withdust on it could result in fire or equipment damage.
● To prevent injuries and property damage that could result from product failure or malfunction, ensuresufficient safety by using this product together with other equipment.
● To prevent accidents when operating or maintaining the product, in addition to the safety guidelines
identified in the instructions of this manual, follow all general safety guidelines. We cannot foresee all
circumstances concerning the handling and dangers associated with this product. Therefore, not every
possible danger is indicated in this instruction manual.
● In case the product falls over or falls down, install in a location where it will not hit any people or otherobjects.

11

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

1. Before You Begin

CAUTION● Do not use in locations near fire or environments with high temperature and humidity. Do not use thisproduct where corrosive, flammable gas is present.
● Do not use this product if liquids (such as water or chemicals) or foreign metallic objects (such as copperwire) have entered this product. Failure to follow this instruction could result in product damage.
● Do not bend the power cable unnecessarily. Failure to follow this instruction could result in disconnection
and malfunction or equipment damage.
● Do not use this product near equipment (such as a solenoid) or wires that generate strong electric or
magnetic fields. Failure to follow this instruction could result in malfunction due to inductive noise.
● Do not use excessive force on this product. Failure to follow this instruction could result in deformed frameand product damage.

Prohibited● Do not use sharp tipped objects with this product. Operation may become impossible as scratches develop
on buttons and contacts are interfered with.
● Do not use this product near chemicals. This product could melt or become deformed if any chemicals
adhere to it.
● Do not wipe dirt on this product with thinners, benzine, gasoline, oil, chemicals, and so on. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in discoloration and deterioration. Wipe with a soft cloth, dampened with water
and wrung tightly.
● When using a tripod with this product, do not move or transport while the tripod is attached. Failure tofollow this instruction could result in equipment damage if the product falls over.

● Use only the specified replacement parts listed in this manual.

Mandatory

12

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

1. Before You Begin1.3. About laws and regulations in each country● For Customers in U.S.A.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment.
The equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordancewith the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
(Responsible party in U.S.A.) 20130 S. Western Ave. Torrance, CA90501, U.S.A.

● For Customers in Europe
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A device.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment.
This product must not be used in residential areas.

● For Customers in Korea사용자안내문이 기기는 업무용 환경에서 사용할 목적으로 적합성평가를 받은 기기로서가정용 환경에서 사용하는 경우 전파간섭의우려가 있습니다 .

1.4. Trademarks
・ Microsoft Edge, Azure, Microsoft Entra ID, and Outlook are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
・ Google Chrome, Google Cloud Platform, and Gmail are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google LLC.
・ Amazon Web Services, the "Powered by AWS" logo, and any other AWS trademarks used in such materials aretrademarks of Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and other countries.
・ LTE is a trademark of ETSI.
・ Other company and product names that are used are the registered trademarks or trademarks of those respective
companies.

13

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

1. Before You Begin1.5. Copyright・ Work that was recorded or copied from music CDs, other media, or a paid service, and used in public or public
places may be subject to copyright infringement. When using such works, obtain permission from the rights holder.
・ In addition, copyrights of audio/music data distributed or sold by PATLITE Corporation belongs to PATLITE. It is
strictly prohibited to copy/reprint, whole or in part, contents of audio/music data belonging to PATLITE Corporation,or to transfer/sell such material on computer networks without the permission of the rights holder.

1.6. Network Security
The user is responsible for the network security of this product and its use.
Take appropriate network security measures to avoid security breaches.
・Use this unit in a network secured by a firewall, etc.
・ Change the login password periodically.
・ Save user authentication information(user names and passwords) in such a way that it is kept out of the hands ofthird parties
This product cannot connect directly to the Internet.
When connecting this product to the Internet, use a router or similar device.

14

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

2. Models

2. Models
2.1. NHB Series

Model
NumberModel

SignalTower TypeNHB↓

6 LR6 (φ60)

Tier

4 LR4 (φ40)

Number of
LED Tiers

AC Adapter
Included or Not

↓

↓

-

0

-

LED Unit Color

RYGBC

-

B…Blue
R…Red
Y…Amber C…WhiteG…Green(empty) AC adapter included

5

N(Display maximum 5 colors,in order from left to right fortiers top to bottom)

AC adapter not included

2.2. NHV Series

Model
NumberModel

SignalTower TypeNHV↓

6 LR6 ( φ 60)
4 LR4 ( φ 40)

Tier

Without contact(empty) inputs/outputs
D

Number of
LED Tiers-

0-

External
SoftwareContact
Specification
Input/Output

↓

↓

↓

↓

LED Unit Color- RYGBC(empty) AC adapter included

5(empty)Standard model(including email
detection function)M

Detect EmailWith contact
inputs/outputs

AC Adapter
Included or Not

N

AC adapter not includedP

AC adapter not included(PoE power supported)

R…Red
B…BlueC…White
Y…Amber G…Green(Display maximum 5 colors, in orderfrom left to right for tiers top to bottom)

2.3. Supported Additional Units
NHB6, NHV6

NHB4, NHV4

LED Unit (Colored lens)LR6-E- □ ( □ : R, Y, G, B, C)

LR4-E- □ ( □ : R, Y, G, B, C)

LED Unit (Clear lens)LR6-E- □ Z ( □ : R, Y, G, B)

LR4-E- □ Z ( □ : R, Y, G, B)

LED Unit (Multi-color)

LR6-E-MZ

Transmitter unit

WDT-6LR-Z2–
WDT-4LR-Z2

15

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

3. Package Contents

3. Package Contents
3.1. NHB Series

Main Unit: 1

Accessories
AC Adapter

Adhesive SheetAC Power
Plug

Installation Manual

DC Power
Plug* Not included in N model

2 Sheets (1 Set)x1

x1

3.2. NHV Series

Main Unit: 1

Accessories
AC Adapter

Adhesive SheetAC Power
Plug

Installation Manual

DC Power
Plug* Not included in N · P model

2 Sheets (1 Set)

x1

16

x1

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

4. Part Names and Dimensions

4. Part Names and Dimensions
4.1. NHB Series● NHB6
φ60
Head Cover
φ60
Head Cover

Numberof LED : Total
heighttiers
Number0 tiers : 150
of LED : Total
1 tier : height
190
tiers
2 tiers : 230
03 tiers
tiers :: 150
270
14 tiertiers :: 190
310
25 tiers
tiers :: 230
350
3 tiers : 270
4 tiers : 310
5 tiers : 350

LED Unit
40

Nameplate

LED Unit

SerialNumberNameplate40
131

SerialNumber

*1

131

*1

*2

88

161

88

Front View
88

Side View
161

Rear View
88(Unit: mm)

Side View

Rear View(Unit: mm)

φ40
Front
View

● NHB4*2

Head Coverφ40
Head Cover

Numberof LED : Total
heighttiers
Number0 tiers : 150
of LED : Total
1 tier : height
190
tiers
2 tiers : 230
03 tiers
tiers :: 150
270
14 tiertiers :: 190
310
25 tiers
tiers :: 230
350
3 tiers : 270
4 tiers : 310
5 tiers : 350*1 Magnified*1 Magnified

LED Unit
40

Nameplate

LED Unit

SerialNumberNameplate40
131

SerialNumber

*1

131

*2

*1

*2

88

161

88

Front View
88

Side View
161

Rear View
88

Front View

Side View*2 Magnified

Rear View(Unit: mm)
Reset Button

Clear Button

Maintenance Slot
*2 Magnified

DIP Switches

Clear Button
Test Button

Maintenance Slot

– Volume Button+Status
VolumeButtonLED– Volume Button

Reset Button
USBSwitches
Connector*3
DIP
USB Connector*3
LAN Connector+ Volume
Test
ButtonButton

Status LED(Unit: mm)

Power Cable Clamp

DC Power
Jack
LAN
Connector

Power
Clamp
*3 Do
not Cable
use theUSB connector for purposes otherDCthan
those
Power
Jack specified.
*3 Do not use the USB connector for purposes other than those specified.

17

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

4. Part Names and Dimensions

4.2. NHV Series● NHV6
φ60
φ60

Head CoverHead Cover

Numberof LED : Total
heightNumbertiers
of LED : Total
heighttiers
0 tiers: 150
1 tier : 190
0 tiers: 150
2 tiers: 230
1 tier : 190
3 tiers: 270
2 tiers: 230
4 tiers: 310
3 tiers: 270
5 tiers: 350
4 tiers: 310
5 tiers: 350

LED Unit
LED Unit

40

Nameplate
SerialNameplate
NumberSerialNumber

40

131
131

● NHV4

*1

*2

*1

*2

88

161

88

88
Front View

161
Side View

88
Rear View(Unit: mm)

Front View
φ40

Side View

Rear View(Unit: mm)

φ40

Head CoverHead Cover

Numberof LED : Total
heightNumbertiers
of LED : Total
heighttiers
0 tiers: 150
1 tier : 190
0 tiers: 150
2 tiers: 230
1 tier : 190
3 tiers: 270
2 tiers: 230
4 tiers: 310
3 tiers: 270
5 tiers: 350
4 tiers: 310
5 tiers: 350

LED Unit
Nameplate

LED Unit

40

SerialNameplate
NumberSerialNumber

40

131
131

*1

*2

*1

*2

88
88
Front View

88

161

88
Rear View(Unit: mm)(Unit: mm)

Side View

Front View

*1 Magnified*1 Magnified

161

Clear Button

Side View

Rear View*2 Magnified

External Contact Input/Output Model D*2 Magnified

External Contact Input/Output Model D
Reset Button

Maintenance Slot

Clear Button

Maintenance Slot

Test Button

Input/Output
Terminal Block*3
Input/Output
Terminal Block*3

Test Button+ Volume Button+– Volume
Volume Button
ButtonLED–Status
VolumeButtonStatus LED

DIP Switches
Reset
ButtonLineSwitches
Out
DIP
Line OutUSB Connector*4
USB Connector*4
LAN Connector

LAN Connector
Power Cable
DC Power Jack
Clamp
Power Cable
DC
Power JackClamp
*3 For "For models without contact inputs/outputs", there is no
input/output
terminal
block.
*3 For"For models
without
contact inputs/outputs", there is no*4 input/output
Do not use theUSBconnector
for purposes other than thoseterminal block.
specified.
*4 Do
not use the USB connector for purposes other than those. specified.
.

18

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5. Product Features and Functions
5.1. Product Features
5.1.1. Installation
You can choose from various installation methods suitable for your environment.

Stationary

Mounting on a Tripod(Tripod screw: 1/4"-20 UNC)

Installation with Wallmount Bracket /Partition Mounting Bracket (optional parts)
For supported options, refer to "13. Replacement and Optional Parts" ( ☞ page386)

5.1.2. PoE Support

NHV Series ( P model)

PoE (Power over Ethernet) support allows for an easy power supply without requiring an AC adapter.

Power supply

LAN Cable
PoE Power Hub or
PoE Injector

5.1.3. Multilingual Support
You can work with the Web Setup Screen in multiple supported languages.

Supported languages
Japanese, English, Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese, Korean, Thai, German,
French, Italian, Spanish, Spanish (International),
Spanish (Mexico)19

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.1.4. Operations When Connecting to a Cloud Environment
From the cloud, you can control your products and get their status.
You can also send the product status to the cloud.

Microsoft Azure

Amazon AWSNHB Series

NHV Series

5.2. Product Functions
5.2.1. Signal Tower, Buzzer, Audio Playback

You can use various ways to notify people about what's going on.

Equipment A ismalfunctioning

Signal Tower

BuzzerAudio Playback

・Red, Amber, Green, Blue, White,
Light off, Light on, 4 flashing patterns

5 buzzer patterns

・71 types of message playback(11 preset types)

・Adjust between 4 levels of brightness

NHB Series

・3 patterns of playback modes(one-shot playback, repeat playback,and endless playback)

NHV Series

5.2.2. Voice Synthesizer

NHV Series

You can generate and play audio from text information.

Equipment A ismalfunctioning

Equipment A is malfunctioning

Equipment A ismalfunctioning

20

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.2.3. Monitoring the Status
You can use various methods to monitor the status of network devices and devices with contact outputs.

PING monitoring

SNMP v1 v2c v3

Alive monitoring of the network and devices.

Monitor the state of network equipment at a low cost.
This product, as an SNMP manager, receives SNMP
TRAPs from equipment on the network (UPS, printers,routers, switches, and so on) and performs predefined
operations. Also, the product sends SNMP commands toequipment on the network to monitor their state.

This product can perform alive monitoring of
up to 24 nodes.
If there are any issues in the lines connected
to nodes, or there is no response frommonitored equipment, the product considers
it a problem and performs predefined
operations.

TRAP receive and SNMP
monitor functions can also be
set up with operations when
there are variable-bindings.

Digital input

PLC monitoring

Monitors information on PLC devices that
support the SLMP (MC) protocol or the
FINS protocol. The product can monitor
information on up to 16 devices.

Monitors the state of equipment with contact outputs.
This product, with its four digital inputs, monitors signals
from equipment with contact outputs. The product performs
predefined operations in response to changes in the input
state of equipment.

It performs predefined operations when thepreset conditions are met or when error data isreceived.

5.2.4. Email detection

NHV Series ( D model)

NHV Series

You can automatically detect incoming email and report important email only.
Receive important email

Detected

Mail server

21

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.2.5. Commands for Control of Communication
・ You can use various commands to control or notify the product, as well as check its status.
・ You can control this product using the same commands as the NH-FB and NH-FV series.
RSH/SSH

SOCKET Communication

Control Possible with the RSH/ SSH
Generic Protocol

PNS commands supported (productcompatibility commands)

You can use the RSH/ SSH generic protocol tocontrol Signal Light and channel playback.
Use event information from integrated network
management software or various monitoring
tools as triggers to control signal lights.

You can use PNS commands to control signal
lights and channel playback. You can control all
notification patterns.

HTTP or HTTPS
Commands

Event Occurrence: Execute command(turn on red signal light, turn off green, no operation
for amber, blue, white and the buzzer.)
For RSH: rsh 192.168.10.1 -l root alert 190999
For SSH: ssh 192.168.10.1 -l root alert 190999

Control Using HTTP/HTTPS Commands
To turn on red and green signal lights, turn off
amber, blue, and white, and emit buzzer
pattern 2
http://192.168.10.1/api/control?alert=101002

Event Occurrence: Execute command(Command 1: Turn on red, amber, and white signal
lights. Command 2: Play channel 35 eleven times[repeat ten times].)For PNS commands:
Command 1:
58H,58H,53H,00H,00H,06H,01H,01H,09H,09H,01H,
09H
Command 2:
58H,58H,56H,00H,00H,04H,01H,0AH,00H,35H

PHN commands supported (productcompatibility commands)
You can use double-byte commands to control
signal lights and the buzzer.
* Compatible with PHN-3FBE1, NHE / NHC /NHM series, and NH-FB / NH-FV series.
* There are restrictions on some functions.

Event Occurrence: Execute command(turn on red signal light, flash amber, turn on green,and emit buzzer pattern 2.)
For PHN compatible commands: 57H, 55H

5.2.6. Status Notification
When an event occurs, notifications can be sent in various ways.
Digital Output

NHV Series ( D model)

Email Transmission
You can send (select) up to 8 emails.
You can create titles and body text
suitable for events. POP / SMTP
authentication (OAuth2 passwords) is
supported.

With 2 digital outputs, you cancontrol equipment configured withcontact inputs.

Line Out

SNMP v1 v2c v3

NHV SeriesWith its single line out, you can
output playback of the channel to an
equipment's line input.

HTTP Command Transmission
Sent HTTP commands to up to 8 locations.
You can send HTTP/HTTPS commands
suitable for events.

22

Send SNMP Trap/Inform to up to 8 nodes.
(For Trap transmission, SNMP versions
supported are v1, v2c, and v3, and forInform transmission, v2c and v3.)
You can send SNMP Trap/Inform
corresponding to events to up to 8 nodes.

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3. Function Descriptions
This section describes the functions of this product.

5.3.1. Signal Tower and Buzzer Notification Functions
・You can turn on, turn off or flash the Signal Tower, or emit a buzzer in response to events.
The following three operation patterns are available.

● Signal Tower operation patternLight ON
Always ON

Flashing Pattern 1
ON 500 ms

OFF 500 ms

ON 500 ms

OFF 500 ms

Flashing Pattern 2
OFF 170 ms
ON 80 ms

OFF 170 ms

OFF 500 ms

ON 80 ms

OFF 170 ms

OFF 500 ms

OFF 170 ms
ON 80 ms

ON 80 ms

Flashing Pattern 3
ON 250 ms

OFF 250 ms

ON 250 ms

OFF 250 ms

ON 250 ms

OFF 250 ms

ON 250 ms

OFF 250 ms

Flashing Pattern 4
ON 1000 ms

OFF 1000 ms● Signal Tower dimming pattern
You can adjust 4 levels of brightness.

● Buzzer operation pattern
Buzzer Pattern 1
ON 250 ms

OFF 250 ms

ON 250 ms

OFF 250 ms

ON 250 ms

OFF 250 ms

ON 250 ms

OFF 250 ms

Buzzer Pattern 2
ON 500 ms

OFF 500 ms

ON 500 ms

OFF 500 ms

Buzzer Pattern 3
ON 200 ms

ON 200 ms

OFF 550 ms

ON 200 ms

ON 200 ms

OFF 550 ms

OFF 50 ms

OFF 50 ms

Buzzer Pattern 4
Always ON

Buzzer Pattern 5
ON 1000 ms

OFF 1000 ms

23

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5.3.2. Audio Playback Function

5. Product Features and Functions

NHV Series・ You can play back*¹ audio messages (MP3 files) stored in internal memory in response to events.
・This product handles saved messages in "channel" units.

● Types of Channels
There are 71 channels, from 1 to 71, divided into two categories by channel number.
Channel Number

Name

Description

Channels 1 – 60

Registered Channels*²

Channels where users can register messages.

Channels 61 – 71

Preset Channels*³*⁴

Channels with fixed messages registered at time of shipment.

*1 You can set the volume for audio playback with the Web Setup Screen or the +/- volume buttons on the frontof the product.
*2 Registration to channels is done from the Web Setup Screen.
*3 You cannot delete or edit preset channels.
*4 The line out function is not available for preset channels.

● Audio Playback Pattern for Each Channel
On a channel, you can set a playback pattern for each event. There are three playback patterns.
Playback Pattern

Description

One-shot playback

Playback the channel 1 time. Audio playback will not be repeated.

Repeat playback*⁵*⁶

After a channel is played once, repeats playback the set number of times.

Endless playback

Repeatedly playback the channel.

*5 If the number of times to repeat is set to 0, operates the same as One-shot playback.
*6 If the number of times to repeat is set to 255, playback will be endless.

● Notification Sound Registration
When registering channels 1 to 60, you can specify the notification sound that plays before and after themessage.
Notification
sound number

Description

No.1 ～ 5

Notification sounds that users can registerNo.6 ～ 10

Notification sounds registered at time of shipment24

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions● Audio Playback Mode
For the audio playback mode, you can select either [Playback from latest input mode] or [Memory playbackmode]. For features about each mode, refer to the following.
Point● Playback mode also applies to methods that play audio directly from text, such as HTTP commands.
However, due to the wait time required for the language analysis process, there may be a gap in playback timing.

・ Playback from Latest Input Mode

When a new playback event occurs, the audio currently playing is interrupted and a new audio begins playing.
To play the audio at the same time as the event occurs, use this function to synchronize the timing of event
operation with playback audio.
Event 1

Event 2

Event Operation Timing

Operation 1

Operation 2

Audio playback status

Channel 1

Channel 2Interrupts playback.

・ Memory Playback Mode (when channel 61 to 64 or 71 is not included)
When a new playback event occurs, the audio to play is registered in the memory.
When playback of a audio ends, plays audio in the order they were registered in the memory.
Use this option when you want to play audio until the end, or when you want to play audio a set number of times
or in a set order.
While Playing

Playback Event

Other than Buzzer Pattern (channel 61 to 64 or 71)

Other than Buzzer Pattern (channel 61 to 64 or 71)

Event 1

Event 2

Event Operation Timing

Operation 1

Audio playback status

Channel 1

Operation 2

Channel 2

Register to memory.

When channel 1 ends, the memory
contents are played back.

CAUTION
The maximum number of channels that can be registered in memory is 5. If you exceed 5 channels, additional
channels or text for audio are not registered in the memory and are discarded. However, operations set for events(Signal Tower,send email , SNMP notification, and so on) will execute.
In Memory playback mode, there is a delay between the audio playback and execution of event operations.

25Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

・ Memory Playback Mode (when channel 61, 62, 63, 64 or 71 is included)
In Memory playback mode, when executing operations that include a preset channel (61 to 64 or 71, buzzer
pattern 1 to 5), the operation is different from other channels as shown below.
When a playback event occurs while playing channel 61 to 64 or 71 (buzzer pattern 1 to 5)
While a buzzer pattern is playing and a playback event (event 2) occurs, operations can be divided as follows.
Operation

While Playing

Playback EventA

Buzzer Pattern (channel 61 to 64 or 71)

Other than Buzzer Pattern (channel 61 to 64 or 71)

B

Buzzer Pattern (channel 61 to 64 or 71)

Buzzer Pattern (channel 61 to 64 or 71)

Operation A: When the playback event does not use channel 61 to 64 or 71 (buzzer pattern 1 to 5)
The current buzzer pattern continues to play, and event 2 is registered in the memory.
As the buzzer patternʼs Repeat playback is set as endless playback, use one of the following methods to play
Event 2 in the memory.
・ In the Clear Operation Settings, set [Skip] and press the clear button.
・ Execute the RSH/SSH Command [STOP Command].

Event 1

Event 2

Event Operation Timing

Operation 1

Audio playback status

Buzzer 1

Operation 2

Register to memory.

26

Buzzer 1 continues playing
until you stop it.

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

Operation B: When the playback event that occurred is channel 61 to 64 or 71 (buzzer pattern 1 to 5)
Even if another audio is playing, instead of registering to memory, interrupts the currently playing audio andimmediately plays buzzer 2 for event 2. At the start of playback, erases all channels or text for audio registeredinl memory.
Event 1

Event 2

Event Operation Timing

Operation 1

Operation 2

Audio playback status

Channel 1

Buzzer 2
Interrupts playback.

Memory is erased.

The following audio is registered in the preset channels.
ChannelRegistered Content

ChannelRegistered Content

Channel 61

Buzzer pattern 1

Channel 67

Chime 3 (end of notification)

Channel 62

Buzzer pattern 2

Channel 68

Irregularrities were detected in the
network*

Channel 63

Buzzer pattern 3

Channel 69

Abnormalities had occurred*

Channel 64

Buzzer pattern 4

Channel 70

Abnormalities were eradicated*

Channel 65

Chime 1 (ET Doorbell)

Channel 71

Buzzer pattern 5

Channel 66

Chime 2 (start of notification)* The language played differs depending on the language set on the login screen of the WEB settings screen.
Japanese : Play in Japanese English : Play in English Simplified Chinese : Play in Chinese["7.4. Displaying the Web Setup Screen" ( ☞ page 111)]

The following sound is registered as preset notification sounds.
notification
sound

registered content

notification
sound 6

Chime 1（Ping Pong）

notification
sound 7

Chime 2（Broadcast Start）

notification
sound 8Chime 3（End of Broadcast）

notification
sound 9Alarm 1（Pyrrillo）

notification
sound 10

Alarm 2（Warning Sound）

27

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5.3.3. Line Out Function

5. Product Features and Functions

NHV Series

Signals from line out can be output in conjunction with audio playback. You can [Enabled] or [Disabled] the line out
for each channel.

CAUTION
Do not connect headphones, earphones, or passive speakers (speakers without a built-in amplifier) to line out.
Do not connect multi-pole mini plugs other than mono or stereo plugs.
When playing preset channels, no signal is output from line out.

Point
● Using the Busy output of the External Contact Output Function, you can set a delay time from when an event occurs until
the signal is sent to the line out.
● You can set the signal volume of the line out on the Web Setup Screen.

5.3.4. Voice Synthesizer Function

NHV Series・ This product can render speech from text and perform audio playback.
・ Messages (MP3 files) registered in internal memory from the Web Setup Screen can be played back in responseto received digital inputs or control commands. They can also be played directly using HTTP Commands.
・ For audio playback using HTTP Commands, refer to "8.3.1.5. Play Any Text" ( ☞ page 187).
・ When using the voice synthesizer, pay attention to the following items to create more natural messages.
・ For information on how to register text, refer to "7.16. Setting Up Voice Registration" ( ☞ page 128).
・ Specify a notification sound that plays before or after the message when registering text or executing HTTP
commands.

● Precautions About Input When Performing Voice Synthesis
No.

Input

Description

1

About phonetic reading

On-yomi and Kun-yomi can be distinguished segment by segment, but
not the context. Enter hiragana characters to suit your purpose.

2

About phrases

Words that are connected are considered a segment, and emphasis ina syllable or word is placed accordingly. Enter spaces between words ifnecessary.

3

For words that can be read in multiple
ways

The context or name cannot be determined. Enter hiragana characters
so it is read correctly.

4

About symbols (such as [ ~ ] and [ * ])Read aloud using the original character reading. Enter hiragana
characters to suit your purpose.

5

About units

Some units are not identified. Enter hiragana characters to suit yourpurpose.

6

Chinese reading

Traditional characters may not be read.
Enter in simplified characters.

CAUTION
Although the specification allows entering 400 characters, if you enter a large number of characters, there is a longwait for the language analysis process to complete.
(Approximate time for 400 characters: 60 seconds for command control, 1-2 minutes for Web setting.)
To resolve long wait times, reduce text inputs to the length of a single, short sentence.
You cannot stop the language analysis process by executing a clear operation.

28

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5.3.5. External Contact Output Function

5. Product Features and Functions

NHV Series ( D model)This product has two external contact output ports. By connecting equipment with a contact input, you can perform
contact control.
For the output mode, you can select [Digital Output Mode] or [Busy Output Mode].

● Digital Output Mode・ In response to events, you can control external contact output as a digital output port.
・ Contact A (normally open) or Contact B (normally closed).
・ The following defines ON and OFF for digital output.
・ The contact output can be automatically turned OFF after a period of time from the initial contact control.
Operation Status

ON

Digital Boolean Value

1

OFF

01H

0

Description

00H

Contact A

OFF opens the contact.

(make contact)(normally open)

ClosedClosedcircuitcircuitOpenOpen
circuitcircuit

ON closes the contact andallows power to flow.

Contact
StatusContact B

OFF closes the contact andallows power to flow.

(break contact)(normallyclosed)Closed circuit

Open circuit

Closed circuit

ON opens Openthe contact.
circuitCAUTION
When you set the automatic contact output OFF time, after contact output is controlled ON, the contact output
automatically turns OFF after the set time elapses.
If the contact output is controlled ON again before the set time has elapsed, the elapsed time up to that point iscleared.

Elapsed time after
first controlled ON
Contact Output

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF
Time Axis

Contact Output
controlled ON

OFF after
time elapses

Contact Output
controlled ON

29

Contact Output
controlled ON again

OFF after
time elapses

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions● Busy Output Mode・ You can link the signal output from line out with the contact output.
・ While signal is output from line out, the contact output is closed, and is opened when the output is stopped.
・ In consideration of the rise time of equipment connected to the line out output, you can delay the signal output
timing from line out by using the output delay time.

CAUTION
The logic setting is fixed to Contact A (normally open). Contact B (normally closed) cannot be selected.
You cannot use control commands to control contact output.
For playback of preset channels, as line out output does not take place, Busy output does not work.
For Playback from latest Input mode, if a new event occurs while the output delay time has not fully elapsed, theoutput delay time is canceled and the next event operation is executed.
If an event occurs within 1 second after the line out output is stopped, the Busy output remains closed. In this case,the output delay is disabled and the line out output occurs without delay.

30

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.6. Send Email Function
・ In response to an event, you can send email to registered email addresses (up to 8).
・ Supported Authentication methods are SMTP authentication (password, OAuth2), POP authentication, and noauthentication.
・ Supported encryption methods are SSL/TLS, STARTTLS, and None.
・ The structure of the contents of the email that is sent is as follows.

①
Installation location: ②

Equipment name: ③

Contact: ④

Event that occurred: ⑤

Information

: ⑥

⑦

No.

Function

Description①

Subject*

Displays the subject specified by the event notification.

②

Installation location

Displays the set installation location.

③

Equipment name

Displays the set name of equipment.

④

Contact

Displays the set contact information.

⑤

Event that occurred

Displays the name of the event that took place.

⑥

Information

Displays information about the event.

⑦

Body text*

Includes the body text specified in the event
notification.

* You can select the subject and body text from among a total of 17, 16 that you can register for events and 1 that isfixed.
* When using the fixed subject (17th item), the subject of the sent email is in the following format.
<Installation location>:<YY/MM/DD hh:mm>:<Event details>:<Name>
Year Month Date Hours Minutes* When using the fixed text (17th item), the information of Installation location, Equipment name, Contact, Event that
occurred, Information, and Body text are not sent.

31

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions● List of Event Content and Names
In response to the event that occurred, event content and name are listed with the following information.
Event that occurred

Event Content

Name

TRAP received<none>

Group name as registered in the TRAP monitoring settings

Cleared using push-button
switch": CLEAR-Button"<none>

Cleared using SNMP": CLEAR-Snmp"<none>

Cleared using RSH/SSH": CLEAR-Rsh/Ssh"<none>

Ping monitoring error
detected": PING-Error"

Unit name as registered in the Ping Monitoring Settings

Ping monitoring recovery
detected": PING-Recover"

Unit name as registered in the Ping Monitoring Settings

Ping group monitoring error
detected“: PING_Group-Error”<none>

Ping group monitoring
recovery detected“: PING_Group-Recover”<none>

RSH/SSH Commandexecuted": RSH/SSH-Executes"<none>

Test button pressed": TEST-Button"<none>

Digital input contact changed
to ON state": DINPUT-On"

Number of the digital input that turned on, DI1 to DI4

Digital input contact changed
to OFF state": DINPUT-Off"

Number of the digital input that turned off, DI1 to DI4

Condition matched for SNMP
Device Monitoring": SNMPGET-Match"

Equipment name registered in SNMP Device Monitoring
Settings - Match Detection Settings

Condition released for SNMP
Device Monitoring": SNMPGET-Release"

Equipment name registered in SNMP Device Monitoring
Settings - Release condition settings

Change detected for SNMP
Device Monitoring": SNMPGET-Change"<none>

Match digital input condition": DINPUT-Condition"

Number of the digital input (1 to 4) whose condition matched
the condition setting

Detect email“: MAILFILTER-Match”

Number registered in Mail detection setting - Filter rulesettings

PLC information reading
function activated“: PLC-Action”

Number of the registered device (1 to 16) whose condition
matched

PLC information reading
function error response“: PLC-Error”

Number of the registered device (1 to 16) that caused the
error

32

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions● List of Additional Information
In response to the event that occurred, additional information is listed with the following content.
Event Listed

Additional Information Listed

TRAP was received.

Group name: Registered address

The "Clear" Button was pushed.

None

A "Clear" was made by the SNMP.

None

A "Clear" was made by the RSH/SSH.

IP address

Ping Monitor Abnormality detected.

Unit name: Registered address

Ping Monitor Recovery detected.

Unit name: Registered address

Ping Group Monitor Abnormality detected.

Unit name: Registered address : Group

Ping Group Monitor Recovery detected.

Unit name: Registered address : Group

RSH/SSH Command was executed.

IP address

Test Button was pressed.

None

Digital input was set to ON.

Port number (1 to 4)

Digital input was set to OFF.

Port number (1 to 4)

Conditions agreed with the SNMP supported
equipment.

Equipment Name: Monitored address

Conditions agreed with the SNMP supported
equipment were cancelled.

Equipment Name: Monitored address

SNMP supported equipment changes weredetected.

Equipment Name: Monitored address

Digital Input conditions agree.

Input condition (1 to 4)
Matched Filter: Registered filter number*1

Conditions agreed with the Mail detection.

Control Success: Registered filter number*2
Control Failure: Registered filter number*2

Conditions agreed with the PLC information
reading function.

Device name: Registered address

An error in the PLC information reading
function was received.

Device name: Registered address*1 Not listed when using the email control function.
*2 This is only listed when using the email control function.

33

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.7. SNMP TRAP/Inform Transmission Function
・In response to events, you can send SNMP Trap/Inform to 8 SNMP-enabled equipment.
・For Trap transmission, SNMP versions supported are v1, v2c, and v3, and for Inform transmission, v2c and v3.
・For the notification method, you can choose either TRAP or Inform transmission.
・For information on Trap transmission, refer to "10. MIB List" ( ☞ page 367).
・For the procedure on using SNMP TRAP transmissions, refer to "8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134).

● Communication Protocols
ProtocolPort Number

UDP

162

5.3.8. Send HTTP Command Function
・In response to events, you can send HTTP/HTTPS Commands to 8 equipment on the network.
・For the protocol, select either [HTTP] or [HTTPS].
・For the procedure on sending HTTP Commands, refer to "8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings" ( ☞page 141).

● Communication Port
ProtocolPort Number

HTTP

80

HTTPS

443

5.3.9. Send HTTP Command Function
・In response to changing Signal Tower, you can transmit the change information of Signal Tower and buzzer via
HTTP/HTTPS to 8 equipment on the network.
・For the protocol, select either [HTTP] or [HTTPS].
・Change information is transmitted using HTTP command with "alert" parameter.
" ● Parameters You Can Execute" on page 55● Communication Port
ProtocolPort Number

HTTP

80

HTTPS

443

34

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.10. RSH/SSH Command Function
You can use this product with RSH (Remote Shell) or SSH (Secure Shell) to execute shell commands from anothercomputer.
By executing commands, you can get and control the status of the Signal Tower.
There are two different formats for executing shell commands. For information on each command, refer toexplanations on the commands.
RSH
・ rsh

<IP address> [

-l

・ rsh

<IP address>

-l

Space

Space

Space

Space

<login name>]Space<command> [Space<common login name>Space<option>]Space<command> [Space<option>]

Space

SSH
ssh

<IP address> [

-l

Space

Space

<login name>]

Space

Space

<command> [Space<option>]

Point● You can omit [ ].
● For the IP address, specify [IPv4 address], [IPv6 address], or [Host name].
● When executing without the login name, make sure you set the source IP address and login name in the command
reception settings.
● Do not forget a space between each element in the command.
● In the RSH Command Reception Settings, when the send-from address restriction is [Disabled], execute the commandusing a common login name.

● Commands You Can Execute
Command

Description

alert

Controls the Signal Tower and buzzer.

alert doControls digital output.

color

Controls the Signal Tower and buzzer.

soundControls the Signal Tower and audio playback.

stop

Stops playing audio.

clear
doclearstatustest
dotestExecutes the clear operation and returns to the normal operation status.
Gets the state of the Signal Tower, buzzer, audio playback channel, and digital I/O.
Runs a self-test.

35

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions● Descriptions of Each Command・ alert Command
Overview

Control Signal Tower (rygbc) and buzzer (bz)Formatalert <r><y><g><b><c><bz> [<sec>]

Return Value<r><y><g><b><c><bz> (state of Signal Tower after command is executed)

Type

Value

r

Red unit

Light patternyAmber unit

1: Light ongGreen unitbBlue unit

4: Flashing pattern 3cWhite unit

9: No control

0: Light off
2: Flashing pattern 1
3: Flashing pattern 2
5: Flashing pattern 4
Buzzer pattern
0: Buzzer off
1: Buzzer pattern 1bz

Buzzer

2: Buzzer pattern 2
3: Buzzer pattern 3
4: Buzzer pattern 4
5: Buzzer pattern 5
9: No control
Control time (seconds)

sec

Control time

0: Do not specify the control time (can be omitted)
1 to 99: Specified amount of control time

CAUTION
If you execute an alert command while another alert command is running, the control time is overwritten. However, in
the RSH/SSH Command Reception Settings, if restore timer is set individually, you can also individually specify thecontrol time.

Point● Items in brackets [ ] are optional. Can be omitted.
● When the set time elapses, returns to the Signal Tower state and operation of channels 61 to 64 or 71 (buzzer pattern
1 to 5) before the alert command was executed.
● When the control time is omitted, the control state is continuous.

36

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual・ alert do Command

NHV Series ( D model)

Overview

Control digital output <do1><do2>

Formatalert do <do1><do2>

Return Value

5. Product Features and Functions<do1><do2> (digital output state after command is executed)

Type
do1

Digital Output 1

do2

Digital Output 2

Value
Digital Output State
0: OFF
1: ON
9: No control

CAUTION
In the External Contact Output settings, ports set to Busy output cannot be controlled.
When set to Busy output, the digital output status is OFF regardless of the actual output state.
ON and OFF indicate the digital boolean value of each port.
You can omit do2, but you cannot omit do1.

37

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

・ color Command
Overview

Control a Signal Towerʼs LED unit (multi-color) and buzzer

Formatcolor <col> [<c-pat>] [-b <b-pat>]

Return Value<col> [<c-pat>] [-b <b-pat>] (state of Signal Tower after command is executed)
Type

Value
Color of light for LED unit (multi-color)
Red
Amber
Green

col

LED Unit Color

Blue
White
PurpleLight blue
OFF: Light off
NONE: No control
Light on, flashing pattern
1: Light on

c-pat

Light on, flashing pattern

2: Flashing pattern 1
3: Flashing pattern 2
4: Flashing pattern 3
5: Flashing pattern 4
Buzzer pattern
0: Buzzer off
1: Buzzer pattern 1b-pat

Buzzer

2: Buzzer pattern 2
3: Buzzer pattern 3
4: Buzzer pattern 4
5: Buzzer pattern 5
9: No control

CAUTION
The color command should only be used when a Multi-color unit is installed.

Point● Items in brackets [ ] are optional. Can be omitted.

38

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual・ sound Command

NHV Series

Overview

Control Signal Tower (rygbc) and audio playback (ch)Formatsound [-r <repeat>] [-c <r><y><g><b><c>] <ch>

Return Value<ch> (audio playback channel for after command is executed)
Type

Value
Number of times to repeat

repeatNumber of times torepeat0: One-shot playback (can be omitted)
1 to 254: Number of times to repeat
255: Endless playbackr

Red unit

Light patternyAmber unit

1: Light ongGreen unitbBlue unit

4: Flashing pattern 3cWhite unit

9: No controlch

Audio channel

0: Light off
2: Flashing pattern 1
3: Flashing pattern 2
5: Flashing pattern 4
Audio playback channel
1 to 71: Audio channel

CAUTION
If you omit the number of times to repeat, plays one time.
Channels 61 to 64 and 71 are always played back in [Playback from latest input mode].

Point● Items in brackets [ ] are optional. Can be omitted.

・ stop Command
Overview
FormatReturn ValueNHV Series

・Stop audio playback (ch) (when using [Playback from latest input mode])
・Skip Track (in Memory playback mode)stop<ch> (audio playback channel before command is executed)
Type

Value
Audio playback channelch

Audio channel

0: Stop
1 to 71: Audio channel

39

5. Product Features and Functions

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

・ clear Command, doclear Command
Overview
FormatReturn Value

Execute the clear operation and return to normal operating statusclear [-p] [-z]doclear [-p] [-z]<r><y><g><b><c><bz> (state of Signal Tower after command is executed)
Typer

Red unityAmber unitgGreen unitbBlue unitcWhite unitbz

BuzzerValue

Light pattern
0: Light off
1: Light on
9: Uncontrolled

Buzzer pattern
0: Buzzer off
9: Uncontrolled

CAUTION
When the option "-p" is added, buzzer and audio playback are not controlled.
When the option "-z" is added, Signal Tower units (Red, Amber, Green, Blue, and White) are not controlled.

Point● Items in brackets [ ] are optional. Can be omitted.
● For information about the clear operation, refer to "5.3.21. Clear Operation Function" ( ☞ page 77).

40

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

・status Command
Overview

Get the digital I/O state of Signal Tower, buzzer, and audio playback channels

Formatstatus [-s] [di] [do]Return ValueNo option<r><y><g><b><c><bz> (state of Signal Tower when command is executed)

Option -s<ch> (audio playback channel when command is executed)

Option di

DI: <di1><di2><di3><di4> (state of digital input when command is executed)

Option do

DO: <do1><do2> (state of digital output when command is executed)

Typer

Red unityAmber unitgGreen unitbBlue unitcWhite unit

Value
Light pattern
0: Light off
1: Light on
2: Flashing pattern 1
3: Flashing pattern 2
4: Flashing pattern 3
5: Flashing pattern 4

BuzzerBuzzer pattern
0: Buzzer off
1: Buzzer pattern 1
2: Buzzer pattern 2
3: Buzzer pattern 3
4: Buzzer pattern 4
5: Buzzer pattern 5chAudio channel

Audio playback channel
0: Stopped
1 to 71: Audio channel
200 or 201:Text-to-speech playback by command.

di1

Digital Input 1

di2

Digital Input 2

di3

Digital Input 3

di4

Digital Input 4

do1

Digital Output 1

do2

Digital Output 2bz

Digital Input State
0: OFF
1: ON

Digital Output State
0: OFF
1: ON

CAUTION
When set to Busy output, the digital output status is OFF regardless of the actual output state.
Options "-s", "di", and "do" cannot be specified at the same time.

Point● Items in brackets [ ] are optional. Can be omitted.

41

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions・ test Command, dotest Command
For information about self-test, refer to "5.3.22. Self-test Function" ( ☞ page 79).
Overview
FormatReturn Value

Runs a self-test
test
dotestNone

CAUTION
The monitoring function continues operating while self-test is running. Be careful when checking the operation.
If PNS and PHN Commands are executed during or after execution of self-test, an error response is returned.
The RSH or SSH Command returns a Busy response.

Point● For information on the clear process during self-test, refer to "5.3.21. Clear Operation Function" ( ☞ page 77).

42

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.11. PNS Command Function (product compatibility commands)
By entering NH series commands, this product can get the state of the Signal Tower, as well as control the Signal
Tower.

● Communication Protocols
ProtocolTCP
UDP

Port Number
5000 to 65535● Commands You Can Execute
CommandID

Description

Signal Tower and Buzzer control Commands

S

Controls the Signal Tower and buzzer.

Audio Playback control Commands

V

Controls audio playback.

Digital output control Commands

D

Controls digital output.

Signal Tower and Audio Playback control Commands

W

Controls Signal Tower and audio playback.

Get status Command

G

Gets the state of the Signal Tower and buzzer.

Clear CommandC

Executes the clear operation and returns to thenormal operation status.

Multi-color unit control Commands

M

Controls Multi-color units and audio playback.

43

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions● Descriptions of Each Command
・Signal Tower and Buzzer control Commands
Request Command
Product Category

ID

UnusedData Size

Data

X

X

S

–

–

–

58H

58H

53H

00H

00H

06H

1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byteType

Signal Tower

2 bytes
Value

Red

Light patternAmber

01H: Light on

Green

00H: Light off
02H: Flashing pattern 1
03H: Flashing pattern 2

Blue

04H: Flashing pattern 3

White

09H: No control

05H: Flashing pattern 4
Buzzer pattern
00H: Buzzer off
01H: Buzzer pattern 1
02H: Buzzer pattern 2

Buzzer03H: Buzzer pattern 3
04H: Buzzer pattern 405H: Buzzer pattern 5
09H: No control

Response Command
Normal response

Error response

ACK

NAK

06H

15H

1 byte1 byte44

Signal Tower
Red

Amber

Green

Blue

White

1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byteBuzzer1 byteNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

・Audio Playback Control Commands
Request Command
Product Category

ID

UnusedData Size

X

X

V

–

–

–

58H

58H

56H

00H

00H

04H

1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byteType

2 bytes

Value
Playback Pattern

Playback Pattern

00H: Stop playback (skip track)
01H: Repeat playback
Number of times to repeat

Number of times torepeat00H: One-shot playback
01H to FEH: Number of times to repeat
FFH: Endless playback
Audio playback channel

Audio Channel

01H to 71H: Audio channel*Specify using BCD format.

Response Command
Normal response

Error response

ACK

NAK

06H

15H

1 byte1 byte45

Data
Playback
Pattern

Numberof times
to repeat(unused)1 byte1 byte1 byte00H

Audio Channel
1 byteNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

・Digital Output Control Commands
Request Command
Product Category

ID

UnusedData Size

X

X

D

–

–

–

58H

58H

44H

00H

00H

02H

1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byteType
Digital Output 1
Digital Output 2

2 bytes

Data

Data

Digital Output 1

Digital Output 2

1 byte1 byteValue
Digital Output State
00H: OFF
01H: ON
09H: No control

Response Command
Normal response

Error response

ACK

NAK

06H

15H

1 byte1 byteCAUTION
In the External Contact Output settings, ports set to Busy output cannot be used for control.

46

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

・Signal Tower and Audio Playback Control Commands
Request Command
Product Category

ID

UnusedData Size

X

X

W

–

–

–

58H

58H

57H

00H

00H

0AH

1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte2 bytes
Data

Signal Tower(unused)

Red

Amber

Green

Blue

White

00H

1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byteType

Signal Tower

Playback
Pattern

Numberof times
to repeat(unused)1 byte1 byte1 byteValue
Red

Light PatternAmber

01H: Light on

Green

00H: Light off
02H: Flashing pattern 1
03H: Flashing pattern 2

Blue

04H: Flashing pattern 3

White

09H: No control

05H: Flashing pattern 4Playback Pattern

Playback Pattern

00H: Stop playback (skip track)
01H: Repeat playback
Number of times to repeat

Number of times to repeat

00H: One-shot playback
01H to FEH: Number of times to repeat
FFH: Endless playback
Audio Playback Channel

Audio Channel

01H to 71H: Audio channel*Specify in BCD format.

Response Command
Normal response

Error response

ACK

NAK

06H

15H

1 byte1 byte

47

00H

Audio
Channel1 byteNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual・Get Status Command
Request Command
Product Category

ID

UnusedData Size

X

X

G

–

–

–

58H

58H

47H

00H

00H

00H

1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte2 bytes

Response Command
Response Data
Signal Tower
Red

Amber

Green

Blue

White

Buzzer1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte

Type

Value
Red
Amber

Signal Tower

Green
Blue
White

Light Pattern
00H: Light off
01H: Light on
02H: Flashing pattern 1
03H: Flashing pattern 2
04H: Flashing pattern 305H: Flashing pattern 4
Buzzer pattern
00H: Buzzer off
01H: Buzzer pattern 1

Buzzer02H: Buzzer pattern 2
03H: Buzzer pattern 3
04H: Buzzer pattern 405H: Buzzer pattern 548

5. Product Features and Functions

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual・Clear Command
Request Command
Product Category

ID

UnusedData Size

X

X

C

–

–

–

58H

58H

43H

00H

00H

00H

1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte2 bytes

Response Command
Normal response

Error response

ACK

NAK

06H

15H

1 byte1 byte49

5. Product Features and Functions

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

・Multi-color unit control Commands
Request Command
Product Category

ID

UnusedData Size

X

X

M

–

–

–

58H

58H

4DH

00H

00H

07H

1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte2 bytes

Data
Audio Playback

Multi-color unit
BuzzerColorLighting
pattern

1 byte1 byteType

NumberPlaybackof times

Pattern
1 byte1 byteValue(unused)to repeat

00H

1 byte1 byteType

Audio Channel

1 byteValue

Color of the Multi-color unit
01H: Red
02H: Amber
Color

03H: Green
04H: Blue

Playback
Pattern

Playback Pattern
00H: Stop playback (skip track)
01H: Repeat playback

Number of times
to repeat

Number of times to repeat
00H: One-shot playback
01H to FEH: Number of times to repeat
FFH: Endless playback

Audio Channel

Audio playback channel
01H to 71H: Audio channel*Specify using BCD format.

05H: White
06H: Purple
07H: Light blue
Lighting pattern
00H: Light off
01H: Light on
Lighting pattern

02H: Flashing pattern 1
03H: Flashing pattern 2
04H: Flashing pattern 305H: Flashing pattern 4
Buzzer pattern
00H: Buzzer off
01H: Buzzer pattern 1

Buzzer02H: Buzzer pattern 2
03H: Buzzer pattern 3
04H: Buzzer pattern 405H: Buzzer pattern 5
09H: No control

50

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

Response Command
Normal response

Error response

ACK

NAK

06H

15H

1 byte1 byteCAUTION
The Multi-color unit control Commands should only be used when a Multi-color unit is installed.
When playing audio playback, do not control the buzzer.
You can omit audio playback.
When you play audio playback in NHB series, it is ignored.

51

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.12. PHN Command Function (product compatibility commands)
By entering PHN series commands, this product can get the state of the Signal Tower, as well as control the Signal
Tower.

● Communication Protocols
ProtocolPort Number

TCP

5000 to 65535

UDP● Commands You Can Execute
Command

Description

W

Write Command

R

Read Command● Descriptions of Each Command・Write Command
Request Command
RequestCommand
W
57H

Operation Data
Signal Tower /Flashing pattern 1
Green

Amber

Signal Tower /Flashing pattern

Buzzer pattern (Audio Channel)
Buzzer pattern 1

Buzzer pattern 2
(62)

Red

1 byte

(61)

Green

1 byte
Item

Value
Green

Signal Tower / Flashing pattern 10b0: Do not flash

Amber

0b1: FlashRed
BuzzerBuzzer pattern 20b0: Buzzer off

Buzzer pattern 10b1: Buzzer on

GreenSignal Tower / Flashing patternAmber

0b0: Light off
0b1: Light on

Red

CAUTION
Can control the Signal Towerʼs Red, Amber, and Green lights and buzzer patterns 1 and 2 only.

52

Amber

Red

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

Response Command
Normal response

Error response

A

C

K

N

A

K

41H

43H

4BH

4EH

41H

4BH

1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte・Read Command
Request Command
RequestCommandR
52H
1 byteResponse Command
Response
Command
R
52H

Operation Data
Signal Tower /Flashing pattern 1
Green

Amber

Red

Buzzer pattern 2

Buzzer pattern 1

(62)

(61)

1 byte1 byte
Item

Value
Green

Signal Tower / Flashing pattern 10b0: Do not flash

Amber

0b1: FlashRed
BuzzerBuzzer pattern 20b0: Buzzer off

Buzzer pattern 10b1: Buzzer on

GreenSignal Tower / Flashing pattern

Signal Tower /Flashing pattern

Buzzer pattern(Audio Channel)

0b0: Light off

Amber

0b1: Light on

Red

53

Green

Amber

Red

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.13. HTTP Command Reception Function
This product can use HTTP/HTTPS commands to get the state of the Signal Tower, as well as control the Signal
Tower.

● Protocol
ProtocolPort Number

HTTP

80

HTTPS

443

● Request Method
GET● Format
The format for executing HTTP Commands is as follows.
HTTP
http://<address of this product>/api/<command>?<parameter>=<value>[&<parameter>=<value>][&<parameter>=<value>]
HTTPS
https://<address of this product>/api/<command>?<parameter>=<value>[&<parameter>=<value>][&<parameter>=<value>]
Point● Square brackets [ ] can be specified for specific commands and parameters only.
● You can specify the address using [IPv4 Address], [IPv6 Address], or [Host Name].

● Commands You Can Execute
Command

Description

control

Control the Signal Tower in accordance with the request specified by the parameter.

statusReturn Signal Tower information in accordance with the request specified by the parameter.

HTTP command input example 1

To turn on the LED unitʼs red light and play audio channel 1

http://192.168.10.1/api/control?led=10000&sound=1
HTTP command input example 2

To turn on the LED unitʼs green light, play notification sound 6 (Ping Pong),
and read the text "Equipment A completed processing" in a female voice

http://192.168.10.1/api/control?led=00100&speech=Equipment A completed processing&voice=female&notify=654

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions● Parameters You Can Execute
For command control
Parameter

Value

Description
Controls the Signal Tower and buzzer.
Light Pattern
0: Light off
1: Light on
2: Flashing pattern 1

r: Signal Tower Red
y: Signal Tower Amber
alert<r><y><g><b><c><bz>

g: Signal Tower Greenb: Signal Tower Bluec: Signal Tower Whitebz: Buzzer

3: Flashing pattern 2
4: Flashing pattern 3
5: Flashing pattern 4
9: No control
Buzzer pattern
0: Buzzer off
1: Buzzer pattern 1
2: Buzzer pattern 2
3: Buzzer pattern 3
4: Buzzer pattern 4
5: Buzzer pattern 5
9: No control
Controls digital output.

output<do1><do2>

do1: digital output 1

0: OFF

do2: digital output 2

1: ON
9: No control
Controls the Signal Tower.
Light Pattern

led<r><y><g><b><c>r: Signal Tower Red

0: Light off

y: Signal Tower Amber

1: Light on

g: Signal Tower Green

2: Flashing pattern 1b: Signal Tower Blue

3: Flashing pattern 2c: Signal Tower White

4: Flashing pattern 3
5: Flashing pattern 4
9: No control
Controls the multi-color.
Red: Red
Amber: Amber
Green: Green

color

Blue: Blue<color>White: White
Purple: Purple
Cyan: Cyan
NONE: No control

55

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Parameter

Value

5. Product Features and Functions

Description
Controls the multi-color pattern.

c-pat<c-pat>This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the "color"
command.
1: Light on
2: Flashing pattern 1
3: Flashing pattern 2
4: Flashing pattern 3
5: Flashing pattern 4Controls the buzzer

b-pat<b-pat>

sound

<ch>

This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the "color"
command.
0: Buzzer off
1: Buzzer pattern 1
2: Buzzer pattern 2
3: Buzzer pattern 3
4: Buzzer pattern 4
5: Buzzer pattern 5
9: No control
Controls audio playback.
1 to 71: Audio channel
Specifies the number of times to repeat audio playback.
This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the "sound" andspeech command.
0: One-shot playback
1 to 254: Number of times to repeat
255: Endless playback

repeat<repeat>restore<restore>

Specifies the control time (seconds).
0: Do not specify the control time (can be omitted)
1 to 99: Specified amount of control time

stop

1

The following operations are performed in accordance with productsettings.
・Stop audio playback (Playback from latest input mode)
・Skip track (Memory playback mode)

clear

1

Executes the clear operation and returns to the normal operation status.

speech<text>

Plays back audio of any text that was entered.
Maximum 400 characters ( Will playback up to 400 characters whenenter more than 400 characters. )<lang>

Selects the language for audio playback.
This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the "speech"
command.
jp Japaneseen English
cn Chinese*¹

voice<voice>Selects the language for audio.
This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the "speech"
command.
male / female

speed-5 to 5Specifies the speed of audio playback.
This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the "speech"
command.

tone-5 to 5Specifies the pitch of the voice for audio playback.
This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the "speech"
command.

lang*1 If you select "cn" on a product that does not have the Voice Synthesizer of Chinese, the same behavior as if
you selected "jp"(Japanese) will occur. refer to ["9.7.1. Voice Registration" ( ☞ page 356)] for how to checkthe languages supported by the Voice Synthesizer.

56

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Parameter

notifyValue

5. Product Features and Functions

Description
Select the notification sound that plays before text sound playback.This
parameter is used as an additional command for "speech".

0 to 10

0: Do not play
1-10: Notification sound number to play

notifyTail

Select the notification sound to play after text sound playback.This
parameter is used as an additional command for "speech".

0 to 10

0: Do not play
1-10: Notification sound number to play
Control line-out output.

lineout0, 1

0: OFF
1: ON

CAUTIONSpecify "restore" at the same time as you specify "alert". It will not operate when you specify other parameters.
Environment-dependent characters such as "©" and " ♠ " and some symbols such as "¥" and "~" may not be
synthesized correctly.

Point● You can specify "led" at the same time as "sound" or "speech" at the same time.
When lang, voice, speed, tone are not specified or the value is invalid, it works with the following values.

●

Parameter

Specified value

lang

jp

voice

male

speed

0

tone

0

For command status
Parameter

Value

Description
Returns the state of the Signal Tower in the specified format.

format<format>

xml: Data in XML format
json: Data in JSON format● Responses When Executing HTTP Commands
For command control
When successful
When failed

Success.
Error.<error code>

Error CodeDescription

002

Invalid command.

003

The command is not specified.

004

The value is not specified.

005

Invalid value.

57

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

For command status
When successful
When failed

Data of response in the specified format
Error.

● List of Data You Can Get
XML
Data

Description
LED1: Red
LED2: Amber
LED3: Green

color nameName of Signal Tower Color

LED4: Blue
LED5: WhiteMULTI_COL: Multi-color
MULTI_PAT: Multi-color pattern・LED 1 to 5, MULTI_PAT
0: Light off / Unsupported pattern
1: Light on
2: Flashing pattern 1

color

3: Flashing pattern 2
4: Flashing pattern 3
5: Flashing pattern 4
value

State of Signal Tower

・MULTI_COL
0: Light off / Unsupported color
1: Red2: Amber
3: Green
4: Blue
5: White
6: Purple
7: Light blue

buzzer name

Buzzer NameBUZZER Sounds
0: Stopbuzzer

1: Buzzer pattern 1
value

Buzzer pattern

2: Buzzer pattern 2
3: Buzzer pattern 3
4: Buzzer pattern 4
5: Buzzer pattern 5

soundsound nameName of Audio Playback

value

Audio Playback Channel

SOUND Audio Playback
0: Stop audio
1 to 71: Audio channel
DO-1: Digital Output 1
DO-2: Digital Output 2

port nameName of Digital Input/Output

port

DIN-1: Digital Input 1
DIN-2: Digital Input 2
DIN-3: Digital Input 3
DIN-4: Digital Input 4

valueState of Digital Input/Output

58

0: OFF
1: ON

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

json
CommandType

Description
Indicate the pattern in order, R (Red) →Y (Amber) → G (Green) → B (Blue) →C (White)
0: Light off

Unit_Status

1: Light on

Status of Signal Tower Color

2: Flashing pattern 1
3: Flashing pattern 2
4: Flashing pattern 3
5: Flashing pattern 4
0: Light off / Unsupported color
1: Red2: AmberMulti_Color

3: Green

Multi-color

4: Blue
5: White
6: Purple
7: Light blue
numberMulti_Pattern

0: Light off / Unsupported pattern
1: Light on
2: Flashing pattern 1

Multi-color pattern

3: Flashing pattern 2
4: Flashing pattern 3
5: Flashing pattern 4
0: Stop
1: Buzzer pattern 1

Buzzer_Pattern

2: Buzzer pattern 2

Buzzer pattern

3: Buzzer pattern 3
4: Buzzer pattern 4
5: Buzzer pattern 5Sound_CH

Audio Playback Channel

Digital_Output

Digital output

Digital_Input

Digital input

Software_Version

Software version

MAC_Address

MAC address

0: Stop audio
1 to 71: Audio channel
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
string

59

The software version on this product
The MAC address on this productNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.14. SNMP Command Functions
・ This product can use the SNMP function to get the state of the Signal Tower, as well as control the Signal Tower.
・ SNMP versions v1, v2c, and v3 are supported.
・ For information on OID for getting and controlling, refer to "10. MIB List" ( ☞ page 367).
・ For the procedure on using SNMP Commands, refer to "8.3.1. Checking and Controlling the Status of This Productwith Commands" ( ☞ page 172).

● Communication Protocols
ProtocolPort Number

UDP

161

● Commands You Can Execute
SNMP Command
SNMP GETSNMP SET60

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions● OID List
OID
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3

Object ID

Description
Time that has elapsed since the SNMP management
system was restarted

sysUptime(in hundredths of a second)
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4

sysContact

Main unit settings - Basic Settings Contact Information

1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5

sysNameMain unit settings - Network Settings Host Name
Information

1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6

sysLocation

Main unit settings - Basic Settings Installation Location
Information

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.1.1

identSwInitVersion

Operating System Version Information

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.1.2

identSwAgentVersion

Application Version Information

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.1.3

identHwVersion

Hardware Version Information

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.1.1

pingServerNumEntries

Number of Ping Monitoring

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.1.2.1.1

pingServerTableIndex

Setting Number for Ping Monitoring

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.1.2.1.2

pingServerName

Unit name for Ping Monitoring

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.1.2.1.3

pingServerAlertValue

Ping Monitoring Status

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.1.2.1.4

pingServerIpAddress

IP Address for Ping Monitoring

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.1

diEntry1

State of Digital Input 1

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.2

diEntry2

State of Digital Input 2

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.3

diEntry3

State of Digital Input 3

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.4

diEntry4

State of Digital Input 4

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.5.1

doEntry1

State of Digital Output 1

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.5.2

doEntry2

State of Digital Output 2

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.1

controlLightNumEntries

Number of Signal Tower to Control

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.1

controlLightDeviceColor

Values of Signal Tower Color Information

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.2

controlLightControlState

State of the Signal Tower to Control

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.3

controlLightControlTimer

Number of Seconds Until Control State is Reflected

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.4

controlLightCurrentState

Current State of the Signal Tower

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.3

controlLightSnmpClear

Clear Control Status

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.2.1

controlSoundChannel

Control and Current State of Audio Channel

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.2.2

controlSoundLight

Control State of the Signal Tower with a 12-digit
Number

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.3.1

controlMultiColorUnit

Control State of the Multi-color unit with a 2-digit
Number61

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.15. Ping Monitoring Function
・ Using ping communication, you can monitor equipment on the network to detect error and recovery states.
・ You can monitor up to 24 nodes.
・ Ping monitoring starts after ping monitoring setup is complete.

CAUTION
Detecting the recovery state occurs when recovering from a monitoring error state.
When monitoring error states, performing a clear operation restores monitoring to a normal state, but the recovered state
is not detected.

・ The following example describes timing details of error states and when they are detected.
Example 1

When number of transmissions is 2, and number of items to send is 3
Start Ping Monitoring(setup complete)This ProductDetect Error State
Monitoring

State

Operation

Detect Recovered State

Normal State

Error State

Normal State

Monitoring Cycle

Monitored
Equipment
Operation

Ping
Ping
Transmission Response

Time Axis

Result: Normal
Error Results: 0

Result: Normal
Error Results: 0

Result: Error
Error Results: 1

Result: Error
Error Results: 2

If clear operation is performed while monitoring for error states (set the number of transmissions
to 2, and number of items to send to 3)
Perform Clear Operation

Start Ping Monitoring(setup complete)This ProductResult: Normal
Error Results: 0

Recovered if there is at least one response to
the transmission

Normal if there is at least one responseto the transmission

Example 2

Result: Error
Error Results: –State

Operation

Detect Error State

Detect Error State
Monitoring

Normal State

Error State

Normal State

Error State

Monitoring Cycle

Monitored
Operation

Ping
Ping
Transmission Response

Time Axis

Result: Error
Error Results: 1

Result: Error
Error Results: 2

Result: Error
Error Results: –Result: Normal
Error Results: 0

Result: Error
Error Results: 1

The clear operation clears the results.
Detecting recovered state is not performed.

62

Result: Error
Error Results: 2

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.16. SNMP TRAP Reception Function
・ You can receive TRAP that contain the specified IP address of equipment or the specified OID.
・ SNMP versions V1, V2c, and V3 are supported.
・ You can have a maximum 16 group settings, and in each group you can register 4 TRAP.
・ For the procedure on using SNMP Commands, refer to "8.4.2. SNMP TRAP Monitoring" ( ☞ page 206).

● Communication Protocols
ProtocolPort Number

UDP

162

CAUTION
If the [GenericTrap type] of the TRAP received is 6 (enterprisespecific), at the end of the received TRAP append "0.
(specific-trap value)".
The number of variable-bindings that can be identified is limited to 64 per TRAP. When a TRAP is received with morethan 64 variable-bindings, the 65th and subsequent variable-bindings will not be identified.
The types of values that can be identified are integer, OCTET STRING (string), and OCTET STRING (Binary).
Value in OCTET STRING (string) is treated as a string.
ExampleWhen value is A, Judgment is "A"

Value in OCTET STRING (Binary) is treated as binary data.
ExampleWhen value is A, Judgment is 0000 1010

63

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.17. SNMP Device Monitoring Function
・ Using SNMP Commands, you can monitor SNMP-enabled equipment on the network and notify changes in state.
・ You can set up match detection if the monitored data exceeds or falls below a threshold value, or to detectchanges in monitored data.
・ There are 20 types of match detection and 5 types of change patterns that can be detected.

● Communication Protocols
ProtocolPort Number

UDP

161

● Description of Detection
・ Match Detection
・ When you get the state of SNMP-enabled equipment and the state matches the set condition, the operation forwhen the condition matches is performed.
・ When the state no longer matches the set condition, the release condition operation is performed.

CAUTION
The release condition operation is performed when the condition match is released after condition match status.
Even if a clear operation is performed while in a match status, the monitoring status will not be recovered. The match
status will continue.
If you need to return the match status to the monitoring status, reconfigure the SNMP Device Monitoring Settings.
If the [Operation during communication timeout] is set to [Enabled], and a timeout is identified, the release condition
operation is performed.
If re-evaluation of match is specified as the release condition operation, the status of the specified setting becomesmonitoring status.
The types of values that can be identified are [integer], [OCTET STRING (string)], and [OCTET STRING (Binary)].
Value in OCTET STRING (string) is treated as a string.
ExampleWhen value is A, Judgment is "A"

Value in OCTET STRING (Binary) is treated as binary data.
ExampleWhen value is A, Judgment is 0000 1010

・ The following example describes timing details when condition matches and release condition are detected.
Example 1

Match and release condition operations when match condition is A
Start Monitoring for
Condition Matches

This ProductState

Operation

Detect Release
Condition

Detect if Condition
MatchesMonitoring
Monitor State

Condition Matched

Monitor State

Monitoring Cycle

Monitored
Equipment
Operation

State B

State A

State BTime Axis

Request Response

Get State: B
Result: Does not match

Get State: B
Result: Does not match

Get State: A
Result: Match

64

Get State: A
Result: Match

Get State: B
Result: Does not match

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Example 2

5. Product Features and Functions

Clear operation when match condition is A
Start Monitoring for
Condition Matches

This ProductDetect if Condition
Matches

Perform Clear Operation
Monitoring

State

Monitor State

Operation

Condition Matched

Monitoring Cycle

Monitored
Equipment
Operation

State B

State ATime Axis

Request Response

Example 3

Get State: B
Result: Does not match

Get State: B
Result: Does not match

Get State: A
Result: Match

Get State: A
Result: Match

When match condition is A, operation during communication timeout (Number of retries setto 2) is enabled
Start Monitoring for
Condition Matches

This ProductGet State: A
Result: Match

Detect if Condition
MatchesMonitoring

State

Operation

Detect if Condition
MatchesMonitor State

Condition Matched

Condition
MatchedMonitor State

Monitoring Cycle

Monitored
Equipment
Operation

State B

State ATime Axis

Request Response

Example 4

Get State: B
Result: Does not match

Get State: B
Result: Does not match

Get State: A
Result: Match

Get State: –Result: –Fail to Get: 1st time

Get State: –Result: –Fail to Get: 2nd time

Get State: A
Result: Match

When match condition is A and monitor setting 2 is specified for re-evaluation of match ofmonitor setting 1

In this example, the flow of communication with the monitored equipment has been omitted because it is thesame as previous examples.
Detect if Condition
MatchesThis ProductDetect Release
Condition
Monitoring

State of
Setting 1

Monitor State

Monitor State

Condition Matched

Monitoring Cycle
State of
Setting 2

Monitor State

Condition Matched

Changes to normal state, but detecting
recovered state is not performed

Detect if Condition
MatchesMonitored
Equipment

Equipment
A
Equipment
B

State B

Condition Matched

Monitor State

State A

State B

State B

State A

65

Detect if Condition
MatchesNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

・ Detect Change
・ Gets the state of SNMP enabled equipment, and when there is a state change, performs the operation for whena change is detected.

CAUTION
Changes in state that occur during a communication timeout are not detected.
Integer is the only type of value that can be identified.

・ The following example describes timing details when condition matches and release condition are detected.
Example 1

Normal Detect Change Operation
Start Monitoring for
Condition Matches

This ProductDetect Change

Detect Change

Detect Change

Detect Change

Monitoring

State
Operation

Monitoring Cycle

Monitored
Equipment
Operation

State B

State A

State CState A

State BTime Axis

Request Response

Example 2

Detect Change Operation When Timeout Occurs
Start Monitoring for
Condition Matches

This ProductDetect Change
Monitoring

State
Operation

Monitoring Cycle

Monitored
Equipment
Operation

State B

State A

State CTime Axis

Request Response66Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5.3.18. Detect Change in State of Contact Input

5. Product Features and Functions

NHV Series ( D model)

・ By monitoring the state of external contact inputs, this function detects any changes in the state.
・ Digital signals to four external contact inputs are used to monitor the state of digital input.
・ Digital input can refer to digital logic settings (Contact A [normally open] or Contact B [normally closed]).

● Definition of ON and OFF for Digital Input
Operation Status

ON

OFF

Digital Boolean value

1 01H

0 00H

Description

Contact A

OFF opens the contact.

(make contact)

ON closes the contact andallows power to flow.

(normally open)

ClosedClosedcircuitcircuitOpenOpen
circuitcircuitContact Status
Contact B

OFF closes the contact andallows power to flow.

(break contact)(normallyclosed)Closed circuit

Open circuit

Closed circuit

ON opens Openthe contact.
circuit・ This product detects the state under the following conditions.

● Conditions When the Product can Detect
StatusDescription

ON Status Change

Detect state when digital input turns ON ( ① ).

OFF Status Change

Detect state when digital input turns OFF ( ② ).

Status change

Detect a change in state from ON to OFF, or OFF to ON.

1 (ON)①②
0 (OFF)CAUTION
The monitoring cycle for the digital input is 110 ms. Maintain the input signal for 110 ms or longer.
If the state of digital input is continually changing, there may be delays in operations and detecting changes may be
missed.

67

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5.3.19. Contact Input Match Detection

5. Product Features and Functions

NHV Series ( D model)

・ You can detect changes in the contact input state based on set conditions.
・ Determining the condition is executed in order, Condition 1 → Condition 2 → Condition 3 → Condition 4.
・ If a condition matches, the operation when condition matches is performed.
・You can detect when there is continuous input for a specified period of time (detect continuous).
・The maximum length of time for detecting continuous input is 3600 seconds.
・You can use the Clear button to reset the measured time, or after conditions match run the detect operation again.

CAUTION
The condition can be set for ON status change only.

・ The following example describes operation details.
Example 1

Operation condition is set as Continuous On Time: 10 seconds, clear operation condition
disabled, and re-evaluation is enabled
Operation When
Condition Matches
Identify
Condition

Evaluating

Condition Matches

10 seconds
State ofContact Input

10 seconds

ON

OFF
Change to
ON State

Example 2

Operation When
Condition Matches

Perform Clear Operation

Operation condition is set as Continuous ON Time: 10 seconds, clear operation condition
enabled, and re-evaluation disabled
Operation When
Condition Matches
Identify
Condition

Evaluating
10 seconds 10 seconds
ON

State ofContact Input

OFF
Change to
ON State

Perform Clear Operation

68

Condition Matches
10 seconds

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5.3.20. Detect Email Function

5. Product Features and Functions

NHV Series

・ Connect to the mail server and periodically check for new email.
・ Following registered filter rules, notify when receiving email by sender, subject, and body text.
・ Register up to 20 patterns of filter rules for detecting email.
・ Set up each filter rule with up to five conditions.
・ You can set any matching conditions "Meets all of following", "Meets one of the following", and "None" when registering multiple
rules.

・ Apply the filter "Matches with", "Beginning with", "Include", "Be free of" to the sender, subject, and body text.

CAUTION
The maximum size of email is 5MB (both POP / IMAP), and emails that exceed the maximum size may not be detected.
Attachments are ignored (text information in attachments is not subject to filter detection)
When "Delete the mail in the server after receiving" is enabled in POP authentication, emails older than the latest 200 will
be deleted without filter detection.
If you receive a large number of emails during the first reception or during the period from the previous email check to thistime, it may take some time to receive the emails.
If multiple emails are received at the same time, the order of detection may vary depending on the mail server.
Operation When
Filter rule Matches

This ProductState

Operation When
Filter rule Matches

Monitoring
Detection Interval

Operation
Monitored
Equipment
Operation

Do Not Receive Detected EmailReceive Detection Email A

Receive Detection Email B
Time Axis

Request Response

・ The following example describes registering filter rules.
Example 1

If you want this product to detect email receiving from specified email address (patlite@
example.com)

Matching conditions
rule 1

Example 1

If you want this product to detect email receiving from specified email address (patlite@
example.com) and including the word "important" in subject

Matching conditions
rule 1

rule 2

Example 1

Meets all of following / Meets one of the following
Filtering target
SenderFiltering content
patlite@example.com
Condition
Matches with"

Meets all of following
Filtering target
Filtering content
Condition
Filtering target
Filtering content
Condition

Senderpatlite@example.com
Matches with
Subject"important"
IncludeIf you want this product to detect all received email

Matching conditions
rule 1 to 5

None

-

69

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.20.1. Reading Aloud Email Contents
・ You can use the Voice Synthesizer to make the product read aloud the contents of emails that match the filter
rules.
For more information, see "5.3.4. Voice Synthesizer Function" ( ☞ page 28).
・ The range of a detected email to be read aloud can be set to include "Sender," "Subject," and "Body text.""Sender," "Subject," and "Body text" can be read aloud in that order along with the following.
» Sender: "Email received from" followed by the senderʼs name» Subject: "Subject" followed by the subject line
» Body text: "Body text" followed by the body of the email
・ The product will say "Email received" in the following cases:» When you have not set an email reading range (Sender, Subject, Body text)» When there is nothing to be read aloud (e.g., when all is blank)» When speech synthesis of the content to be read aloud fails (e.g., the content contains characters thatcannot be parsed)･ You can choose either "Read full text" or "Auto extract text to be read aloud."
When text to be read aloud is automatically extracted, the content will be extracted and read aloud according to
the following rules depending on your language setting.
Language setting forreading aloud

Priority

Content

1

Lines containing a URL (http://, https://, etc.) and the line precedingthem are skipped.
Lines beginning with any of the following characters are skipped.
･ * (asterisk) (single-byte)

2･ ※ (rice symbol) (double-byte)･ - (hyphen) (single-byte)･ ~ (tilde) (single-byte)

Japanese･ > (unequal sign) (single-byte/double-byte)
Lines ending with any of the following characters are read aloud.
･ 、(comma) (double-byte)3･ 。 (period) (double-byte)･ ? (question mark) (single-byte/double-byte)･ ! (exclamation mark) (single-byte/double-byte)

1

Lines containing a URL (http://, https://, etc.) and the line precedingthem are skipped.
Lines beginning with any of the following characters are skipped.
･ * (asterisk) (single-byte)2･ - (hyphen) (single-byte)･ ~ (tilde) (single-byte)

English･ > (unequal sign) (single-byte)
Lines ending with any of the following characters are read aloud.
･ . (period) (single-byte)3･ , (comma) (single-byte)･ ? (question mark) (single-byte)･ ! (exclamation mark) (single-byte)

70

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Language setting forreading aloud5. Product Features and Functions

Priority

Content

1

Lines containing a URL (http://, https://, etc.) and the line precedingthem are skipped.
Lines beginning with any of the following characters are skipped.
･ * (asterisk) (single-byte)

2･ ※ (rice symbol) (double-byte)･ - (hyphen) (single-byte)

Chinese･ ~ (tilde) (single-byte)(Mandarin)･ > (unequal sign) (single-byte/double-byte)
Lines ending with any of the following characters are read aloud.
･ , (comma) (single-byte/double-byte)
3･ 、(comma) (double-byte)･ 。 (period) (double-byte)･ ? (question mark) (single-byte/double-byte)･ ! (exclamation mark) (single-byte/double-byte)

Example 1

When reading an email containing the following body text with "Auto extract text to be read
aloud" enabled and the language setting being Japanese
SkippedRead aloud

Skipped〇月×日△時□分◇◇ 発表「熱中症警戒アラート」が発表されています。
〇〇県では、熱中症の危険性が極めて高い気象状況になることが予測されます。
外出はなるべく避け、室内をエアコン等で涼しい環境にして過ごしてください。
詳しくはこちらhttps://www.patlite.co.jp
登録内容の変更・配信解除は次のリンク先にアクセスしてください。
https://www.patlite.co.jp

Skipped※返信メールは受け付けておりません。
〇〇市
SkippedExample 2

When reading an email containing the following body text with "Auto extract text to be read
aloud" enabled and the language setting being English

Read aloud

SkippedThis is an announcement from Fire department.
The Other accidents has occurred near the ** bus stop.
To change your details or cancel your subscription, please use the following link.
https://www/patlite.com

71Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

CAUTION
If the "sender name (sender)" is not set for the detected email, the "sender" will not be read aloud.
Some emails may not be read aloud, such as when multiple emails are detected at the same time or when an email
contains characters that cannot be read aloud.
Due to automatic extraction of reading parts, depending on the content of the email, all or part of the text may not beread out.
If you absolutely need to read important messages, don't use automatic extraction.
The product can read aloud up to 400 characters per email (including the number of characters contained in "Sender"and "Subject" to be read aloud). If an email contains more than 400 characters, only 400 characters are read aloud.
In such a case, you can set the product not to read aloud "Sender" and "Subject" or delete line breaks and symbols to
reduce the number of characters to be read aloud.
You cannot set "Read aloud email contents" and "Control by email contents" simultaneously in one filter rule setting.
Depending on the mail server or email software to be used, text may be automatically broken into two lines if it
contains too many characters per line. In this case, some of the email contents may not be read aloud if "Auto extract
text to be read aloud" is enabled.
Even if you set to "Automatically extract parts to read out", sentences that should not be read aloud may be read out
depending on the email server or email software.
Because speech is synthesized from text, there is a time lag between when an email is detected and when it is played.
(Estimated time for 400 characters: approximately 60 seconds)

5.3.20.2. Control by Email Contents･ You can include a control tag in the body of the email to be detected to control the Signal Tower or play backaudio.
･ To use a control tag, include <[Control Tag] = [Value]> in the email body text.
･ There are two types of control tags: simple control tag and detailed control tag. You can include multiple simple
control tags in the body of an email while the detailed control tag allows you to specify multiple controls, but
only one can be used per email.
Point● Use one control tag per line.
● Place a control tag at the beginning of the line.
● Place a control tag in the body text. A control tag placed in the sender or subject line will not work.
● Only single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for a control tag.
● Do not include a simple control tag and a detailed control tag in the same email.

CAUTION
When using this function, take measures such as periodically deleting emails from the mail server. If you receive alarge number of emails during the first reception or during the period from the previous email check to this time,
control may be performed continuously.

72

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions･ The control tags that can be used are shown in the table below.
● Simple control tag
Control tag
red
yellow
green
blue
white

Value

Content

Lighting pattern

Controls the Signal Tower.

off: Light off

red: Signal Tower Red

on: Light onyellow: Signal Tower Yellow

flash1: Flashing pattern 1

green: Signal Tower Green

flash2: Flashing pattern 2

blue: Signal Tower Blue

flash3: Flashing pattern 3

white: Signal Tower White

flash4: Flashing pattern 4Controls digital output.

output1

off: Contact output OFF

output2

on: Contact output ON

sound

1 to 71: Audio channel

Controls audio playback.

Specify in the following format, and enter values.
<speech=[Language], voice=[Voice]>[Text content] *1

Plays back audio of any text that was entered.

speechoutput1: Contact output 1
output2: Contact output 2</speech>[Language]: jp(Japanese), en(English),cn *2(Chinese(Mandarin))[Voice]:male(Male),female(Female)

The maximum number of characters that canbe played is 400 characters.
(Will playback up to 400 characters when enter
more than 400 characters.)
The following operations are performed inaccordance with product settings.

stop(None)･ Stop audio playback (Playback from latest
input mode)･ Skip track (Memory playback mode)

clear

*1
*2

Executes the clear operation and returns to thenormal operation status.

(None)

If [Language] is not specified, playback is in jp (Japanese); if [Voice] is not specified, playback is in male
(male).
If you select "cn" on a product that does not have the Voice Synthesizer of Chinese, the same behavior as
if you selected "jp" (Jap-anese) will occur. Refer to ["9.7.1. Voice Registration" ( ☞ page 356)] for how tocheck the languages supported by the Voice Synthesiz-er.
Point● "clear" and "stop" override other control tags. If "clear" and "stop" are listed in the same email, "clear" takes
precedence.
● If "sound" and "speech" are listed in the same e-mail, "sound" takes precedence.
● If the same control tag is listed in the email, the operation of the control tag listed later takes precedence.
(Example: If they are listed in the order <red=off>, <red=on> then <red=on> will work)73Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions● Detailed control tag･ You can use multiple parameters using the control tag [command].
･ The format of the detailed control tag is as follows.
<command>[Parameter]=[Value]{&[Parameter]=[Value]}{&[Parameter]=[Value]}</command>
Parameter

Value

Description
Controls the Signal Tower and buzzer.
Light Pattern
0: Light off
1: Light on
2: Flashing pattern 1

r: Signal Tower Red
y: Signal Tower Amber
alert<r><y><g><b><c><bz>

g: Signal Tower Greenb: Signal Tower Bluec: Signal Tower Whitebz: Buzzer

3: Flashing pattern 2
4: Flashing pattern 3
5: Flashing pattern 4
9: No control
Buzzer pattern
0: Buzzer off
1: Buzzer pattern 1
2: Buzzer pattern 2
3: Buzzer pattern 3
4: Buzzer pattern 4
5: Buzzer pattern 5
9: No control
Controls digital output.

output<do1><do2>

do1: digital output 1

0: OFF

do2: digital output 2

1: ON
9: No control
Controls the Signal Tower.
Light Pattern

led<r><y><g><b><c>r: Signal Tower Red

0: Light off

y: Signal Tower Amber

1: Light on

g: Signal Tower Green

2: Flashing pattern 1b: Signal Tower Blue

3: Flashing pattern 2c: Signal Tower White

4: Flashing pattern 3
5: Flashing pattern 4
9: No control
Controls the multi-color.
Red: Red
Amber: Amber
Green: Green

color

Blue: Blue<color>White: White
Purple: Purple
Cyan: Cyan
NONE: No control

74

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Parameter

Value

5. Product Features and Functions

Description
Controls the multi-color pattern.

c-pat<c-pat>This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the colorcommand.
1: Light on
2: Flashing pattern 1
3: Flashing pattern 2
4: Flashing pattern 3
5: Flashing pattern 4Controls the buzzer

b-pat<b-pat>

sound

<ch>

This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the colorcommand.
0: Buzzer off
1: Buzzer pattern 1
2: Buzzer pattern 2
3: Buzzer pattern 3
4: Buzzer pattern 4
5: Buzzer pattern 5
9: No control
Controls audio playback.
1 to 71: Audio channel
Specifies the number of times to repeat audio playback.
This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the sound andspeech command.
0: One-shot playback
1 to 254: Number of times to repeat
255: Endless playback

repeat<repeat>restore<restore>

Specifies the control time (seconds).
0: Do not specify the control time (can be omitted)
1 to 99: Specified amount of control time

stop

1

The following operations are performed in accordance with productsettings.
・Stop audio playback (Playback from latest input mode)
・Skip track (Memory playback mode)

clear

1

Executes the clear operation and returns to the normal operation status.

speech<text>

Plays back audio of any text that was entered.
Maximum 400 characters ( Will playback up to 400 characters whenenter more than 400 characters. )<lang>

Selects the language for audio playback.
This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the speechcommand.
jp Japaneseen English
cn Chinese*¹

voice<voice>Selects the language for audio.
This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the speechcommand.
male / female

speed-5 to 5Specifies the speed of audio playback.
This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the speechcommand.

tone-5 to 5Specifies the pitch of the voice for audio playback.
This parameter is used as an additional parameter for the speechcommand.

lang*1 If you select "cn" on a product that does not have the Voice Synthesizer of Chinese, the same behavior as if
you selected "jp"(Japanese) will occur. refer to ["9.7.1. Voice Registration" ( ☞ page 356)] for how to checkthe languages supported by the Voice Synthesizer.

75

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Parameter

Value

5. Product Features and Functions

Description

0 to 10

Select the notification sound that plays before text sound playback.This
parameter is used as an additional command for "speech".
0: Do not play
1-10: Notification sound number to play

notifyTail

0 to 10

Select the notification sound to play after text sound playback.This
parameter is used as an additional command for "speech".
0: Do not play
1-10: Notification sound number to play

lineout0, 1

Control line-out output.
0: OFF
1: ON

notifyCAUTIONSpecify "restore" at the same time as you specify "alert". It will not operate when you specify other parameters.
Environment-dependent characters such as "©" and " ♠ " and some symbols such as "¥" and "~" may not be
synthesized correctly.
When using this function, take measures such as periodically deleting emails from the mail server.
If you receive a large number of emails during the first reception or during the period from the previous email checkto this time, control may be performed continuously.
If two or more detailed control tags are listed in a single email, the operation of the control tag listed earlier takes
precedence.

Point● You can specify "led" at the same time as "sound" or "speech" at the same time.
●

When lang, voice, speed, tone are not specified or the value is invalid, it works with the following values.
Parameter

Specified value

lang

jp

voice

male

speed

0

tone

0

Example of Email Body Text 1

To turn on the LED unitʼs red light and play audio channel 1<When using simple control tag>・<red=on>・<sound=1><When using detailed control tag><command>led=10000&sound=1</command>
Example of Email Body Text 2

To turn on the LED unitʼs green light and read the text "Equipment A completed
processing" in a female voice<When using simple control tag>・<green=on>
・<speech, voice=female> Equipment A completed processing </speech><When using detailed control tag><command>led=00100&speech= Equipment A completed processing &voice=female</command>76

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.21. Clear Operation Function
By executing a clear operation, you can clear operations of various functions on the product.

● Details of Clear Operation
The clear operation varies depending on how it is executed.
Clear Operation Execution Method
Function

PNS Command
HTTP Command
Signal Tower Control
ScreenControl by thecontents of the email

RSH/SSH
Commands
SNMP Command

Signal Tower

Clear Button

Result in the state as set in the Clear
Button Setup screen

Result in normal operation state

BuzzerStop

Digital Output

Turn OFFBusy Output

Turn OFF

Audio Playback

Stop

Play Audio: ON
Stop Audio: OFF
Result in the state as set in the Clear
Button Setup screen

Self-test Operation

Result in normal operation state

Send Email

Transmission
Possible

Transmission Not
Possible

Transmission Possible

TRAP Transmission

Transmission
Possible

Transmission Not
Possible

Transmission Possible

Ping Monitoring

Return to Monitoring Status

SNMP Device Monitoring
Digital Input Condition
PLC Information Read Command
Condition-matched State
PLC Information Writing

Continue Current State
Continuous ON Time is reset

Depends on the operation setting when
the Clear button is pressed

Data acquisition state

Data acquisition state

Data acquisition stateTransmission
Possible

Transmission Not
Possible

Transmission Possible

CAUTION
The following action plays audio playback even after the clear operation.
・When synthesizing the voice of the text entered on the WEB Setup Screen
・When text received by command or cloud is being synthesized by voice

Point● The Signal Tower state can be set off individually for each color only by pressing the clear button.

● Operation when Clear button is pressed
By pressing the Clear button, you can execute operations such as those below.

・ For [Clear stages], you can specify clear all or two-stage clear.
Clear All
Depress twice
to Clear all

Simultaneously clear the Signal Tower, digital output, and buzzer/audio playback.
The first press of the button stops the buzzer/audio playback and contact output, and the second press
clears the Signal Tower.

77

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

・ You can send email, TRAP, HTTP Commands, and MQTT.
・ You can stop audio playback or skip tracks.
Stop

NHV Series

Stops playing audio. Also clears audio stored in the memory.
Stops audio playback and starts playback of audio registered in the memory.

Skip

Stops when memory is empty.

● Detailed Timing Example
Example 1

When playback mode is [Playback from latest input mode]

Pressing the Clear button interrupts playback of audio and turns OFF Busy output.
Event 2

Event 1Press Clear Button

Event Operation Timing

Operation 1

Operation 2

Audio playback status

Playback of channel 1

Playback of channel 2Interrupts playback.

Example 2

Operation When Normal

Interrupts playback.

When playback mode is [Memory playback mode]

In Memory playback mode, [Memory] is handled differently depending on the [Clear Operation] setting.
・Stop
Pressing the Clear button interrupts audio playback and stops Busy output.
Also clears audio stored in the memory.
When an event occurs, the audio issaved to the memory

Audio Playback
MemoryPlayback of channel 1
Empty

Perform Clear Operation

Stop
Channel 2

Empty
Time Axis

・Skip Track
Pressing the Clear button interrupts playback of the current channel and plays the channel registered inchannel memory. Busy continues to output while the channel is still playing.
When an event occurs, the audio issaved to the memory

Playback of channel 1

Audio Playback
Memory

Empty

Perform Clear Operation

Playback of channel 2
Channel 2

Empty
Time Axis

78

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.22. Self-test Function
・Execute the self-test operation function to check the Signal Tower operation.
・When self-test is executed, the following operations are performed.
Self Test
Start

Self Test
Exit

Self-test operation in progress

Type
Red

Light onAmber
SignalTower

Light onGreen

Light onBlue

Light onWhite
BuzzerLight onBuzzerpattern 1(Time in seconds) 0

Playback
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

CAUTION
Self-test operation automatically activates the Signal Tower and audio playback. Thoroughly check the surrounding area
before executing.
When volume is 0 or mute, the audio does not play.
You cannot stop the self-test operation midway.
While the self-test operation is executing, the clear operation is not accepted.
The monitoring function continues running while self-test is executed. Be careful when running self-test.
During and after execution of self-test, PNS and PHN Commands return an error response. RSH/SSH Commands returna Busy response.
When self-test operation is executed, channel memory is cleared.

Point● After self-test is completed, you can return to normal operation state by pressing the clear button.
● When clear button function is disabled, you can return to normal operation state by pressing the test button.

79Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.23. Cloud Function
You can use the Cloud function to link to a compatible cloud platform and control the main unit, get the status of themain unit, and send the status of the main unit.

● Supported Cloud Platforms and Features
Supported Cloud Platforms

Supported Connection
Methods

Microsoft Azure
Amazon AWS

Microsoft Azure
Amazon AWS
Azure IoT Central/DPS (IoT Plug and Play)
Azure IoT Hub (IoT Plug and Play)AWS IoT Core
Device Twin

Microsoft Azure
Supported Platform
Functions

Direct Method
Device-to-cloud Message
Cloud-to-device Message

Amazon AWS

Device Shadow
MQTT Client
Signal Tower and buzzer control

Main Unit Control

Audio playback
Digital output control
Voice synthesizer
State of the Signal Tower and buzzer

Function

Get status of Main
Unit

Audio playback function
Digital output state
When there is a change in state for the Signal Tower and buzzer
When there is a change in state for audio playback

Send status of Main
Unit

When Clear button is pressed or clear operation is executed
When there is a change in state for external input
When there is a change in state for digital output

80

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

When ping monitoring error occurs
When ping monitoring recovery performs
When ping group monitoring error occurs
When ping group monitoring recovery performs
When TRAP is received
Function

Send status of Main
Unit

When condition of SNMP device monitoring is matched
When condition of SNMP device monitoring is released
When condition of SNMP device monitoring is changed
When condition of contact input is matched
When Test button is pressed
When e-mail is received

81Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

5. Product Features and Functions

5.3.24. USB Memory Function
By connecting a USB memory to the USB connector in the back of this product, firmware updates, log storage,
configuration data uploads and downloads can be done.

CAUTION
It is necessary to format a USB memory in FAT or FAT32 and to have the appointed folder structure made inadvance.The USB memory cannot be partitioned.
It may not function properly if connected to a USB-HUB.
It takes about 10 seconds after connecting a USB memory to this product until it is recognized. The time until it isrecognized depends on the type of USB memory which is being connected, so it may take longer.

<< USB Memory Operation Functions >>Function

Details

Firmware Update
Function

Firmware updates can be done from the USB memory.
Be sure to change the firmware update file name to “nh_update” before executing the update.

Event Log Function

An event log can download from this product onto USB memory.
The file name to download is “log.txt.”

Configuration data can be uploaded from the USB memory to the Main Unit.
Configuration Setting The configuration file name to upload is “config_w.ini”.
Function
Configuration data can be downloaded from the Main Unit to the USB memory.
The configuration file name to download is “config.ini”.
Sound Package
Function(NHV series only)Sound package data can be uploaded from the USB memory to the Main Unit.
The sound package file name to upload is “sound_w.pkg”.
Sound package data can be downloaded from the Main Unit to the USB memory.
The sound package file name to download is “sound.pkg”.

<< USB Memory Folder Structure >>In order to use the USB memory for this product. build the following folder structure.
USB Memory※
The ﬁrmware storage folderNH
updateFirmware “update” ﬁle※nh_update※

log.txt

The “log” download target folder

log
The “log” event log ﬁleConﬁguration data storage/export folder

conf

config_w.ini
config.ini
sound_w.pkg
sound.pkg

The “conﬁg” ﬁle for uploading
The conﬁg ﬁle for downloading (*)
The “sound package” ﬁle for uploading
The sound package ﬁle for downloading(*)* The folder and files marked with an asterisks are automatically generated, when each data file is downloaded.

CAUTIONEnter the USB memory folder name and file name, using half-width alphanumeric characters.
Since it is case sensitive, refer to Figure when entering folder and file names.

82Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

5.3.25. PLC Linkage Function
5.3.25.1. PLC Information Read Command Transmission/Reception Function･ Acquire device information from the PLC by periodically sending commands to acquire specified device
information of PLC and compatible devices that support the SLMP (MC) protocol or FINS protocol.
The acquired information is checked against the set condition matching conditions, and if the conditions match,the operation when condition matches is performed.
Also, if an error data is received, perform operation during error.
･ Operation when condition matches can be set for each device from which data is acquired.
･ Operation during error can be set commonly for each device.
･ The number of devices to be acquired can be selected from one or two.
You can get 1-bit / 2-bit device information for bit devices and 1-word / 2-word device information for word
devices.

CAUTION
When using the product, read the instruction manuals for the PLC, each unit device, and compatible devices to beconnected, and make appropriate settings.
If you reset or restart the PLC or connected device, restart this product as well.
Otherwise, communication with this product may be lost.

❸

Data check
Main unit
Ethernet❹

Control signal lights
according to settings❷

Receive
response data❶

Send PLC
information
read command
PLC

83

Display

BarcodePC

RFID reader

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On● PLC Information Read Command Transmission/Reception Procedure･ Perform command transmission/reception processing in order from setting number 1 to 16.
･ If the protocol is set to TCP, create one port for each setting number. Also, connection processing is performed
when the first command is sent, and thereafter only command transmission/reception processing is performed.
・When setting the Designated Transmission Port,please set a different port number for each setting number.
･ If any of the following conditions occurs, the command transmission/reception processing for the next number
is performed at the set transmission interval.
･ Received the response data for the sent command» Could NOT receive the response data within the set timeout period» Command destination is not set» After the command transmission/reception processing for setting number 16, the command transmission/
reception
processing for setting number 1 is performed.
･ When a timeout occurs, disconnection processing is performed, and reconnection processing is performed at
the next transmission timing.
･ You can select the transmission interval from 10 ms, 50 ms, and 100 ms.

CAUTION
If the destination address and connection destination port are not set, the command will not be sent.
The number of seconds for the transmission interval that can be set is the minimum value. Depending on the internal
processing status of this product, the transmission interval may be longer than the set interval.

10 ms / 50 ms / 100 ms
after the set transmission interval

10 ms / 50 ms / 100 ms
after the set transmission interval[Setting 1][Setting 2][Setting 15][Setting 16]

Commandtransmission/reception processing

Commandtransmission/reception processing

Commandtransmission/reception processing

Commandtransmission/reception processing

10 ms / 50 ms / 100 ms
after the set transmission interval

84Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On● PLC Information Read Command Transmission/Reception Function Operation Details (whendata matching the conditions is acquired)This section describes how the acquired information is checked against the set matching conditions and how thesignal lights operate when the conditions are matched.
･ Device information can be acquired from PLC and compatible devices that support the SLMP (MC) protocol or
FINS protocol.
･ Once the set condition matches, the condition is recognized as condition-matched state.
･ The main unit will not operate even if data that matches the condition is acquired again during conditionmatched state.
･ Condition-matched state is cleared by performing clear operation.
ExampleWhen device information is acquired from a compatible device and the condition is matched･ If the data acquired from the compatible device matches the conditions set for this product, the main unit will
perform the operation when the conditions match.
･ The main unit will not operate even if data that matches the condition is acquired during condition-matchedstate.
・If a clear operation is received while match the condition, the condition will return to the data acquisition state.

Send PLC information
read command

Receive
response data

Clear operation

Time axis

Devices that support the SLMP
(MC) protocol and FINS protocol

Time axis

Data acquisition state
NHB, NHV side
Starts sending PLC information
read command after setup iscomplete on the Web Setup Screen

Condition-matched state

Data acquisition
periodCheck against
the matchingconditions

Check against
the matchingconditions

Check against
the matchingconditions

Does not matchthe conditions

Match
the conditions

Match the conditions

Does not work

Start operation
for whenthe condition
matches

Does not work due tocondition-matched
state

85

Data acquisition stateNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On● PLC Information Read Command Transmission/Reception Function Operation Details(when error data is acquired)This section describes the operation when error data is received from PLC and compatible devices that support
the SLMP (MC) protocol or FINS protocol.
・If the acquired information is error data, you can make the main unit operate when receiving error data.
･ Once error data is received, it is recognized as an error state.
･ If error data is acquired again during the error data state, the main unit will not operate.
･ The error state is cleared by performing clear operation.
ExampleWhen error data is obtained from a compatible device･ If the data acquired from a compatible device is an error data, the main unit performs the operations when
receiving error data.
･ If error data is acquired again during the error data state, the main unit will not operate.
･ If a clear operation is received while error state, the condition will return to the data acquisition state.

Send PLC information
read command

Receive
response data

Send error data

Clear operation

Time axis

Devices that support the SLMP
(MC) protocol and FINS protocol

Time axis

Data acquisition state Condition-matched state
NHB, NHV side
Starts sending PLC information
read command after setup iscomplete on the Web Setup Screen

Error state

Data acquisition
periodCheck against
the matchingconditions

Receive error data

Receive error data

Start operation
during error

Does not work
due to error stateMatch
the conditions
Start operation
for whenthe condition
matches86

Data acquisition stateNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

5.3.25.2. PLC Information Write Command Transmission Function･ You can send a write command using the SLMP (MC) protocol or FINS protocol when a clear event occurs.
･ Up to four destinations can be registered, and individual commands can be sent to each destination.
･ The number of devices you can send can be selected from one or two, and if the device to be written is a bit
device, it can transmit 1 bit / 2 bits, and if it is a word device, it can transmit 1 word / 2 words.

CAUTIONIf multiple destinations are set, the command is sent to each destination one at a time, starting with the destination withthe smallest setting number.

❶

Clear event
occurs❷Send PLC
information
write command● Transmission Trigger of the PLC Information Write Command
Clear event that triggers transmission･ When the CLEAR switch is pushed･ If "Clear" is made by the SNMP･ If "Clear" is made by the RSH/SSH

87

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

5.3.25.3. PLC Count Value Write Function･ You can periodically write the count value held by this product to the PLC and compatible devices that support
the SLMP (MC) protocol or FINS protocol while incrementing the value by one.
･ By monitoring the count value on the PLC side, you can check whether communication with this product ispossible.
･ The count value is incremented by one in the range of "0000" to "FFFF" (hexadecimal), and returns to "0000"
when adding to "FFFF."･ Up to 4 destinations can be registered.
･ The transmission interval can be set between one and ten seconds for each destination.

Send count value write
command

10 ms / 50 ms / 100 ms
after the set transmission interval[Setting 1]
Commandtransmission/reception
processing

10 ms / 50 ms / 100 ms
after the set transmission interval[Setting 2]
Commandtransmission/reception
processing

5.3.26.Internet Connection Check Function･ You can check to see if the product is connected to the Internet.
･ Check if you can connect to the specified address.
･ For details on how to use the internet connection check, refer to "8.5.1.3. How to Check the Internet Connection"( ☞ page 248).

88

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering on

WARNING
Before performing any work, disconnect the product's power supply.
In case the product falls over or falls down, install in a location where it will not hit any people or other objects.

CAUTION
This product is for indoors only. Do not use outdoors.
Do not apply excessive force to the units or this product. Failure to follow this instruction could result in equipment
damage.
Do not install this product with its adhesive sheet on material that includes a large amount of plasticizer.
Avoid using this product in the following locations. Failure to follow this instruction could result in malfunction or equipment
damage.
・Places exposed to direct sunlight・Places near fire or environments with high temperatures and humidity
・Environments where temperature changes are severe, and where there is condensation
・Environments with poor breathability and ventilation
・Places where external vibrations are directly transmitted to this product・Environments where corrosive gas is present
・Locations exposed to salty sea air
・Environments where there is dust or iron powder
・Environments where chemicals and oil mist are present
・Places subject to rain and water
・Near equipment that generate strong electrical or strong magnetic fields
・Locations where the product may fall and break
The adhesive sheet used for this product may be difficult to remove depending on the environment in which it is used.
Check the installation location for this product beforehand. Failure to follow this instruction could result in damage to thecoating.
Install this product in a stable and level location.

89

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

6.1. Attaching and Detaching Additional Units
Always follow the instructions below when attaching or detaching additional units (such as LED unit, transmitter) to andfrom this product.

CAUTION
Do not touch the connectors on the unit or this product, or parts inside the additional unit. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in equipment damage.
Do not connect incompatible additional units. Failure to follow this instruction could result in decreased performance orequipment failure for the product or unit.
Limitations on mounting additional units to this product depend on the type of unit itself. Do not mount beyond this limit.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in decreased performance and equipment damage.
・Do not install multiple LED units of the same color.
・The maximum number of colored lenses and clear lenses you can assemble is 5. The total for multi-color is one.
・You cannot assemble LED units with a colored lens or clear lens and an LED unit that is multi-color at the same time.
・The maximum number of transmitter units you can assemble is 1. However, this number does not include LED units.
Use the following method when attaching and detaching LED units. Failure to follow these instructions could result inequipment damage.
・Attaching Units: Attach units to this product one at a time.
・Detaching Units: Detach units from this product one at a time.

6.1.1. NHB Series, NHV Series
For NHB6 and NHV6
■ Detach■ Attach

LED Unit

Align the removablepart of this productwith the positioning
mark on the LED
unit, fit together,and turn clockwise
to lock.
Positioning Mark■ Positioning Mark
While holding the
product, turn the LED
unit clockwise torelease the lock, thenlift up.

<Locked>Condition
when locked

LED Unit

LED Unit<Unlocked>

Positioning Mark

Positioning Mark

Condition
when unlocked

LED Unit

For NHB4 and NHV4
■ Detach■ Attach

LED Unit

Align the removablepart of this productwith the positioning
mark on the LED
unit, fit together, andturn clockwise tolock.

■ Positioning Mark
While holding the
product, turn the LED
unit clockwise torelease the lock, thenlift up.

<Locked>LED Unit

Condition
when locked

LED Unit

Positioning Mark
Positioning Mark

<Unlocked>
LED Unit

Positioning Mark

90

Condition
when unlockedNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

6.1.2. Procedure for Attaching/Detaching LED Units・ Attach or detach LED units in the prescribed order ① to ④ .
・ Attach or detach LED units one at a time.
Attach each unit

Detach each unit

Head CoverHead Cover①④③
LED Unit②

From thebottom, attach
one unit at a time

LED Unit

②

③

①

④

From the top,
detach one unit
at a time

6.1.3. Procedure for Attaching/Detaching LED Units and Transmitter・ Attach or detach the transmitter and LED units in the prescribed order ① to ⑤ .
・ Attach or detach LED units one at a time.
・ Attach the transmitter on the bottom tier. If you attach the transmitter on top of an LED unit, it is difficult to assess
the status shown by the lamp on this product.
Attach each unit

Detach each unit
Head CoverFrom thebottom, attach
one unit at a time

Head Cover

⑤

①

④

②
LED Unit

LED Unit③

Transmitter③②

From the top,
detach one unit
at a time

Transmitter④

Transmitter

Transmitter

①

91

⑤

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

CAUTION
If an additional unit does not attach properly to this product, confirm that the tab of the cylinder-shaped part at the topof the unit is fitted correctly into the groove. Depending on how additional units are detached, the tab may come outof the groove when detaching additional units from this product. If the product is attached again while the tab is still inthis state, it may become damaged.
Cylinder-shaped
Part

Tab
GrooveNameplate

Tab
GrooveTop View

Tab
GrooveCannot attach in this state

Figure 1
If a unit does not attach properly to this product, follow the steps below.
・In the center of the underside of the product, turn the cylinder-shaped part counter-clockwise.
・Turn the cylinder-shaped part until it snaps into place, then attach it to this product.
Cylinder-shapedPart

Tab andGrooveNameplate

Cylinder-shaped
Part

Top View

Tab andGrooveAttach in this state

Figure 2

Figure 3

92

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

6.2. Product Installation and Mounting Method
This section describes how to install and mount this product. Adjust to fit your requirement and perform the work.

CAUTION
Before attaching the adhesive sheet to the product, wipe away any dust, water, oil and other unwanted material from themain unit and installation location.
When removing the adhesive sheet, firmly hold the outer edge of the product near the bottom and peel away slowly.
Use the recommended torque when attaching parts for installation.
After installation, check again if there is a risk of the product falling.
The following requirements are necessary for a proper mounting location.
・Low vibration
・Sufficient strength・Flat location

6.2.1. When Stationary❶ Peel away the yellow non-stick paper from

This Product
Bottom View

the adhesive sheet and attach it to therecess of the attachment location on thebottom of this product.

Front❷ After attaching it to the product, peel off

the clear non-stick paper and affix to themounting surface.

Front
Apply here
(recessed)❶ To Product

Apply to Product

Adhesive
Sheet

Non-stick
Paper (Yellow)
Adhesive Sheet❷ To Mounting
SurfaceNon-stick
Paper (Clear)
Apply to
Mounting Surface

93

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

6.2.2. Mounting on a Tripod❶ Attach the product to a tripod.

This ProductFor information on mounting methods, refer to the
instruction manual of the tripod.

Front
Bottom View

❶ To Tripod

Front

Tripod Screw Hole
(1/4-20UNC)

TripodCAUTION
When using a tripod, its screw should be shorter than 5.5 mm. When the screw is 5.5 mm or longer, the product cannot beaffixed firmly to the tripod, which could lead to product damage.
Use a tripod with a load capacity of 6 kg or more.
When using a tripod with this product, do not move or transport while the tripod is attached. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in equipment damage if the product falls over.

94

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

6.2.3. When Using Mounting Brackets (optional part)・By using mounting brackets (optional part), you can install this product on a wall, VESA compliant device, or
partition. Please provide your own screws for mounting.
・There are two types of mounting brackets: Wall Mounting Bracket (for mounting on a wall or VESA compliant
device), and Partition Mounting Bracket (for mounting on partitions).
・For information on mounting methods, refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding mounting bracket.

CAUTION
Mount only in the directions described in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the product falling or
equipment damage.
When using this product, do not use the adhesive sheet included with the product you are mounting. Depending on the
thickness of the adhesive sheet, you may not be able to tighten the screws firmly when mounting the bracket, or they may
loosen over time.
The following requirements are necessary for a proper mounting location.
・Low vibration
・Sufficient strength・Flat location
Turn off the power before attaching this product to the mounting bracket. Failure to follow this instruction could result infire or electric shock.
Use the recommended torque when attaching parts for installation.
After installation, check again if there is risk of the product falling. Additionally, periodically check for damage or looseningof the mounting parts.

● Mounting on a Wall・To mount on a wall, use the Wall Mounting bracket. Provide your own screws for mounting to the wall.
・Using Wall Mounting brackets, you can mount this product on the wall in one of two different ways. The pitchof mounting holes is different depending on the mounting direction. When mounting, refer to the mounting
dimensions shown below.
・Tighten to match the torque recommended for the material of the wall surface.

❶ Attach the mounting bracket to the wall.
・ Select the mounting pattern that best suits your use.
Mounting Pattern 1

Mounting Pattern 2

Screw Holes, 4 places (φ6)

Product Mounting
SurfaceScrew Holes, 4 places (φ6)

Mounting Bracket
M5 Screws (x 4)* Please provide
your own

Mounting
Surface

M5 Screws (x 4)* Please provide
your own

Mounting
SurfaceMounting Bracket

Product Mounting Surface

Mounting Dimensions
Product Mounting Surface
32

Mounting Dimensions

35

16
35

22

22
16

35
φ6 (4 places)

φ6 (4 places)(Unit: mm)

95

35
29.7

Product Mounting Surface(Unit: mm)

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On❷ Attach the product to the mounting bracket.
Recommended Torque
0.6 N･m (approximate)
Mounting Pattern 1

Mounting Pattern 2This Product* Install in the upright position

This Product* Install in the upright position

Bottom View
Front

Bottom View
Front

Front

Front

BracketMounting Hole

BracketMounting Hole

Mounting Bracket

Mounting Bracket

Product Mounting Screws (x 2)

Product Mounting Screws (x 2)

You can attach this product tothe mounting bracket in either
the left or right directions.

Clearance
8

You can attach this productto the mounting bracket ineither the left or right
directions.

(Unit: mm)
Mounted in
Right Direction

Mounted in
Left Direction

Mounting Pattern 2

96

Mounted in
Mounted in
Right Direction Left Direction

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On● Attaching to a VESA Compliant Device
・To mount on a VESA compliant device, use the Wall Mounting bracket. Provide your own screws for mounting
to the VESA compliant device.
・For information on mounting methods, refer to the instruction manual of your equipment.
・Use VESA compliant equipment with a load capacity of 6 kg or more.
・For VESA compliant devices, use only Mounting Pattern 2.

❶Attach mounting bracket to the VESA

Mounting Pitch 75 mm

Screw Hole
(φ5)

compliant device.

Hexagon Nuts
with Flange(M4) x 4❶

Mounting Pitch
75 mm

M4 Screws (x 4)* Please provide
your own

Example VESA
Compliant Device
Mounting Bracket(Mounting Pattern 2)❷ Attach the product to the mounting bracket.

This Product* Install in the upright position.

Recommended Torque
Bottom View

0.6 N･m (approximate)

Front

Front

BracketMounting Hole❷

Mounting Bracket(Mounting Pattern 2)
Product Mounting Screws (x 2)
Clearance
8

You can attach this productto the mounting bracket ineither the left or right
directions.

(Unit: mm)
Mounting Pattern 2

97

Mounted in
Mounted in
Right Direction Left Direction

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On● When Mounting on a Partition
・To install on a partition, use the partition mounting bracket.
・By using a partition mounting bracket (optional part), you can install this product on the top part of a partition. (Apartition is a barrier that separates space and line of sight)❶ Secure this product and the mounting

This Product* Install in the upright position.

bracket with the product mounting screws.
Recommended Torque

Front

Front You can attach this product tothe mounting bracket in either
the left or right directions.

0.6 N・m (approximate)❶

Bracket Mounting
Hole

Mounted in
Mounted in
Right Direction Left Direction
Mounting Bracket

Product Mounting Screws(x 2)❷ After passing the tightening screw throughthe mounting bracket, attach the metal
fitting.

This Product❸ Secure to the partition by turning thetightening screw clockwise.

Mounting Bracket

Tightening Screw❸❷

Metal Fitting*Careful not to drop.

Selecting a Tightening Screw
Mounting Width 22 - 57 mm → Long Screw
This ProductTightening Screw(Long Screw)
Mounting Bracket
Partition
Metal Fitting

Mounting Width
22 – 57mm

Mounting Width 57 - 60 mm → Short Screw

Tightening Screw(Short Screw)This ProductMounting Bracket
Partition
Metal Fitting

98

Mounting Width
57 – 60 mm

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6.3. Line Out Connection Method

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

NHV Series・ This product can output audio externally.
・ To output audio, connect equipment with a line input.
・ Mini-plug cable is not included with this product. Please provide your own.

CAUTION
Do not use equipment that does not conform to the Line Out terminal (600 Ω 0 dBV). Connecting headphones or passive
speakers (speakers with no built-in amplifier, 32 Ω or less) could result in product failure.
Do not connect multi-pole mini plugs other than mono or stereo plugs. Failure to follow this instruction could result in
product damage.

❶ Connect the mini plug cable to the Line Out
terminal on the back of the product.

・ Confirm the other end of the cable is connected toline input on the target device.
・ You can use a mono mini-plug cable.
If you use a stereo mini-plug cable, only the leftchannel signal is output.

■ Line Out Signal Specifications

Line Out
Terminal

Mini Plug
Cable

0 dBv
Signal level(600 Ω connection,sine wave playback)

Audio Channel Type

1 ch (mono)

Connector ShapeMini Jack99

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6.4. Digital Input/Output Wiring Method

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

NHV Series ( D model)

・When monitoring signal inputs from equipment with contact outputs, use digital inputs. To control equipment withcontact inputs, use digital outputs.
・Follow the instructions below to wire the input terminal block and output terminal block.

CAUTIONBe sure the wiring is done properly. Any mistake in wiring may result in damage or fire.
Wire so that the core of the lead wire is not exposed. Failure to follow this instruction could cause a short circuit leading tofire or equipment damage.
After completing the wiring, check for any loose wires. Failure to follow this instruction could result in malfunction orelectric shock.
Current and voltage of equipment connected to the output terminal block should not exceed the following rated values.
Port 1 – 2: 30 VDC, 3 A inrush current 5 A or less / minimum current 5 VDC, 1 mA (reference value)Equipment connected to the input terminal block should meet the following ratings.
Port 1 – 4 (NPN transistor): Output ON current 6 mA or less / when port is OFF terminal voltage of 24 V, leakage current
0.1 mA or less6.4.1. Wiring procedures❶ Use a flat-blade screwdriver to push in thelever on the terminal block.

▪ We recommend a flat-blade screwdriver with ablade-edge width of 2 mm or less and thickness of
0.5 mm or less (or equivalent).

❶❷ Insert the lead wire into the insertion slot.

Lead Wire
Insertion Slot

❸

Lever

(Keep the lever pressed down)❷❸ With the lead wire inserted, release the lever
to lock.

▪ Check if the lead wire is locked into place.
▪ Do not push the lever harder than necessary withthe screwdriver.
Failure to follow this instruction could result inequipment damage.
▪ When removing the lead wire, do not simply pull
the wire to remove it. (Make sure you work thelever to release the lock)

Strip Length:8 – 9 mm

φ 0.4 to 0.8 mm (AWG26-20)

Stranded Wire

0.13 to 0.52 mm2 (AWG26-20)

Input
Terminal
Block

Terminal Block■ Supported Wire Diameter
Single Wire

OutputTerminal
Block

100

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

6.4.2. Circuit Diagram● Digital input circuit diagram
24V

3.3V
R
R
10kΩ

PC

R

D

2.7kΩ 2.7kΩ
R
1kΩ

C
0.1uF

L
R
R
10kΩ

PC

R

L

2.7kΩ 2.7kΩ
R
1kΩ

C
0.1uF

L
L

R
R
10kΩ

PC

－
＋
－

DI 1
DI 2

R

2.7kΩ 2.7kΩ
R
1kΩ

C
0.1uF

＋

L

＋

L

－

GND

● Digital output circuit diagram

24V

DO

D

101

DI 4

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

6.5. LAN Cable Wiring Method
LAN cable is not included with this product. Please provide your own.
The LAN cable can either be a straight or cross cable.

CAUTION
The LAN cable should have an RJ-45 connector and be rated for Category 5e or higher (Category 6 or higher
recommended).

❶ Connect the LAN cable to the LAN connector
on the back of the product.

Note: Push in the LAN cable until it clicks.

LAN
Connector

LAN
Cable

102

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

6.6. Power Supply Method
There are two different power supplies for this product: AC adapter and PoE power supply.

6.6.1. When Using AC Adapter Power Supply

WARNING
While power is still applied to the AC adapter, do not connect or disconnect the DC power plug. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in electric shock or equipment damage.
Do not touch the power outlet with wet hands. Failure to follow this instruction could result in electric shock.
When using an AC adapter other than the one provided (ADP-001), use an AC adapter that meets the recommended
specifications. Using an AC adapter that does not meet the recommended specifications could result in fire or equipment
damage.
Use an AC adapter equipped with overcurrent protection. Using an AC adapter without overcurrent protection could resultin fire or equipment damage.

CAUTION
Use the AC adapter supplied with this product. If you need to order the AC adapter separately, order our AC adapter(ADP-001).

❶ Loosen the screw with a Phillips screwdriverand detach the power cable clamp.

φ❻ To Power Outlet❷ Pass the AC adapter power cable throughScrew Hole❶ Power Cable
Clamp

the power cable clamp.

❸ Insert the DC plug into the product body with

AC Adapter❹ Secure the power cable clamp with the

Pan Head Screw withSpring Plain Washer(M3 x 8)❹some extra in the power cable.

❸

DC Power JackDC Power Plug❺❷screw without applying excessive force on
the cable.

Recommended Torque

2.1

φ5.5

If you use an AC adapter other than ADP-001, use an AC adapter that meets the specifications below.
Recommended AC Adapter Specifications
・Secondary voltage (DC)・Voltage: 24 VDC ± 5%
9.5・Current: 0.75 A or more, 1 A or less (with overcurrent protection)
・Plug Length: 9.5 mm or longer
φ10・Housing: φ 10 mm or shorter
・Outer Diameter of Plug: φ 5.5 mm
・Inner Diameter of Plug: φ 2.1 mm

Extra

0.3 N･m (approximate)❺ Process the extra portion of cord.

* Illustration is of a D model.

❻ Plug the AC adapter into the power outlet.
103

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

6.6.2. When Using PoE to Supply Power

6. Mounting, Installation, Wiring, and Powering On

NHV Series ( P model)

CAUTION
Make sure the PoE network is indoors and that none of the LAN cable is run outdoors. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in equipment damage due to transient voltage from lightning.
When using a PoE power supply, IEEE802.3at compliant PoE+ power supply devices (HUB, injector) are required.
When using a PoE power supply device compliant with IEEE802.3af, USB power cannot be supplied from the main unit's
USB connector.
When using IEEE802.3af, USB memory and USB LTE dongles cannot be used.
When power is supplied from a PoE device, power is not required from an AC adapter. If both PoE and AC adapter supply
power at the same time, priority is given to the PoE power supply.

6.6.3. Checking at Startup
After power is turned on, it takes approximately 60 seconds to complete startup.The startup time may be longer
depending on the settings.

❶ Immediately after turning on the power, check the states of the LED unit and status LED.
・ LED Unit: All lights turn on (for about 3 seconds) *Except 0-tier models
・ Status LED: Green light on
All LED units turn on(for about 3 second)

LED Unit

Status LED
Green light on
Status LED

All LED units turn on(for about 3 second)

LED Unit❷ After dozens of seconds, check the states of the LED unit and status LED.(The startup time may be longer
depending on the settings.)

LED Unit
Status LED

All LED units turn on again
Status(forLED
about 1 second)
Green light on
Light off

・ LED Unit: All lights turn on again (for about 1 seconds) *Except 0-tier models
・ Status LED: Blue light on
Status LED

Light offBlue light on

All LED units turn on again(for about 1 second)

Status LED
LED Unit

Light off

Status LED
Blue light on
Status LED

104

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

7. Before UseThis section describes the setup procedure required to use this product. Follow the steps below for setup.

STEP 1

As per your application, determine
how the IP address is allocatedConstant Address

STEP 2

Add network settings

Automatic Address

STEP 2

Set DHCP function to [Enabled]

This manual"7.2. Setting Up Network Settings on the PC" ( ☞ page 107)

This manual"7.1. Enabling DHCP Function" ( ☞ page 106)

This manual

STEP 3

Set up user authentication"7.3. Setting Up User Authentication (User Name and Password)"( ☞ page 110)
Must be done at the time of purchase or initialization ofsettings. After setup, the login screen will display.

STEP 4

Display the Web Setup Screen

This manual"7.4. Displaying the Web Setup Screen" ( ☞ page 111)
This manual

STEP 5

Set up this product’s Basic Settings

・Network Settings "7.5. Setting Up Product Network Settings" ( ☞page 114)
・Clock Settings "7.6. Setting Up the Clock" ( ☞ page 116)
・Security Settings "7.7. Setting Up Security" ( ☞ page 118)
・Product name and installation location settings "7.8. Setting Up the
Product Name, Installation Location, and Contact" ( ☞ page 120)
・LED unit (multi-color) and transmitter unit settings "7.13. Setting Up
LED Unit (Multi-color) and Transmitter Unit Settings" ( ☞ page 125)・Adjusting brightness of the LED unit "7.14. Setting Up LED Unit
Brightness Adjustment" ( ☞ page 126)
・Normal State Settings "7.15. Setting Up Normal Status" ( ☞ page 127)NHB Series

・Buzzer settings "7.9. Setting Up the Buzzer" ( ☞ page 121)
NHV Series

・Speaker volume settings "7.10. Setting Up the Speaker Volume"( ☞ page 122)
・Line Out volume settings "7.11. Setting Up the Line Out Volume"( ☞ page 123)・Audio Playback Mode Settings "7.12. Setting Up Audio Playback
Mode" ( ☞ page 124)
・Voice Registration "7.16. Setting Up Voice Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
After completing the desired setup configuration, reboot
this product by pressing the "reset" button, or removing
the power for a few seconds and reapplying it for thechanges to take effect.

STEP 6

Use this productThis manual"8. Operation" ( ☞ page 134)

105

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

7.1. Enabling DHCP Function
・ By enabling the DHCP function, this product can access the DHCP server and automatically get network
information.
・ To enable the DHCP function, you can operate buttons on the main unit or use the Web Setup Screen. When using
the Web Setup Screen, refer to "7.5. Setting Up Product Network Settings" ( ☞ page 114).

CAUTIONIf access to the DHCP server is unavailable, product starts up using the factory default network information.
If you enable the DHCP function, DHCP will also be enabled in subsequent startups. To disable the DHCP function, in the
Web Setup Screenʼs network settings, change the setup method to [Manual Settings].
When using DIP Switches, do not use excessive force.
After completing setup, to use this product, set all DIP switches OFF.

When Using DIP Switches to Enable DHCP Function❶ At the back of the product, turn ON
DIP switch 4.

DIP Switches❷ Power up the product.

❸ The DHCP function is [Enabled].
・ When the DHCP function is [Enabled], the Status
LED turns Amber.
・ For the NHV series, the message "DHCP client
function was enabled. Return the setting switch
and restart the main unit." is played.

❹ After enabling the DHCP function, turn off thepower.

Status LED❺ Turn all the DIP switches OFF.

Amber turns on

・ As required, start up and set up the product.

106

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

7.2. Setting Up Network Settings on the PC
・ To display the productʼs Web Setup Screen, set up is required on a personal computer. The following procedure isbased on factory default settings.
・ When enabling the DHCP function on the Web Setup Screen, configure the settings to match your environment.

❶ From the taskbarʼs [Windows Start menu],

click [Settings] to enter the [Settings] screen.

❷ Click [Network & Internet] to enter the [View ❷network status and tasks] screen.

❸ From [View network status and tasks], click[Change adapter options] to display the[Network Connections] screen.

❸❹ Double-click either [Ethernet] or [Local Area
Connection], used to connect the product.

❹107

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use❺ Click [Properties].

❺❻ Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/
IPv4)] and click [Properties].

❻108

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use❼ In the [General] tab, select the [Use thefollowing IP address:] check box and set theitems.

・ IP address: 192.168.10.2 to 254
・ Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
・ Default gateway: No setting is required for a directconnection. When connecting to a network, checkwith the network administrator.
* Determine beforehand the settings you plan to use
at run time.

❼
Input

❽ After the entries are complete, click [OK].

❽109

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

7.3. Setting Up User Authentication (User Name and Password)
・ The supported web browsers for this product are Google Chrome (verified version: 115) and Microsoft Edge (verified
version: 115).
・ To specify various settings on this product, a user name and password are required.
・ After purchase, either the first time you use a browser to open the Web Setup Screen, or after initializing you use
a browser to open the Web Setup Screen, instead of the login screen the User authentication settings screen willappear.

CAUTION
Do not forget the user name and password. If you cannot remember either one, login will not be possible.
In the unlikely event you cannot remember the user name and password, run initialization and set up the user name andpassword again.

❶ Start a Web browser.
❷ In the Web browser address bar, enter the❷

IP address* set for this product.

* The default IP address for this product is"192.168.10.1".
* If the User authentication settings screen does notappear, confirm your computerʼs network settings
are set up correctly.
"7.2. Setting Up Network Settings on the PC" ( ☞page 107)❸ Review the important statements about the
product and press [Agree].

❸❹ Configure settings for each item.
・ [Username]: Set the user name you want to use
・ [Password]: Set the password you want to use
・ [Verify Password]: Enter the password again for
confirmation❺ Click [register] to apply the defined settings.

❹
❺
110

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

7.4. Displaying the Web Setup Screen

CAUTION
While logged in, after a specified period of inactivity you are automatically logged out.
You can set the amount of time before you are automatically logged out from the Security Settings screenʼs Auto Logout
Time property.
"9.8.7. Security Settings" ( ☞ page 366)
If the screen does not display correctly due to corrupted characters, change the character encoding to Unicode (UTF-8).
To prevent set up from multiple locations at the same time, duplicate logins are not allowed.

❶ Start a Web browser.
❷ In the Web browser address bar, enter the❷

IP address* set for this product.

* The default IP address for this product is"192.168.10.1".
* If the User authentication settings screen does notappear, confirm your computerʼs network settings
are set up correctly.
"7.2. Setting Up Network Settings on the PC" ( ☞page 107)
Select the language❸ Select a language and configure settings foreach item.

・ [Username]: Configured user name・ [Password]: Configured password❹ Click the [Login] button to log in.
❸
❹

111

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❺ On a successful log in, the Web Setup

7. Before Use

Menu

Screen (home screen) is displayed.

* Click

to return to the login screen.

* Click

to return to the home screen.

※

Point
● To configure a setting, from the menu on the left-hand side click the item you want to set. The selected set up screen
is displayed.
● After entering settings on each setup screen, click [Set] to apply.
: Settings are successfully applied.
: There are errors in the settings.

● How to Read the Home Screen

①

No.

②

③

Name

Description①

HeaderThere are product information, home button, and logout button.

②

Menu

Enter the setting screen of each function.

③

Setting Screen

Set each function.

112

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual①

7. Before Use

②

③

④

⑤

⑥

⑦

No.

Name

Description①

Equipment Name

Indicate the equipment name registered in Basic Settings - Main unit settings.

②

MAC Address

Check the MAC Address on the product.

③

Firmware Version

Check the firmware version that the product is currently using.

④

ButtonThere are the home button and the logout button in the home screen.

⑤

Main Unit Information

Check the product model name, operating power supply, and clock.

⑥

Product Function List

Check the setup status of each function.

⑦

Internet connection check

You can check whether the product is connected to the Internet.
For information, refer to "8.5.1.3. How to Check the Internet Connection" ( ☞page 248).

113

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

7.5. Setting Up Product Network Settings
・ To use this product, the network settings must be configured.
・ There are two ways to configure settings: When using in an IPv4 network and when using in an IPv6 network.
Set according to how the product will be used.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.1.2. Network Settings" ( ☞ page 273).

CAUTION
When IP address configuration is set to [Automatic Settings], and access to the DHCP server is unavailable, the productstarts up with the factory default network settings.
With the [Automatic Settings] option, the product restarts with the DHCP function enabled.
After changing the IP address, to reconnect to the product change the network settings on your computer as required.
When set to "Automatic Settings", IPv4 is given priority to the DNS address obtained from the DHCP server.

❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click[Network settings] to enter the network
settings screen.

When Using in an IPv4 Network❶❷ Select the [Setting Method].
・ To specify a constant IP address, select [Manual
Settings].
・ To get an IP address automatically from the DHCP
server, select [Automatic Settings].

❸ Enter the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and[Default gateway].

・ Enter the settings in accordance with the network
environment in which this product is used.
* If the [Setting Method] is [Automatic Settings],
input is disabled.

❹ Select the [Setting Method].Select how the
DNS server is configured for this product.

・ To specify a fixed server address, select "Manual
Settings".
・ If you want the server address to be obtained
automatically from the DHCP server, select"Automatic Settings".

❷
❸
❹
❺

❺ Enter the [DNS server address].

・ If a DNS server is not used, enter "0.0.0.0".

❻ Enter the product's host name.

❼ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

❻* After the settings are applied, the product is
automatically restarted.
* Restarting the product takes approximately
60 seconds.The startup time may be longer
depending on the settings.

114

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

When Using in an IPv6 Network❷ Select the [Setting Method].
・ To specify a constant IP address, select [Manual
Settings].
・ To get an IP address automatically from the DHCP
server, select [Automatic Settings].

❸ Enter the [IP Address], [Prefix length], and[Default gateway].

・ Enter the settings in accordance with the network
environment in which this product is used.
* If the [Setting Method] is [Automatic Settings],
input is disabled.

❷
❸

❹
❺

❹ Select the [Setting Method].Select how the
DNS server is configured for this product.

・ To specify a fixed server address, select "Manual
Settings".
・ If you want the server address to be obtained
automatically from the DHCP server, select"Automatic Settings".

❹ Enter the [DNS server address].

❻

・If a DNS server is not used, leave the [DNS server
address] blank.

❺ Enter the product's host name.
❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
* After the settings are applied, the product is
automatically restarted.
* Restarting the product takes approximately
60 seconds.The startup time may be longer
depending on the settings.

115

7. Before UseNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

7.6. Setting Up the Clock・ Configure the clock on this product. There are two ways to set up the clock.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.1.4. Clock Settings" ( ☞ page 276).

CAUTIONRegardless of the Time zone setting, do not use this product outside of supported countries and regions.
This product uses a capacitor to back up time information. If there is no power for about half a day, the defined time may
shift or it may be reset depending on the charge on the capacitor.
If the backup expires and the clock is reset, it will show January 1, 1970.
When aligning the time with the PC clock, the time may be off by several seconds from the actual PC clock.
If you do not use a NTP server, periodically check and correct the time on the product.

Matching the Clock with the Computer You are Logged in to❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click [Clock
Settings] to display the [Clock Settings]
screen.

❶❷ Click the [Set] button.
❷

116

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

Communicate with NTP Server and Adjust Automatically❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click [Clock
Settings] to display the [Clock Settings]
screen.

❶❷ In the [NTP Server Address] field, enter

either the NTP server address or its hostname.

・ To use a host name for the [NTP server address],
set the DNS server address.
・ To communicate with an NTP server on an
external network, set a default gateway.

❷❸❸ In the [Correction interval (min)] field, enter

the interval of NTP server communications.

❹ Set the [Time zone].

❹* The relationship between the Time zone setting and representative cities is as follows. Refer to the table forsettings.
Setting

Name of representative city

Setting

Name of representative city

UTC-12Baker Island

UTC+1

Paris / BerlinUTC-11

Midway Island

UTC+2

Cairo

UTC-10

Honolulu

UTC+3

JeddahUTC-9Anchorage

UTC+4

Dubai

UTC-8

Los Angeles

UTC+5

KarachiUTC-7

Denver

UTC+6

Dhaka

UTC-6

Chicago / Mexico City

UTC+7

Bangkok / Jakarta / Hanoi

UTC-5

New York / Ottawa

UTC+8

Beijing / Taipei / Singapore / Manila /Kuala Lumpur

UTC-3

Rio de Janeiro

UTC+9Tokyo / Seoul

UTC-2

Fernando de Noronha

UTC+10

SydneyUTC-1

AzoresUTC+11

NouméaUTC

LondonUTC+12

Wellington❺ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
117

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

7.7. Setting Up Security
・ Set the Web Setup Screen communication protocol and amount of time before you are automatically logged out.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.8.7. Security Settings" ( ☞ page 366).

CAUTION
If you select https communication without registering certificate and private key, when you access the Web Setup Screen
or display a pop-up, sometimes an error screen with a message such as "This site is not secure" or "This connection does
not protect privacy" will appear.
In the browser, click the [Details] link then click [Go to Web page] to access the Web Setup Screen.
(The displayed text differs depending on your browser and browser version.)❶ From the [Management] tab, click [Security
Settings] to display the [Security Settings]
window.

❶❷ Select the [Communication Protocols].

❷

Communicate via HTTP

❸ Enter the [Auto Logout Time].

❸* When the time you entered has elapsed, you areautomatically logged out.
* When "0" is specified, you are not automaticallylogged out.
* In units of a minute.

❹ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

118

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Communicate via HTTPS❸ Register [Certificate].
❹ Register [Certificate].

❸❹❺❺ Enter the [Auto Logout Time].
* When the time you entered has elapsed, you areautomatically logged out.
* When "0" is specified, you are not automaticallylogged out.
* In units of a minute.

❹ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

119

7. Before UseNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7.8. Setting Up the Equipment Name, Installation Location, and Contact
・ Configure the naming information for this product.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.1.5. Basic Settings" ( ☞ page 277).

❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click [Basic
Settings] to display the [Basic Settings]
screen.

❶❷ Enter the [Equipment Name] and [Installation
Location].

Enter and edit as required.
The following are the states for the factory
default.
・ Equipment Name "Network Signal Tower"
・ Installation Location "(blank)"
・ Contact "(blank)"
The [Equipment Name] is used in the email bodytext, or as device information when using the PNSManager.
The [Installation Location] is used in the email bodytext.
The [Contact] is used in the email body text.

❷❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

120

7. Before UseNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7.9. Setting Up the Buzzer

NHB Series

・ Configure the buzzer setting on this product.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.1.5. Basic Settings" ( ☞ page 277).

❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click [Basic
Settings] to display the [Basic Settings]
screen.

❶❷ Select the volume from pull-down menu of[Buzzer], and adjust the buzzer volume ofthis product.

❷❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

121

7. Before UseNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7.10. Setting Up the Speaker Volume

7. Before Use

NHV Series

・ Configure the speaker volume setting on this product.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.1.5. Basic Settings" ( ☞ page 277).

❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click [Basic
Settings] to display the [Basic Settings]
screen.

❶❷ On the [Speaker Volume] property, use

the volume slide to adjust the volume of
playback on the main unit's speaker.

ReduceVolume・ The volume decreases as you slide to the left, andincreases as you slide to the right.
Note: The playback volume from the main unit's
speaker is reduced in accordance with the[Speaker Volume] position, with the actual
volume on the MP3 file as the maximum volume.

❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

122

Increase
VolumeNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7.11. Setting Up the Line Out Volume

7. Before Use

NHV Series

・ Configure the Line Out volume setting on this product.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.1.5. Basic Settings" ( ☞ page 277).

❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click [Basic
Settings] to display the [Basic Settings]
screen.

❶❷ On the [Line Out Volume] property, use

the volume slide to adjust the audio output
volume on line out.

ReduceVolumeThe volume decreases as you slide to the left, andincreases as you slide to the right.

❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

123

Increase
VolumeNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7.12. Setting Up Audio Playback Mode

NHV Series

・ Configure the audio playback mode settings on this product.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.1.5. Basic Settings" ( ☞ page 277).

❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click [Basic
Settings] to display the [Basic Settings]
screen.

❶❷ Select [Audio Playback Mode].

❷・ Post-priority Playback Mode: When a playback
event occurs, the current audio is interrupted andthe event audio is played.
･ Memory playback mode: When a playback event
occurs, it is registered in the memory and the event
audio is played after the current audio ends.
Note: Behavior differs depending on the audio
playback mode. For information, refer to "5.3.2.
Audio Playback Function" ( ☞ page 24).

❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

124

7. Before UseNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7.13. Setting Up LED Unit (Multi-color) and Transmitter Unit Settings
・ Configure additional unit settings when installing the LED unit (multi-color) or transmitter unit.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.1.5. Basic Settings" ( ☞ page 277).

❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click [Basic
Settings] to display the [Basic Settings]
screen.

❶❷ Select [Additional units] from the pull-downmenu and specify in accordance with its
usage.

❷

・ If an LED unit (multi-color) is installed, specify[Multi-color unit].
・ If a transmitter unit is installed, specify [WDT].
・ If none of the above units are installed, specify [NotUsed].
Note: If one of the units listed above is installed, makesure you specify the correct additional unit. Do
not attach an LED unit (multi-color) together witha transmitter unit to this product.

❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

125

7. Before UseNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7.14. Setting Up LED Unit Brightness Adjustment
・ Set a dimmer setting for a LED unit (colored lens, clear lens) that is installed.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.1.5. Basic Settings" ( ☞ page 277).

❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click [Basic
Settings] to display the [Basic Settings]
screen.

❶❷ Adjust the [Dimming] brightness level.

❷・ 1 is the minimum brightness, and 4 is the
maximum brightness.
Note: When LED Unit (Multi-color) or WDT is specified
as the additional unit, the setting is fixed at level4.

❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

126

7. Before UseNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

7.15. Setting Up Normal Status
・ Set the Signal Tower operation status for normal operation. If you execute the clear operation after setup is complete,
the product runs in the set normal status.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.1.5. Basic Settings" ( ☞ page 277).

❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click [Basic
Settings] to display the [Basic Settings]
screen.

❶❷ Specify the operation state for the [Normal
operation settings].

❷

・ Any color other than the set light color is turned off.

❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

127

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7.16. Setting Up Voice Registration

7. Before Use

NHV Series・ You can register audio that is played on this product.
・ In addition to registering MP3 files, you can also use this product to create audio from text messages and register
them.
・You can add and register notification sounds for before and after the sound.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.7. Voice Registration" ( ☞ page 356).

CAUTION
The total size of files you can register is 40 MB.
Playback may not be possible for MP3 files that are not encoded at a fixed bit rate.
When line out and Busy outputs are enabled, it operates in accordance with the audio preview settings. Confirm thedevice you are connecting to is in an environment where it is safe to operate before doing so.
Previewing the audio interrupts playback of the current channel.
In memory playback mode, if there is an event in the middle of a preview playback, playback by the event is executed
after preview playback is complete.
If you leave the title blank and register as an MP3 file, the file name of the MP3 file is automatically set as the title.
In preset channels, you cannot register audio, change titles, or delete audio.
Preset channels cannot use the line out output.
Environment-dependent characters such as "©" and " ♠ " and some symbols such as "¥" and "~" may not be synthesized
correctly.
If you register an MP3 file as a notification sound, the file size will be larger than it actually is.

7.16.1. Audio Registration❶ Click [Voice Registration] to display the[Voice Registration] screen.

❶❷ Enter the registration channel to set.

❷

❸ Enter the title of the audio to register.

❸❹ Select the audio to register from [Voice /❹MP3 Data].

128

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

When Registering Voice Data

❺ In the [Text] field, enter the text that is readby the Voice.

・ If there are many line feeds and symbols, it may
not be possible to register even if it is within
the maximum number of characters that can beentered.
If you cannot register, please reduce the number ofline breaks and symbols.

❻ Set the [Language], [Speed], [Voice], and[Tone] values.

・ With the [Language] setting, read aloud text inJapanese or English or Chinese.
・ With the [Voice] setting, read aloud text in a male orfemale voice.
・ By increasing the [Tone] value, read aloud text in aclearer voice. By decreasing the value, read aloud
text in a calmer voice.
・ With the [Speed] setting, read aloud text faster byincreasing the value. By decreasing the value, slow
down the reading of text.

❺
❻
❼
❽
❾

❼ Use [Audio Playback] to listen to audio withthe specified settings.

・ To adjust the audio, set the items in ❻ and listen
again.

❽ Set the values for "Notification Sound (Before)"and "Notification Sound (After)".

・ If you do not want to set a notification sound, set it
to "Unselected".

❾ Press the [Add to Channel List] button toregister the audio data to the channel.

・ When there is no audio title, the text content isregistered as the audio title in the channel.

➓Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

129

7. Before UseNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

When Registering MP3 Data

❺ Click the [Reference] button and select the❺MP3 Data to register.

Supported MP3 File Formats
FormatMPEG1-Audio Layer III (MP3)

Bit Rate

Fixed Bit Rate (CBR only)
32 kbps, 64 kbps, or 128kbps❻

Sampling Frequency

44.1KHz

Audio Channel Type

1 ch (mono)❼File Size You Can
Register

Total up to 40 MB❻ Set the values for "Notification Sound (Before)"and "Notification Sound (After)".

・ If you do not want to set a notification sound, set it
to "Unselected".

❼ Press the [Add to Channel List] button toregister the audio data to the channel.

・ When there is no audio title, the MP3 data name isregistered as the audio title in the channel.

❽ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
7.16.2. Changing the Audio Title❶ From [Channel] select [ch1 to ch60].
❷ In the channel where you want to change
the title, change to the desired title.

❶❷❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

130

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7. Before Use

7.16.3. Audio Line Out Output❶ Select the channel for line out output.

❶❷ For the line out of the channel to play, select❷[Enable/Disable].

❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
7.16.4. Playing and Stopping Audio Playback❶ Select the channel to play.

❶❷ Click the [Play] button for the channel to

❷❸

play.

❸ Click the [Stop] button to stop the playbackof the channel.

7.16.5. Deleting Audio❶ From [Channel] select [ch1 to ch60].

❶❷❷ Click the [Delete] button for the channel todelete.

❸ From the pop-up dialog box that appears,
click [OK].

❸131

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

7.17. Register Notification Sound・ You can register the notification sound to be played by this product.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.7. Voice Registration" ( ☞ page 356).

7.17.1. Notification Sound Registration❶ Click "Notification Sound Registration" todisplay the "Notification Sound Registration"screen.

❷ Enter the registration number.
❸ Enter the title of the sound to register.
❹ Use "Browse "to select the sound.
Supported MP3 File Formats
FormatMPEG1-Audio Layer III (MP3)

Bit Rate

Fixed Bit Rate (CBR only)
32 kbps,
64 kbps(recommended),or 128 kbps

Sampling Frequency

44.1KHz

Audio Channel Type

1 ch (mono)File Size You Can
Register

Total up to 40MB

❶
❷
❸
❹
❷
❸
❹
❺

❺ Press the "Add to List" button to register thesound data as the notification sound.

❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

132

7. Before UseNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

7.17.2. Changing the Title of the Notification Sound❶ For the notification sound whose title you❶want to change, edit to the desired title.

❷ Click "Confirm" to apply the defined settings.

7.17.3. Playing and Stopping the Notification Sound❶ ❷❶ Click the "Play" button for the notification
sound to play.

❷ Click the "Stop" button to stop the playbackof the notification sound.

❶

7.17.4. Deleting the Notification Sound❶ Click the "Delete" button to delete theNotification Sound.

❷ From the pop-up dialog box that appears,
click "OK".

❷133

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8. Operation
This section describes processes on how to set up and use this product. Reference in accordance with how you will
use the product.

8.1. Notifying Equipment
8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification Settings
・ Set to send a SNMP notification when an event occurs.
・ Using SNMP you can set the community name used by SNMP SET/GET to reference items on the product, andset Send TRAP to notify external entities about events that occurred on this product.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.4.1. SNMP Notification Settings" ( ☞ page 334).

8.1.1.1. Setup Procedure● Enable SNMP Notification Function❶ From the [Notification setting] tab, click[SNMP Notification Settings] to enter the[Common Settings for SNMP Notifications]screen.

❶❷ Set the SNMP Notification function to❷❸❹[Enabled].

❸ Enter the number of transmissions.
❹ Enter the v1/v2c Common Transmission
TRAP Community Name.

134

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❺ For the SNMP notification recipient, specify
the [Notification address] and [Type].

You can set up to 8 SNMP notification recipients.
■ When Using [v3 - Trap] and [v3 - Inform]❺

1 Set the [Username].
Select the security level, [NoAuthNoPriv],[AuthNoPriv], or [AuthPriv].
・ NoAuthNoPriv: Communication authenticationand encryption are not performed.
2・ AuthNoPriv: Performs communication
authentication only.
・ AuthPriv: Performs communication
authentication and encryption.
When either [AuthNoPriv] or [AuthPriv] is selected
for the security level, set the [Authentication
method] and [Authentication password].
3・ For the Authentication method, select either[MD5] or [SHA1]. Select to match settings on
supported equipment.

1
2
3
4
5

When you set the [Security Level] to [AuthPriv],
set the [Encryption Method] and [Encrypted
Password].
4・ For the Encryption Method, select either[DES] or [AES]. Select to match settings on
supported equipment.
5 Specify the Engine ID to connect.

❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

● Setting Triggers for SNMP Notifications❶ Set SNMP notification to [Enabled] in eachsetting screen such as Monitoring Settingsand Main unit operation settings.

❷ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

135❶

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● List of OID Notified by This ProductFor information on OID, refer to "10. MIB List" ( ☞ page 367).
TRAP Number

variable-bindings

OID / Item NameOID / Item Name

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.1
trapPatliteAlarmAdded

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.2
pingPatternNum

Indicates a problem with the monitoring target specified
by the ping monitoring setting number (1 to 24).

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.2
trapPatliteAlarmRemoved

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.2
pingPatternNum

Indicates the monitoring target specified by the pingmonitoring setting number (1 to 24) has recovered fromthe problem.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.3
trapPatliteTrapReceived

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.3
trapReceivedPatternNum

Indicates the TRAP specified in the receive TRAP group(1 to 16) has been received.

Description

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.4
trapPatliteClearExecuted-

Indicates the Clear button has been pressed.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.5
trapPatliteRshExecuted-

Indicates the RSH/SSH Command has been received.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.8
trapPatliteTestSwExecuted-

Indicates the Test button has been pressed.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.1
diEntry1

Indicates digital input 1 has been turned on.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.2
diEntry2

Indicates digital input 2 has been turned on.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.3
diEntry3

Indicates digital input 3 has been turned on.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.4
diEntry4

Indicates digital input 4 has been turned on.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.1
diEntry1

Indicates digital input 1 has been turned off.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.2
diEntry2

Indicates digital input 2 has been turned off.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.3
diEntry3

Indicates digital input 3 has been turned off.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.4
diEntry4

Indicates digital input 4 has been turned off.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.13
trapPatliteSNMPGetMatched

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.4
snmpGetMatchPatternNum

Indicates the condition specified in the SNMP monitoring
condition settings (1 to 20) has been met.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.14
trapPatliteSNMPGetReleased

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.4
snmpGetMatchPatternNum

Indicates the condition specified in the SNMP monitoring
condition settings (1 to 20) has been released.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.11
trapPatliteDiStateChangeOn

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.12
trapPatliteDiStateChangeOff

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.15.1
diConditionMatch1-

Indicates the condition specified in Digital Input
Condition Setting 1 has been met.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.15.2
diConditionMatch2-

Indicates the condition specified in Digital Input
Condition Setting 2 has been met.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.15.3
diConditionMatch3-

Indicates the condition specified in Digital Input
Condition Setting 3 has been met.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.15.4
diConditionMatch4-

Indicates the condition specified in Digital Input
Condition Setting 4 has been met.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.16
trapPatliteSNMPGetChange

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.5
snmpGetChangePatternNum

Indicates the change specified in the SNMP monitoring
condition settings (1 to 4) has been detected.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.17
trapPatliteGroupAlarmAdded

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.6
pingGroupPatternNum

Indicates a problem with the monitoring target group(1 to 3) specified by the ping monitoring group setting
number.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.18
trapPatliteGroupAlarmRemoved

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.6
pingGroupPatternNum

Indicates the monitoring target group (1 to 3) specified
by the ping monitoring setting number has recoveredfrom the problem.

136

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

TRAP Number

variable-bindings

OID / Item NameOID / Item Name

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.19
trapPatliteMailFilterMatch

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.7
mailFilterNum

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1
coldStart
1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.9
trapPatliteSlmpMonitoringAction
1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.10
trapPatliteSlmpMonitoringError-

8. Operation

Description
Indicates that mail with the conditions specified by thefilter rule setting number (1 to 20) has been detected.
Indicates this product has been restarted.

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.1
slmpPatternNum

Indicates the data that matches the condition settings(1 to 16) specified in the PLC information readcommand is acquired.
Indicates an error data is acquired by the PLC
information read command.

-

137

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings
・ Set to send an email notification when an event occurs.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.4.2. Email Notification Settings" ( ☞ page 338).

8.1.2.1. Setup Procedure● Set up the Mail Server and Transmission Content❶ From the [Notification setting] tab, click [EmailNotification] to enter the [Server Connection
Settings] screen.

❶❷ Set the [SMTP Server Address], [SMTP

Server Port], [How to Authenticate SMTP],[Authentication method], [Encryption
Method], [SMTP Account Name], and [SMTP
Password].

■ When Using SMTP Certification
Select either [OAuth2] or [Password Authentication]
for the Authentication method and set the [Encryption
Method], [SMTP Account Name], and [SMTP
Password]. Authentication methods [OAuth2] and[Password Authentication] are available only when
the following address is specified as the SMTP
Server Address. When any other server is specified,authentication is fixed as [Password Authentication].
・ Gmail server: smtp.gmail.com
・ Outlook server: smtp.office365.com❷
When Using SMTP Authentication

When Connecting to Gmail■ When Connecting to Gmail*¹ *²
Register the credential file in the [Credential] section.
For information, refer to " ● Preparation" ( ☞ page140).
■ When Connecting to Outlook*¹ *²
Register the [Client ID], [Authorization Endpoint URL],
and [Token Endpoint URL]. For information, refer to" ● Preparation" ( ☞ page 140).
*1 As required, set [State] to [Enabled].
*2 Click the [Acquisition of authorization code] button,and from the authentication screen that pops up,
get the authentication code. In the [Authorization
code entry] field, enter the authentication codethat you retrieved.

When Connecting to Outlook

When Using POP Authentication

If the encryption method is set to "None" when
"Password Authentication" is selected.you canselect the authenticationmethod as ather "LOGIN
Authentication" or "PLAIN Authentication".
■ When Using POP Authentication
Enter the [POP Server Address], [POP Server Port],[POP Account Name], and [POP Password].

When Using No Authentication■ When Using No Authentication
Select [No authentication].

138

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❸ In the [Transmission Settings] screen,❸register the [Sent-from e-mail address] and[Send-to address].

・ Sent-from e-mail address: Sender email address
・ Send-to address: Recipient email address❹ In the [Email subject] screen, register the
subject for the email.

・ You can register up to 16 subjects.

❹❺ In the [Email body text settings], register the
body text of the message.

・ You can register up to 16 body text messages.

❺❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

● Setting Up Triggers for Email Notifications❶ Set [Send email] to [Enabled] in each

operation setting screen such as Monitoring
Settings and Main unit operation settings.

❷ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

139❶

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Preparation
・To use OAuth2 as the Authentication method for sent email, some preparations need to be made.
・The product must be connected to the Internet for proper OAuth2 configuration.
・This product supports Gmail and Outlook OAuth2.

Gmail
For setup instructions, refer to the documentation provided by Google.

❶ Access the Google Cloud Platform.

❷ Create a project for this product.

❸ Activate the Gmail API in the project you❹ Set up the OAuth consent screen.

created.

Specify the scope as [https://mail.google.com/ (Read,
compose, send, and permanently delete all your email
from Gmail)].

❺ Create authentication information.

❻ Download the credentials file (JSON file).

・ For authentication information, create an [OAuth
client ID].
・ For application, create a [Desktop app].

OutlookFor setup instructions, refer to the documentation provided by Microsoft.

❶ From the [Microsoft Azure] website, access[Microsoft Entra ID].

❷ Register the application on this product.
・ For the redirect URI, set the application type to[Public client/native (mobile & desktop)] and the
URL to https://login.microsoftonline.com/common/
oauth2/nativeclient.

❸ Add access permissions to the application❹ Refrain from using [Application (client)ID], [Authorization endpoint], and [Token
endpoint on the registered application].

you created.

For access permissions specify [IMAP.AccessAsUser.
ALL], [POP.AccessAsUser.All], [SMTP.Send], [oﬄine_
acccess], and [User.Read].

140

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings
・ Use this setting to send HTTP Commands when an event occurs.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.4.3. HTTP Transmission Settings" ( ☞ page 344).

8.1.3.1. Setting Up Content of Send HTTP Command❶ From the [Notification setting] tab, click[HTTP Command Destination] to enter the[HTTP Command Destination] screen.

❶❷ In the [HTTP Command Destination] screen,register the HTTP name, command, andtimeout you want to send in fields 1 to 8.

・ Name: Name of HTTP Command・ Command: HTTP Command to send
・ Timeout: Timeout period for the HTTP Command・ HTTP Authentication: Authentication method for
HTTP commands
・ User Name: User name for authentication of HTTP
commands
・ Password: Password for authentication of HTTP
commands❷❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
* If you send the HTTP command to either NHB or
NHV series, HTTP Command Receiving Function
must be configured. Refer to " ● Using HTTP
Commands" ( ☞ page 176).

8.1.3.2. Setting Up Triggers for Send HTTP Command❶ Set [Send HTTP Command] to [Enabled]❶in each operation setting screen such as
Monitoring Settings and Main unit operation
settings.

❷ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

141

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.1.3.3. Setting Up State Change Transmissions
Follow the steps below to set up transmissions on changes in state.

❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click❶[Enable Feature] to enter the [Main unit
function settings] screen.

❷ In the [Main unit function settings] screen,set [Transmission of change information] to[Enabled].

❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

❷❹ From the [Notification setting] tab, click[Destination to send change information]
to enter the [Destination to send change
information] screen.

❹❺ In [Destination to send change information],
register the name, destination address, andtimeout where change information is sent.

・ Name: Name of destination
・ Destination address: Address to send
Specify the protocol such as "http://" or "https://" inDestination address.

・ Timeout: Timeout period for the change

information

・ HTTP Authentication: Authentication method for
HTTP commands
・ User Name: User name for authentication of HTTP
commands
・ Password: Password for authentication of HTTP
commands❺❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
* If you send the HTTP command to either NHB or
NHV series, HTTP Command Receiving Function
must be configured. Refer to " ● Using HTTP
Commands" ( ☞ page 176).

142

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings

NHV Series ( D model)

・ Set to emit a contact output when an event occurs.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.6.3. Contact Output Setting" ( ☞ page 352).

8.1.4.1. Setting Up Contact Output❶ From the [Main unit operation settings] tab,click [Contact output setting] to enter the[Contact output setting] screen.

❶❷ In the [Contact output setting] screen, from❷[Port Selection] select the [Contact output].

❸ [Enabled] the selected contact output.

❸❹ In accordance with the environment in which❹

the product will be used, set the [Function],[Boolean Value], and [Auto OFF] settings.

❺ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

8.1.4.2. Setting Up Triggers for Contact Output❶ Set contact output to [ON], [OFF], or [Nochange] in each operation setting screen
such as Monitoring Settings and Main unit
operation settings.

❶❷ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

143

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.2. Using the Cloud・ Use this setting when you want to connect the product to the cloud.
・For information on each item, refer to "9.5.1. Azure Connection Settings" ( ☞ page 346) and "9.5.2. AWS
Connection Settings" ( ☞ page 348).

8.2.1. Using Microsoft Azure
To use Microsoft Azure, set the Microsoft Azure connection settings.

8.2.1.1. Setting Up Azure
This product can connect to Azure IoT Central or Azure IoT Hub. To connect to one of these services, complete
the procedure below.

● Connecting to Azure IoT Central
For setup instructions, refer to the documentation provided by Microsoft.

❶ From the Microsoft Azure website, access❷ In Azure IoT Central, create an application.

Azure IoT Central.

❸ In the management screen of the application
created, get the [Scope ID], [Device ID], and[SAS Token (Primary Key)].

● Connecting to Azure IoT Hub
For setup instructions, refer to the documentation provided by Microsoft.

❶ From the Microsoft Azure website, access❷ In IoT Hub, create an IoT Hub for connecting❸ In the management screen of the IoT Hub❹ From the management screen of the created

IoT Hub.

this product.

created, create a device for this product.

device, get the connection string (primaryconnection string).

144

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.2.1.2. Setting Up Microsoft Azure Connection Settings❶ In the Cloud Settings, click [Azure❶

Connection Settings] to display the [Azure
Connection Settings] screen.

❷ Select the [Host], either [IoT Central] or❷❸❸ Match the [Scope ID], [Device ID], [SAS❸[Azure IoT Hub].

Token], [Authentication method], [Connection
String], [Host name], [Certificate], and [Client
Private Key] with the connection destination.

❸■ IoT Central

IoT Central

1 Enter the [Scope ID] and [Device ID].
2

If the Authentication method is [Symmetric key], in[SAS Token] enter the Primary key.

*

If the Authentication method is [X.509 Certificate],
3 register the certificate.
・ Provide your own X.509 certificate.
* Get the [Scope ID], [Device ID], and [SAS Token(Primary Key)] values from the device connection
on the Microsoft Azure IoT Central site.

*■ Azure IoT Hub
1 Enter the connection string.
* Get the Device ID, Connection String, and Hostname value from the Microsoft Azure IoT Hub site,
Device ID, Primary Connection String, and Hostname.

Azure IoT Hub**❹ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
145

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.2.1.3. Using Device Twin
・ Using the Device Twin function, you can get the control and current status of this product.
The information is shown in the table below.
・ Do not control the buzzer output and audio channel playback at the same time.
Field Name*
Item

Azure IoT Hub
Get Status

Control

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Azure IoT Central
Get Status

NHV Series

Control

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model 🄳  Model

LED Unit (Red)

led_red

led_red_c

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Amber)

led_yellow

led_yellow_c

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Green)

led_green

led_green_c

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Blue)

led_blue

led_blue_c

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (White)

led_white

led_white_c

●

●

●

●

Buzzer Output

buz_pattern

buz_pattern_c

●

●

●

●

Audio Channelsound_patternsound_pattern_c

–

●

●

●

Digital Output 1

digital_output_1

digital_output_1_c

–

–

–

●

Digital Output 2

digital_output_2

digital_output_2_c

–

–

–

●

Colorsmulti_led_color

multi_led_color_c

●

●

●

●

Patternmulti_led_pattern

multi_led_pattern_c

●

●

●

●

LED Unit(Multi color)* For information on the content of each field name, refer to " ● Device Twin Field Name List" ( ☞ page 147).
Example of Control

・ Turn on the LED unit (Red) → { "led_red":1}・ Turn off the LED unit (Red) and emit buzzer pattern 2 → {"led_red":0, "buz_pattern":2}146

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Device Twin Field Name List
No.

Field Name*1

led_red / led_red_c2

led_yellow / led_yellow_c3

led_green / led_green_c4

led_blue / led_blue_c5

led_white / led_white_cValue[0]: Light off[1]: Light on[2]: Flashing 1
0/1/2/3/4/5/9[3]: Flashing 2[4]: Flashing 3[5]: Flashing 4[9]: No change

Description
Red LED Unit
Amber LED Unit
Green LED Unit
Blue LED Unit
While LED Unit

[1]: Red[2]: Amber[3]: Green6

multi_led_color / multi_led_color_c

1/2/3/4/5/6/7[4]: Blue[5]: White[Color] of Multi-color
unit[6]: Purple[7]: Light blue[0]: Light off[1]: Light on
7

multi_led_pattern /multi_led_pattern_c[2]: Flashing 1
0 / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 9 [3]: Flashing 2[4]: Flashing 3[Pattern] of Multicolor unit[5]: Flashing 4[9]: No change[0]: Stop[1]: Pattern 1[2]: Pattern 2
8

buz_pattern / buz_pattern_c

0/1/2/3/4/5/9[3]: Pattern 3

Buzzer Control[4]: Pattern 4[5]: Pattern 5[9]: No change[0]: Stop
9sound_pattern / sound_pattern_c10digital_output_1 / digital_output_1_c11

digital_output_2 / digital_output_2_c

0 to 71 / 200 / 201

0/1

Channel 1 to 71: Channel number[200], [201]:Text-to-speech
playback by command.
[0]: OFF

Digital Output 1[1]: ON

Digital Output 2

Point● Will not operate when invalid values are specified.

147

Audio Channel

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.2.1.4. Using Direct Method

CAUTION
Do not specify alert, sound, and speech at the same time.
If the same instruction is executed multiple times, the instruction will not execute.
Environment-dependent characters such as "©" and " ♠ " and some symbols such as "¥" and "~" may not be
synthesized correctly.

・ You can control this product using the Direct Method.
・ When performing control, enter method name "Method_Control □ " ( □ : represents any character). Control
instructions are shown in the table below.
・ For multiple instructions, separate them with a comma ( , ). Instructions are executed in the order of priority(smallest value first), not in the order in which they are entered.
・ To repeat, specify either "sound" or "speech" and "repeat".
Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Instruction

Field Name*

Priority

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model 🄳  Model

Control LED unit and buzzer output

alert

1

●

●

●

●

Control LED unit

led

2

●

●

●

●

Control Multi-color unit

color

2

●

●

●

●

Control digital output

alert_do

2

–

–

–

●

Playback specified audio channel

sound

2

–

●

●

●

Play any text

speech

2

–

●

●

●

Repeat playback the specified number of times(sound / speech)

repeat

3

–

●

●

●

Turn off all LED units, stop buzzer

clear

4

●

●

●

●

* For information on the content of each field name, refer to " ● Direct Method Field Name List" ( ☞ page 149).
Example of Control 1

・ Control to turn on Red and Green LED units, to turn off Amber, Blue, and White LED units, and to emit buzzer
pattern 2 → { "alert":"101002"}
Example of Control 2

・ Endlessly play audio channel 1 → { "sound":1,"repeat":255}
Example of Control 3

・ Play voice "Problem identified" twice → { "speech":[ { "text":"Problem identified","lang":"en","voice":"female","speed":"0","tone":"0"}], "repeat":1}

148

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Direct Method Field Name List
No.

1

2

3

Field Name

alert

led

color

Value

Description

6 digits

Controls Signal Tower lights and buzzer.
・ Specify the pattern, in order of R (Red) → Y (Amber) → G (Green) → B (Blue) → C(White) → Z (buzzer).
・ [RYGBC]: Light off [0], Light on [1], Flashing 1 [2], Flashing 2 [3], Flashing 3 [4],Flashing 4 [5], No change [9]・ [Z]: Mute [0], Buzzer pattern 1 [1], Buzzer pattern 2 [2], Buzzer pattern 3 [3], Buzzer
pattern 4 [4], Buzzer pattern 5 [5], No change [9]5 digits

Controls Signal Tower lights.
・ Specify the pattern, in order of R (Red) → Y (Amber) → G (Green) → B (Blue) → C(White).
・ [RYGBC]: Light off [0], Light on [1], Flashing 1 [2], Flashing 2 [3], Flashing 3 [4],Flashing 4 [5], No change [9]2 digits

Controls Multi-color unit.
・ Specify the pattern, in order of col (color) → pat (pattern).
・ [col]: Red [1], Amber [2], Green [3], Blue [4], White [5], Purple [6], Light blue [7]・ [pat]: Light off [0], Light on [1], Flashing pattern 1 [2], Flashing pattern 2 [3], Flashingpattern 3 [4], Flashing pattern 4 [5], No change [9]4alert_do

2 digits

Controls digital output. Specify the pattern in order of digital output 1 → digital output 2.
・ OFF [0]・ ON [1]・ No operation [9]

5

sound

1 to 71

Plays the specified audio channel.

6speech7

repeat*

8

clear

–

2

Plays back any text.
By specifying additional parameters, you can adjust the audio that is played.
・ text: Text to play, 1-400 characters1・ lang: Japanese [jp] or English [en] or Chinese[cn]*・ voice: "male" or "female"・ speed: Voice speed, -5 to 5
・ tone: Voice pitch, -5 to 5
・ notify: Notification Sound (Before), 1 to 10
・ notify_tail: Notification Sound (After), 1 to 10
・ lineout: Line-out output, OFF [0] or ON [1]Will playback up to 400 characters when specified more than 400 characters.

0 to 255

Repeats playback of the audio channel specified in the sound command, the defined
number of times.

1

Turns off all the Signal Tower lights and stops playing the channel.

*1 If you select "cn" on a product that does not have the Voice Synthesizer of Chinese, the same behavior as if
you selected "jp"(Japanese) will occur. refer to ["9.7.1. Voice Registration" ( ☞ page 356)] for how to checkthe languages supported by the Voice Synthesizer.
*2 If the value is set to 255, playback is endless.
Point● Will not operate when invalid values are specified.
● When lang, voice, speed, tone are not specified or the value is invalid, it works with the following values.
Parameter

Specified value

lang

jp

voice

female

speed

0

tone

0

149

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.2.1.5. Using Device-to-cloud message
Use the device-to-cloud Message to notify changes in the state of this product.
Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
No.

Field Name*

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model 🄳  Model

1clear_button

Notification that clear button was pressed.

●

●

●

●

2

clear

Notification that clear operation was executed.

●

●

●

●

3

input_state_1

Notification that digital input 1 changed.

–

–

–

●

4

input_state_2

Notification that digital input 2 changed.

–

–

–

●

5

input_state_3

Notification that digital input 3 changed.

–

–

–

●

6

input_state_4

Notification that digital input 4 changed.

–

–

–

●

7

red_state

Notification that the Red LED changed.

●

●

●

●

8

yellow_state

Notification that the Amber LED changed.

●

●

●

●

9

green_state

Notification that the Green LED changed.

●

●

●

●

10

blue_state

Notification that the Blue LED changed.

●

●

●

●

11

white_state

Notification that the White LED changed.

●

●

●

●

12

multi_color _state

Notification that the multi-color has changed.

●

●

●

●

13

multi_pattern_
state

Notification that the multi-color pattern changed.

●

●

●

●

14

buzzer_state

Notification that the buzzer changed.

●

●

●

●

15

sound_state

Notification that the audio channel changed.

–

●

●

●

16

output_state_1

Notification that digital output 1 changed.

–

–

–

●

17

output_state_2

Notification that digital output 2 changed.

–

–

–

●

18

alarm_Added

Notification that error is detected in ping monitoring.

●

●

●

●

19

alarm_
RemovedNotification that recovery is detected in ping monitoring.

●

●

●

●

20

alarmgroup_
Added

Notification that error is detected in ping groupmonitoring.

●

●

●

●

21

alarmgroup_
RemovedNotification that recovery is detected in ping groupmonitoring.

●

●

●

●

22

trapreceive

Notification that TRAP is received.

●

●

●

●

23

snmpget_
Added

Notification that condition is matched in SNMP device
monitoring.

●

●

●

●

24

snmpget_RemovedNotification that condition is released in SNMP device
monitoring.

●

●

●

●

25

snmpget_ChangeNotification that condition is changed in SNMP device
monitoring.

●

●

●

●

150

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
No.

Field Name*

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model 🄳  Model

26

input_cond_
ChangeNotification that condition is matched in digital input
condition.

－

－

－

●

27

test

Notification that test button was pressed.

●

●

●

●

28

mail_Received

Notification that e-mail was received.

－

●

●

●

29

plc_Matched

Notification that the PLC information read function is
activated.

●

●

●

●

30

plc_RecvErr

Notification that an error response is received by the PLC
information read function.

●

●

●

●

* For information on the content of each field name, refer to " ● Device-to-cloud message Field Name List" ( ☞page 152).

151

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Device-to-cloud message Field Name List
No.

Field Name*

1

clear_buttonon

Notification that clear button was pressed.

2

clear

1

Notification that clear operation was executed.

3

input_state_1

onNotification that digital input 1 turned ON.

off

Notification that digital input 1 turned OFF.

4

input_state_2

onNotification that digital input 2 turned ON.

off

Notification that digital input 2 turned OFF.

5

input_state_3

onNotification that digital input 3 turned ON.

off

Notification that digital input 3 turned OFF.

6

input_state_4

onNotification that digital input 4 turned ON.

off

Notification that digital input 4 turned OFF.

0

Notification that the Red LED unit turned off.

1

Notification that the Red LED unit turned on.

2

Notification that the Red LED unit used flashing pattern 1.

3

Notification that the Red LED unit used flashing pattern 2.

4

Notification that the Red LED unit used flashing pattern 3.

5

Notification that the Red LED unit used flashing pattern 4.

7

red_state

Value

Description

8

yellow_state0, 1, 2, 3, 4,
5

Notification that the Amber LED unit changed. The value is the same as No.7 red_state.

9

green_state0, 1, 2, 3, 4,
5

Notification that the Green LED unit changed. The value is the same as No.7 red_state.

10

blue_state0, 1, 2, 3, 4,
5

Notification that the Blue LED unit changed. The value is the same as No.7 red_state.

11

white_state0, 1, 2, 3, 4,
5

Notification that the White LED unit changed. The value is the same as No.7 red_state.

0

Notification when the multi-color light turned off.

1

Notification when Red on the multi-color light is in operation.

2

Notification when Amber on the multi-color light is in operation.

3

Notification when Green on the multi-color light is in operation.

4

Notification when Blue on the multi-color light is in operation.

5

Notification when White on the multi-color light is in operation.

6

Notification when Purple on the multi-color light is in operation.

7

Notification when Light blue on the multi-color light is in operation.

12

multi_color _
state

152

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

13

14

Field Name*

multi_pattern_statebuzzer_state

Value

8. Operation

Description0

Notification when the multi-color light turned off.

1

Notification when the multi-color light turned on.

2

Notification when flashing pattern 1 on the multi-color light is in operation.

3

Notification when flashing pattern 2 on the multi-color light is in operation.

4

Notification when flashing pattern 3 on the multi-color light is in operation.

5

Notification when flashing pattern 4 on the multi-color light is in operation.

0

Notification that the buzzer stopped.

1

Notification that buzzer used pattern 1.

2

Notification that buzzer used pattern 2.

3

Notification that buzzer used pattern 3.

4

Notification that buzzer used pattern 4.

5

Notification that the Red LED unit used flashing pattern 5.

0 to 71 and
200, 201

Notification that the audio channel changed.

on

Notification that digital output 1 turned ON.

off

Notification that digital output 1 turned OFF.

15

sound_state

16

output_state_1

17

output_state_2

onNotification that digital output 2 turned ON.

off

Notification that digital output 2 turned OFF.

18

alarm_Added

1 to 24

Notification that error is detected in ping monitoring.

19

alarm_
Removed

1 to 24

Notification that recovery is detected in ping monitoring.

20

alarmgroup_
Added

1 to 3

Notification that error is detected in ping group monitoring.

21

alarmgroup_
Removed

1 to 3

Notification that recovery is detected in ping group monitoring.

22

trapreceive

1 to 16

Notification that TRAP is received.

23

snmpget_Added

1 to 20

Notification that condition is matched in SNMP device monitoring.

24

snmpget_Removed

1 to 20

Notification that condition is released in SNMP device monitoring.

25

snmpget_Change1 to 5

Notification that condition is changed in SNMP device monitoring.

26

input_cond_
Change1 to 4

Notification that condition is matched in digital input condition.

27

test

1

Notification that test button was pressed.

28

mail_Received

1 to 20

Notification that e-mail was received.

29

plc_Matched

1 to 16

Notification that the PLC information read function is activated.

30

plc_RecvErr

1 to 16

Notification that an error response is received by the PLC information read function.

[200], [201]: Text-to-speech playback by command.

153

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.2.1.6. Using Cloud-to-device message
・ Using Cloud-to-device Message, you can control the product. Control instructions are shown in the table below.
・ To repeat, specify both "sound" and "repeat" or both "text" and "repeat". When doing so, separate the commands with a comma ( , ).
Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Instruction

Field Name*

NHB
SeriesNHV Series(empty) 🄼  Model 🄳  Model

Control LED unit and buzzer output

alert

●

●

●

●

Control LED unit

led

●

●

●

●

Control Multi-color unit

color

●

●

●

●

Control digital output

alert_do

–

–

–

●

Turn off all LED units, stop buzzer

clear

●

●

●

●

Playback specified audio channel

sound

–

●

●

●

Set text playing in the voice synthesizer

text

－

●

●

●

Specify language playing in voice synthesizer

lang

－

●

●

●

Specify voice playing in voice synthesizer

voice

－

●

●

●

Specify speed playing in voice synthesizer

speed

－

●

●

●

Specify tone playing in voice synthesizer

tone

－

●

●

●

Repeat playback the specified number of times (Audio Channel)

repeat–●●●Specify a notification sound to play before the voice synthesizer

notify–●●●Specify a notification sound to play after the voice synthesizer

notify_tail

–

●

●

●

Control line-out output

lineout

–

●

●

●

* For information on the content of each field name, refer to " ● Cloud-to-device message Field Name List" ( ☞page 155).
Example of Control 1

・ Control to turn Red LED unit on, to set Amber LED unit with flashing pattern 1, no change for Green, Blue, andWhite LED units, and to emit buzzer pattern 3 → alert=129993
Example of Control 2

・ Play audio channel 2 twice → sound=2,repeat=1
Example of Control 3

・ Play "Problem identified" in voice synthesizer → text=Problem identified,lang=en,voice=female,speed=0,tone=0

154

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Cloud-to-device message Field Name List
No.

1

2

Field Name

alert

led

Value

Description

6 digits

Controls Signal Tower lights and buzzer.
・ Specify the pattern, in order of R (Red) → Y (Amber) → G (Green) → B (Blue)→ C (White) → Z (buzzer).
・ [RYGBC]: Light off [0], Light on [1], Flashing 1 [2], Flashing 2 [3], Flashing 3[4], Flashing 4 [5], No change [9]・ [Z]: Mute [0], Buzzer pattern 1 [1], Buzzer pattern 2 [2], Buzzer pattern 3 [3],Buzzer pattern 4 [4], Buzzer pattern 5 [5], No change [9]5 digits

Controls Signal Tower lights.
・ Specify the pattern, in order of R (Red) → Y (Amber) → G (Green) → B (Blue)→ C (White).
・ [RYGBC]: Light off [0], Light on [1], Flashing 1 [2], Flashing 2 [3], Flashing 3[4], Flashing 4 [5], No change [9]

3

color

2 digits

Controls Multi-color unit.
・ Specify the pattern, in order of col (color) → pat (pattern).
・ [col]: Red [1], Amber [2], Green [3], Blue [4], White [5], Purple [6], Light blue [7]・ [pat]: Light off [0], Light on [1], Flashing pattern 1 [2], Flashing pattern 2 [3],Flashing pattern 3 [4], Flashing pattern 4 [5], No change [9]4alert_do

2 digits

Controls digital output. Specify the pattern in order of digital output 1 → digital
output 2.
・OFF [0], ON [1], No operation [9]

5

clear

1

Turns off all the Signal Tower lights and stops playing the channel.

6

sound

1 to 71

Plays the specified audio channel.

7

text

-

Set text playing in the voice synthesizer.
Text can be set 400 characters.
Will playback up to 400 characters when specified more than 400 characters.

8

lang

jp, en, cn*

9

voice

male, female

Specify voice playing in voice synthesizer.
This field is used as an additional field for the text field.

10

speed

-5 to 5Specify speed playing in voice synthesizer.
This field is used as an additional field for the text field.

11

tone

-5 to 5Specify tone playing in voice synthesizer.
This field is used as an additional field for the text field.

12

repeat*0 to 255

Repeats playback of the audio channel specified in the sound command, thedefined number of times.

13

notify1 to 10Specify a notification sound to play before the voice synthesizer.
This field is used as an additional field for the text field.

14

notify_tail

1 to 10Specify a notification sound to play after the voice synthesizer.
This field is used as an additional field for the text field.

15

lineout

0,1

Control line-out output.
This field is used as an additional field for the text field.

2

1

Specify language playing in voice synthesizer.
This field is used as an additional field for the text field.

*1 If you select "cn" on a product that does not have the Voice Synthesizer of Chinese, the same behavior as if
you selected "jp"(Japanese) will occur. refer to ["9.7.1. Voice Registration" ( ☞ page 356)] for how to checkthe languages supported by the Voice Synthesizer.
*2 If the value is set to 255, playback is endless.
Point● Will not operate when invalid values are specified.
● Environment-dependent characters such as "©" and " ♠ " and some symbols such as "¥" and "~" may not be
synthesized correctly.

155Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Point● Will not operate when invalid values are specified.
● Environment-dependent characters such as "©" and " ♠ " and some symbols such as "¥" and "~" may not be
synthesized correctly.
● When lang, voice, speed, tone are not specified or the value is invalid, it works with the following values.
Parameter

Specified value

lang

jp

voice

female

speed

0

tone

0

156

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.2.2. Using AWS
To use AWS, AWS settings and AWS connection settings must be configured.

8.2.2.1. Setting Up AWSCAUTION
Refer to the following document and set up an AWS account.
https://docs.aws.amazon.com/iot/latest/developerguide/setting-up.html
This instruction manual assumes that the following are configured.
・Sign up for an AWS account・Create a user and grant access permissions
・Open the AWS IoT console● Create a Policy
Create a policy for NHB/NHV to connect to AWS IoT Core.

❶ In the AWS IoT console, from the navigation
panel click [Secure].

❶❷❷ Click [Policies].
❸ Click [Create a policy].

❸❹ Click [Advanced mode].
❹157

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❺ Enter a name.
❺❻ Enter the policy.

❻

Example Policy Entry{"Version": "2012-10-17","Statement": [{"Effect": "Allow","Action": "iot:*","Resource": "*"
}
]
}

❼

・ All devices in the fleet must have credentials thatallow them to authorize only intended actions.
This includes AWS IoT MQTT actions such as
publishing messages, subscribing to topics, andso on. As permission policies vary depending on
your environment, create a policy that best fits
your business and security requirements.

・https://docs.aws.amazon.com/iot/latest/developerguide/example-iot-policies.html
・https://docs.aws.amazon.com/iot/latest/developerguide/security-bestpractices.html❼ Click [Create a policy].

158

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Create Things and Certificates
When creating a thing in the AWS IoT console, follow the steps below to save the [Device certificate], [Privatekey], and [Root CA certificate].

❶ In the AWS IoT console, from the navigation
panel click [Manage].

❷ Click [Things].
❸ Click [Create things].

❶❷❸❹ From the [Create things] screen, click[Create single thing] - [Next].

❹❺ In the [Specify thing properties] screen,enter the thingʼs name and click [Next].

* The thing name entered here is used as the client
ID. The client ID is used by the Device Shadow
function.
"9.5.2. AWS Connection Settings" ( ☞ page 348)
* When using Device Shadow, select the [Unnamed
shadow].

❺❺❻ In the [Configure device certificate] screen,

select [Auto-generate a new certificate] andclick [Next].

❻❻❼ Select the policy to attach to the certificate.
❼❽ Click [Create thing].

❽
159

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❾ For each item click [Download] to downloada [Device certificate], [Public key], [Privatekey], and [Root CA certificate].

❾

・ For [Root CA certificate], download [RSA 2048-bit
Key: Amazon Root CA 1].
・ Save [Public key] if required.

❿ Click [Done].

160

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.2.2.2. Setting Up the AWS Connection❶ From [Cloud Settings], click [AWS

Connection Settings] to display the [AWS
Connection Settings] screen.

❶❷ Enter the [Host], [Port number], [Client ID],❷

[Subscribe Topics], and [Publish Topics].

* Enter values to each item as follows.
Item

Value to enter

Host

Device data endpoint value
obtained from the AWS IoTConsoleClient ID" ● Create Things andCertificates" ( ☞ page 159)
for instructions on creating thing
name

Subscribe
Topics

Topic subscribed by thisproduct. For example, "NHV/SUBSCRIBE"

PublishTopics

Topic published by this product.
For example, "NHV/PUBLISH"* Access the AWS IoT console. In the console.aws.
amazon.com/iot navigation panel, click [Settings].
In the [Host] field, enter the value of the [Endpoint]
shown at the bottom of [Device data endpoint]area.

❸ Click [Select a file] and select the certificate
to register.

* Certificate that was downloaded in "8.2.2.1. Setting Up AWS" ( ☞ page 157). For each of thefollowing items, select and upload a certificate.
Item❸

Value to enter

Root CA certificate

Root CA certificate

Client Certificate

Device certificate

Client Private Key

Private Key* If the certificate has been uploaded, "Registration"is displayed in the field.

❹ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
161

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.2.2.3. Checking Connection with AWS IoT Core
Use the test function to verify NHV is connected to the AWS IoT Core. Follow the steps below to verify control on
the LED unit.

❶ In the AWS IoT consoleʼs navigation panel,❷click [Test] - [MQTT test client].

The [MQTT test client] screen
is displayed❸❹❶❷ The [MQTT test client] screen is displayed.
❸ Enter the subscribe topic set in "8.2.2.2.

❺

Setting Up the AWS Connection" ( ☞ page161).

❹ Enter control command.
Example Control Command Input{"alert": "123094"}❺ Click [Publish] to publish the message.
❻ Check the status of the NHB/NHV.
Red

If the above example control command is issued andthe NHB/NHV status changes as shown below, theconnection is successfully established.
NHB/NHV Status
・Red LED unit: Light on・Amber LED unit: Flashing pattern 1・Green LED unit: Flashing pattern 2・Blue LED unit: Light off
・White LED unit: No change
・Buzzer: Buzzer pattern 4

LED Unit

Light onAmber

Flashing pattern 1

GreenFlashing pattern 2BlueLight offWhite
No change
Buzzer:Buzzer pattern 4162

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.2.2.4. Using MQTT Subscribe Function
・ You can control this product by issuing messages to topics subscribed (Subscribe topic) by the product.
Information you can control is shown in the table below.
・ For multiple instructions, separate them with a comma ( , ). Instructions are executed in the order of priority(smallest value first), not in the order in which they are entered.
Input Example{}

Turn Red LED unit on and play audio channel 30 one time

"led_red": "1","sound_pattern": "30","repeat": "1"

Item

Field Name*

Priority

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
NHV Series
NHB
Series(empty) 🄼  Model 🄳  Model

LED Unit and Buzzer

alert

1

●

●

●

●

LED Unit

led

2

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Red)

led_red

2

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Amber)

led_yellow

2

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Green)

led_green

2

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Blue)

led_blue

2

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (White)

led_white

2

●

●

●

●

Multi-color unit

color

2

●

●

●

●

Buzzer Output

buz_pattern

2

●

●

●

●

Audio Channel Playbacksound_pattern

2

–

●

●

●

Digital Output 1

digital_output1

2

–

–

–

●

Digital Output 2

digital_output2

2

–

–

–

●

Play any text

speech

2

－

●

●

●

Repeatrepeat

3

–

●

●

●

Clear

clear

4

●

●

●

●

* For information on the content of each field, refer to " ● MQTT Subscribe Function - Field Name List" ( ☞page 164).
Point● To repeat, specify either the audio channel playback or play any text and specify repeat.
● Do not control the buzzer, speech, and audio channel playback at the same time.
● If the same instruction is executed multiple times, the instruction will not execute.
● Set the subscribe topic for this product, with "9.5.2. AWS Connection Settings" ( ☞ page 348) as a reference.
● When Subscribe topics are not set up, this function does not operate.

163

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● MQTT Subscribe Function - Field Name List
No.

Field Name

Data
Type

Value

alert

Specify pattern in order R (Red) → Y (Amber)→ G (Green) → B (Blue) → C (White) → Z(buzzer).
【RYGBC】[0]: Light off, [1]: Light on, [2]: Flashing 1,[3]: Flashing 2, [4]: Flashing 3,[5]: Flashing 4, [9]: No change【Z】[0]: Mute, [1]: Buzzer pattern 1,[2]: Buzzer pattern 2,[3]: Buzzer pattern 3,[4]: Buzzer pattern 4,[5]: Buzzer pattern 5,[9]: No change

2

ledSpecify the pattern, in order of R (Red) →Y (Amber) → G (Green) → B (Blue) → C(White).
【RYGBC】[0]: Light off, [1]: Light on, [2]: Flashing 1,[3]: Flashing 2, [4]: Flashing 3,[5]: Flashing 4, [9]: No change3

led_red4

led_yellow

5

led_green6

led_blue7

led_white

1

8

color

Description

Controls Signal Tower lights andbuzzer with a 6-digit string.
Example, "alert": "123094"

Red LED unit on,
Amber LED unit flashing pattern 1,
Green LED unit flashing pattern 2,Blue LED unit off,
White LED unit no change,
Buzzer pattern 4Signal Tower is controlled using a 5
character string.
Example, "led": "10013"

Red LED unit on, Amber LED unit off,Green LED unit off, Blue LED unit on,
White LED unit flashing pattern 2Controls the Red LED unit.

string[0]: Light off, [1]: Light on,[2]: Flashing 1, [3]: Flashing 2, [4]: Flashing 3,[5]: Flashing 4, [9]: No change

Controls the Amber LED unit.
Controls the Green LED unit.
Controls the Blue LED unit.
Controls the White LED unit.

2 digits

Controls Multi-color unit.
・ Control the pattern, in order of col(color) → pat (pattern).
・ [col]: Red [1], Amber [2], Green [3],Blue [4], White [5], Purple [6], Light
blue [7]・ [pat]: Light off [0], Light on [1], Flashingpattern 1 [2], Flashing pattern 2 [3],Flashing pattern 3 [4], Flashing pattern
4 [5], No change [9]Controls the buzzer.

9

buz_pattern[0]: Stop, [1]: Pattern 1,[2]: Pattern 2, [3]: Pattern 3,[4]: Pattern 4, [5]: Pattern 5,[9]: No change

10sound_pattern[0]: Stop[1] to [71]: Channel number

Plays the specified audio channel.

11

repeat*¹[0] to [255]: Number of times to repeat

Specifies the number of times torepeat the audio.

12

digital_output1

13

digital_output2[0]: OFF[1]: ON[9]: No change

14

clear

[1]: Execute clear

Controls digital output 1.
Controls digital output 2.
Turns off all the Signal Tower lights
and stops playing the channel.

164

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

15

Data
Type

Field Namearray /

speechstringValue–

8. Operation

Description
Plays back any text.
By specifying additional parameters,
you can adjust the audio that isplayed.
text: Text to play, 0 to 400 characterslang: Japanese [jp], English [en],Chinese[cn]*²
voice: "male" or "female"
speed: Voice speed, -5 to 5
tone: Voice pitch, -5 to 5
notify: Notification Sound (Before),
1 to 10
notify_tail: Notification Sound (After),
1 to 10
lineout: line-out output,
OFF[0] or ON[1]Will playback up to 400 characterswhen specified more than 400
characters.

*1 If the value is set to "255", playback is endless.
*2 If you select "cn" on a product that does not have the Voice Synthesizer of Chinese, the same behavior as if
you selected "jp"(Japanese) will occur. refer to ["9.7.1. Voice Registration" ( ☞ page 356)] for how to checkthe languages supported by the Voice Synthesizer.

Point● Will not operate when invalid values are specified.
● Do not control the buzzer, audio channel playback, and text playback (speech) at the same time.
● Environment-dependent characters such as "©" and " ♠ " and some symbols such as "¥" and "~" may not be
synthesized correctly.
● When lang, voice, speed, tone are not specified or the value is invalid, it works with the following values.
Parameter

Specified value

lang

jp

voice

female

speed

-1

tone

-1

Input Example{}

When the Red LED unit is on and the voice synthesizer plays "Problem identified""led_red":"1","speech":[{"text":"Problem identified","lang":"en","voice":"female","speed":"0","tone":"0"
}
]

165

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.2.2.5. Using MQTT Publish Function
The change information for this product is sent to the defined topic (Publish topic).
The change information you can send is as shown in the table below.
Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Item

Field Name*NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model 🄳  Model

LED Unit (Red)

led_red

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Amber)

led_yellow

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Green)

led_green

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Blue)

led_blue

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (White)

led_white

●

●

●

●

multi_led_color

●

●

●

●

multi_led_pattern

●

●

●

●

Buzzer Output

buz_pattern

●

●

●

●

Audio Channel Playbacksound_pattern

–

●

●

●

Digital Output

digital_output1 - 2

–

–

–

●

Pressing Clear Button/ Executing Clear
Operation

clear

●

●

●

●

Digital Input

digital_input1 - 4

–

–

–

●

Ping Monitoring Error

alarm_Added

●

●

●

●

Ping Monitoring Recovery

alarm_Removed

●

●

●

●

Ping Group Monitoring
Error

alarmgroup_Added

●

●

●

●

Ping Group Monitoring
Recoveryalarmgroup_Removed

●

●

●

●

TRAP Receiving

trapreceive

●

●

●

●

SNMP Device Monitoring- Match Detection

snmpget_Added

●

●

●

●

SNMP Device Monitoring- Release Detection

snmpget_Removed

●

●

●

●

SNMP Device Monitoring- Change Detection

snmpget_Change

●

●

●

●

Digital Input Condition

input_cond_Change

－

－

－

●

Pressing Test Button

test

●

●

●

●

E-mail Receiving

mail_Received

－

●

●

●

Multi-color unit

166

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Item

Field Name*NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model 🄳  Model

Client ID

client_id

●

●

●

●

Publish Topic

topic_name

●

●

●

●

PLC information readfunction Condition
Matchedplc_Matched

●

●

●

●

PLC information readfunction Error Response

plc_RecvErr

●

●

●

●

* For information on the content of each field, refer to " ● MQTT Publish Function - Field Name List" ( ☞ page
168).
Point
● Set the publish topic for this product, with "9.5.2. AWS Connection Settings" ( ☞ page 348) as a reference.
● When Publish topics are not set up, this function does not operate.
● Sends the current status of changed items only.

167

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● MQTT Publish Function - Field Name List
No.

Field Name

Data Type

Value

Description
・Notification of client ID value.

1

client_id*

・Notification of the value as set in
the Amazon Web Services (AWS)
Connection Settings Screen.

Setup Value

・Notification of Publish topic value.
2

topic_name*3

led_red4

led_yellow

5

led_green6

led_blue7

led_white

8

multi_led_color

・Notification of the value as set in
the Amazon Web Services (AWS)
Connection Settings Screen.

Setup Value

Notification of the Red LED unit status.

[0]: Light off

Notification of the Amber LED unit status.

[1]: Light on[2]: Flashing 1

Notification of the Green LED unit status.

[3]: Flashing 2[4]: Flashing 3

Notification of the Blue LED unit status.

[5]: Flashing 4

Notification of the White LED unit status.

[1]: Red, [2]: Amber,[3]: Green, [4]: Blue, [5]: White,[6]: Purple, [7]: Light blue

Notification of the Multi-color unitʼs color
state.

[0]: Light off, [1]: Light on,
9[2]: Flashing pattern 1,

multi_led_
pattern[3]: Flashing pattern 2,
string[4]: Flashing pattern 3,

Notification of the Multi-color unitʼs patternstate.

[5]: Flashing pattern 4[0]: Stop, [1]: Pattern 1,

10

buz_pattern[2]: Pattern 2, [3]: Pattern 3

Notification of the buzzer status.

[4]: Pattern 4, [5]: Pattern 5[0]: Stop[1] to [71]: Channel number

11

sound_pattern

12

digital_output1

Notification of the digital output 1 status.

13

digital_output2

Notification of the digital output 2 status.

14

digital_input1[0]: OFF15

digital_input2[1]: ON16

digital_input3

17

digital_input4

18

clear

19

alarm_Added

20

alarm_
Removed

[200, [201]: Text-to-speech playback bycommand.

Notification of the audio channel status.

Notification of the digital input status.

[1]: Press clear button / Execute clear
operation[1] to [24]: Ping monitoring setting
number168

Notification that clear button was pressedor clear operation was executed.
Notification that error is detected in pingmonitoring.
Notification that recovery is detected inping monitoring.

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Data TypeValue

8. Operation

No.

Field Name

21

alarmgroup_
Added

22

alarmgroup_
Removed23

trapreceive[1] to [16]: TRAP receiving setting
numberNotification that TRAP is received.

24

snmpget_Added[1] to [20]: Match detection setting
number of SNMP device monitoring

Notification that condition is matched in
SNMP device monitoring.

25

snmpget_Removed[1] to [20]: Match detection setting
number of SNMP device monitoring

Notification that condition is released in
SNMP device monitoring.

26

snmpget_Change[1] to [5]: Change detection setting
number of SNMP device monitoring

Notification that condition is changed in
SNMP device monitoring.

27

input_cond_
Change[1] to [20]: Match detection setting
number of Digital Input Condition

Notification that condition is matched indigital input condition.

28

test

[1]: Press test button

Notification that test button was pressed.

29

mail_Received[1] to [20]: Mail detection setting number

Notification that e-mail was received.

30

plc_Matched[1] to [16]: PLC information read function
condition matching number

Condition matched is notified by the PLC
information read function.

31

plc_RecvErr[1] to [16]: PLC information read function
error response number

The reception of an error response isnotified by the PLC information readfunction.

[1] to [3]: Ping group monitoring setting
numberstringDescription
Notification that error is detected in pinggroup monitoring.
Notification that recovery is detected inping group monitoring.

* "client_id" and "topic_name" are always included at the start of the message.
Input Example

When turn on Amber LED unit, emit buzzer pattern 1{"client_id": "NH","topic_name": "NH/Publish","led_yellow": "1","buzzer_pattern": "1"}

169

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.2.2.6. Using Device Shadow Function
Using the Device Shadow function, you can get the control and current status information for this product.
The control and status information you can get is shown in the table below.
Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Item

Field Name*NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model 🄳  Model

LED Unit (Red)

led_red

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Amber)

led_yellow

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Green)

led_green

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (Blue)

led_blue

●

●

●

●

LED Unit (White)

led_white

●

●

●

●

multi_led_color

●

●

●

●

multi_led_pattern

●

●

●

●

Buzzer Output

buz_pattern

●

●

●

●

Audio Channel Playbacksound_pattern

–

●

●

●

Digital Output

digital_output1 - 2

–

–

–

●

Multi-color unit

* For information on the content of each field, refer to " ● Device Shadow Function - Field Name List" ( ☞ page
171).
Point
● Do not control the buzzer, audio channel playback, and voice synthesizer at the same time.
● If the same instruction is executed multiple times, the instruction will not execute.
● When client ID is not set up, this function does not operate.

170

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Device Shadow Function - Field Name List
No.

Field Name

Data Type

Value

Description
Red LED Unit

1

led_red2

led_yellow3

led_green4

led_blue5

led_white[9]: No change

While LED Unit

6

multi_led_color[1]: Red, [2]: Amber, [3]: Green, [4]: Blue, [5]:White, [6]: Purple,[7]: Light blue

[Color] of Multi-color unit

7

multi_led_pattern[0]: Light off, [1]: Light on,[2]: Flashing pattern 1, [3]: Flashing pattern 2,[4]: Flashing pattern 3, [5]: Flashing pattern 4[Pattern] of Multi-color unit[0]: Light off[1]: Light on

Amber LED Unit[2]: Flashing 1[3]: Flashing 2

Green LED Unit[4]: Flashing 3

Blue LED Unit[5]: Flashing 4

integer[0]: Stop, [1]: Pattern 18[2]: Pattern 2, [3]: Pattern 3,

buz_pattern[4]: Pattern 4, [5]: Pattern 5,

Buzzer Control[9]: No change[0]: Stop
9sound_pattern

10

digital_output1 - 2[1] to [71]: Channel number[200], [201]: Text-to-speech playback bycommand.

Audio Channel[0]: OFF[1]: ON

Digital Output[9]: No change

Point● Will not operate when invalid values are specified.
Input Example 1

When notifying Green LED unit is on and audio channel 50 is playing"state": {"reported": {"led_red": 0,"led_yellow": 0,"led_green": 1,"led_blue": 0,"led_white": 0,"multi_led_color": 0,"multi_led_pattern": 0,"buz_pattern": 0,"sound_pattern": 50,"digital_output1": 0"digital_output2": 0}}
Input Example 2

When controlling audio channel to stop playing and digital output 1 to turn ON"state": {"desired": {"sound_pattern": 0,"digital_output1": 1
}
}

171

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.3. Checking and Controlling the Status of This Product8.3.1. Checking and Controlling the Status of This Product with Commands
・ You can check and control the status of this product using "RSH Command", "SSH Command", "SNMPCommand", "HTTP Command", "PNS Command", and "PHN Command".
・ [Command Function Enable Setting] and [Main Unit Operation Settings] must be set. Make sure you set these up
before use.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.2.1. Socket Communication Settings" ( ☞ page 279), "9.2.2. RSH/SSH
Command Reception Settings" ( ☞ page 280) and "9.2.3. SNMP Command Reception Settings" ( ☞ page 284).

8.3.1.1. Setting Up the Command Main Unit Operation Settings● Set up RSH Command❶ From the [Command Reception Settings]

tab, click [RSH/SSH Command Reception
Settings] to display the [RSH/SSH Command
Reception Settings] screen.

❷ Set the [RSH Command Reception❶❷❸

Function] to [Enabled].

❸ From [Common] or [Individual], select[Restore timer].

Common: Control each color of the Signal Tower andbuzzer with a common timer.
Individual: Control each color of the Signal Tower andbuzzer with individual timers.

172

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❹ For receiving commands, from theNotification Method screen set [Send email]or [SNMP Notification].

When a command is received, notifications set to[Enabled] are executed.
Note: To execute notifications, notification settings must
be configured beforehand based on the notification
method.
"8.1. Notifying Equipment" ( ☞ page 134)
Using Send Email■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
Set up as required.
For information, refer to "8.1.2. Setting Up EmailNotification Settings" ( ☞ page 138)

1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2

Using SNMP Notification■ Using SNMP Notification
・ Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP
Notification Function must be [Enabled].
For information, refer to "8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP
(Trap Inform) Notification Settings" ( ☞ page 134)

Select [Enabled]❺ For the RSH Command Reception Settings,

Specifying an Address

set [Sent-from address settings].

■ To specify addresses, enable [Sent-fromaddress settings], and set the [Source IP
address] and [Login name].
・ When [Sent-from address settings] is enabled,
restricted to receiving commands from IP address
and login names registered in the [Source IP
address] and [Login name] fields.
・ Cannot use "root", "lp", and "nobody" as the login
name.
・ Enter the IP address in Ipv6 or Ipv4 format.

❺■ To remove restrictions, disable [Sent-fromaddress settings] and set a [Common Login
Name].

No Restrictions

・ Cannot use "root", "lp", and "nobody" as the login
name.

Select [Disabled]❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
Set up173

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Using SSH Commands❶ From the [Command Reception Settings]

tab, click [RSH/SSH Command Reception
Settings] to display the [RSH/SSH Command
Reception Settings] screen.

❷ Set the [SSH Command Reception Function]
to [Enabled].

❸ From [Restore timer], select either [Common]❶❷❸or [Individual].

Common: Control each color of the Signal Tower andbuzzer with a common timer.
Individual: Control each color of the Signal Tower andbuzzer with individual timers.

❹ For receiving commands, from theNotification Method screen set [Send email]or [SNMP Notification].

When a command is received, notifications set to[Enabled] are executed.
Note: To execute notifications, notification settings must
be configured beforehand based on the notification
method.
"8.1. Notifying Equipment" ( ☞ page 134)
Using Send Email■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
For information, refer to "8.1.2. Setting Up EmailNotification Settings" ( ☞ page 138)

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2
Using SNMP Notification■ Using SNMP Notification
・ Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP
Notification Function must be [Enabled].
For information, refer to "8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP
(Trap Inform) Notification Settings" ( ☞ page 134)

174

Select [Enabled]1

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❺ In the [SSH Command Reception Settings]

8. Operation❺

screen, set the [Port number].

❻ In the [SSH Command Reception Settings]

Using Password Authentication

1

screen, for the [Authentication method]
select either [Password Authentication] or[Key Authentication].

2

❻

2

・ You can register up to 16 receive settings.
・ For the [Authentication Method], you cannot
individually specify [Password Authentication]and [Key Authentication]. Select either one as acommon setting.

3■ Using Password Authentication
1

Set the [Source IP address].
・ Enter the IP address in Ipv6 or Ipv4 format.

Set the [Login Name] and [Password].
2 ・ Cannot use "root", "lp", and "nobody" as thelogin name.
3 Configure for up to 16 instances, if necessary.

Using Key Authentication

1■ Using Key Authentication
1

2

Set the [Source IP address].
・ Enter the IP address in Ipv6 or Ipv4 format.

3

Set the [Login Name].
2 ・ Cannot use "root", "lp", and "nobody" as thelogin name.
Click the [Select a file] button and register the key
file.
・ You need to generate keys (private and publickeys) on your computer.
3・ Register on this product the public key thatwas created.
・ Execute the SSH Command with your private
key and login name.
4 Configure for up to 16 instances, if necessary.

❼ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

175

4

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual● Using HTTP Commands❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click❶[Enable Feature] to enter the [Main unit
function settings] screen.

❷ In the [Main unit function settings] screen,set [HTTP Command Control] to [Enabled].

❷❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
To change the communication protocol, follow the steps below.

❹ From the [Management] tab, click [Security
Settings] to enter the [Security Settings]
screen.

❹❺ Select the [Communication Protocols] as❺either [HTTP] or [HTTPS].

・ As required, register the certificate and private key.

❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

176

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Using PNS and PHN Commands❶ From the [Command Reception Settings]

tab, click [Socket communication settings]
to view the [Socket communication settings]
screen.

❷ In the [Socket communication settings]

screen, set [Socket communication function]
to [Enabled].

❶❷❸❸ For [Protocol], select [TCP] or [UDP].
❹ Enter the Port number.
❺ Set [Sent-from address settings].
To specify addresses for communication, set [Enabled]and enter the permitted addresses in [Source address
1 to 8].
・ When [Sent-from address settings] is enabled,commands from only IP addresses registered inthe [Source address] field are received.
・ Enter the IP address in Ipv6 or Ipv4 format.

❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

177

❺

❹

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Using SNMP Commands❶ From the [Command Reception Settings]

tab, click [SNMP Command-reception
Settings] to display the [SNMP Commandreception Settings] screen.

❶❷ In the [Receive SNMP] screen, set [SNMPCommand-reception Function] to [Enabled].

❸ In the [SNMP Version Settings], from❷❸

[Version selection] select [v1/v2c] or [v3].

❹ In accordance with the SNMP version, set

v1/v2cthe [Receive SNMP] settings.

■ v1/v2c
1 Set up SET Community Name.

1

2 Set up GET Community Name.

2

■ v3

v3

1 Set an user name.
Select the security level, [NoAuthNoPriv],[AuthNoPriv], or [AuthPriv].
・ NoAuthNoPriv: Communication authenticationand encryption are not performed.
2・ AuthNoPriv: Performs communication
authentication only.
・ AuthPriv: Performs communication
authentication and encryption.
When either [AuthNoPriv] or [AuthPriv] is selected
for the security level, set the Authentication
method and authentication password.
3・ For the Authentication method, select either[MD5] or [SHA]. Match settings on supported
equipment.
When you set the [Security Level] to [AuthPriv],
set the Encryption Method and Encrypted
Password.
4・ For the Encryption Method, select either[DES] or [AES]. Match settings on supported
equipment.

❺ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
178

2

1

3

4

3
4

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.3.1.2. Checking the Signal Tower State・ This section describes the procedure to use various commands to check the state of the Signal Tower.
・ Before executing this operation, enable the command function and set the command main unit operation
settings.
・"8.3.1.1. Setting Up the Command Main Unit Operation Settings" ( ☞ page 172)

● Using RSH/SSH Commands
For information on RSH/SSH Commands, refer to "5.3.10. RSH/SSH Command Function" ( ☞ page 35).
Example 1
When getting the operation state of a main unit whose product IP address is "192.168.10.10", account is "patlite",state is Red ﬂashing pattern 1, Green light on, channel 63 (buzzer pattern 3), digital inputs 1 and 4 are OFF, 2 and3 are ON, digital output 1 is ON, and digital output 2 is OFF
・When "status" only, returns the states of the Signal Tower.
rsh 192.168.10.10 -l patlite status]] ]]Response: 201003
Example 2
When getting the operation state of a main unit whose product IP address is "192.168.10.10", account is "patlite",state is Amber ﬂashing pattern 2, Blue light on, no channel playback, digital inputs 1 and 2 are OFF, 3 and 4 are
ON, digital output 1 and 2 are OFF
・By adding the "-s" option, as there is no channel playing, 0 is returned.
rsh 192.168.10.10 -l patlite status -s
]
] ]
]
]
Response: 0
・By adding the "di" and "do" options, returns the state of the digital input terminal block and the digital output
terminal block, respectively.
rsh

192.168.10.10]-l patlite status di do
] ]
]
] ]

Response: Dl:0011
Response: DO:00● Using PNS Commands
For information on PNS Commands, refer to "5.3.11. PNS Command Function (product compatibility
commands)" ( ☞ page 43).
ExampleWhen Signal Towerʼs Red light is on, Amber is ﬂashing pattern 1, Green is ﬂashing pattern 2, Blue
and White are oﬀ, and buzzer pattern is 4
Data Area: 6 bytes
PresetChannels

Signal Tower
1

2

3

4

5

6

01H

02H

03H

00H

00H

04H

179

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Using PHN Commands
For information on PHN Commands, refer to "5.3.12. PHN Command Function (product compatibility
commands)" ( ☞ page 52).
Example 1

When Signal Towerʼs Green light is on and Amber is ﬂashing pattern 1
R (52H) 8 bits

0

1

Example 20

10

Response Data (44H) 8 bits
0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

When Signal Towerʼs Green light is ﬂashing pattern 2 and buzzer pattern is neither 1 nor 2
R (52H) 8 bits

0

0

1

0

1

0

Response Data (9H) 8 bits
0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

CAUTION
Using PHN Commands, you cannot get the following operation states of the Signal Tower and channels on
this product. To get these states, use other methods such as PNS or RSH Commands.
・The Signal Towerʼs Red, Amber, and Green lights on with flashing pattern 2, flashing pattern 3, andflashing pattern 4・The Signal Towerʼs Blue and White lights on, with flashing pattern 1, flashing pattern 2, flashingpattern 3, and flashing pattern 4・Buzzer pattern 3, buzzer pattern 4, or buzzer pattern 5・Channels 1 to 60, and channels 63 to 71● Using HTTP Commands
・ For information on HTTP Commands, refer to "5.3.13. HTTP Command Reception Function" ( ☞ page 54).
If required, in the security settings set the communication protocol beforehand. For information, refer to "7.7.
Setting Up Security" ( ☞ page 118).
・ The parameter in order to get the Signal Tower state is implemented in "status".
ExampleTo turn on the Signal Towerʼs Red and Green lights, turn oﬀ Amber, Blue, and White, and play audio
playback 5

http://192.168.10.1/api/status?format=xml
・Execution Result<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><signaltower><color><color name="LED1" value="1"/><color name="LED2" value="0"/><color name="LED3" value="1"/><color name="LED4" value="0"/><color name="LED5" value="0"/><color name="MULTI_COL" value="2"/><color name="MULTI_PAT" value="1"/></color><sound><sound name="SOUND" value="5"/></sound><port><port name="DO-1" value="0"/><port name="DO-2" value="0"/><port name="DIN-1" value="0"/><port name="DIN-2" value="0"/><port name="DIN-3" value="0"/><port name="DIN-4" value="0"/></port></signaltower>

180Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Using SNMP Commands
・For information on SNMP Commands, refer to "5.3.14. SNMP Command Functions" ( ☞ page 60).
・For information on MIB, refer to "10. MIB List" ( ☞ page 367).
・You can get the state of the Signal Tower with the "SNMP GET Command".
Example 1

Using GET Command when the Signal Towerʼs Red light is on
ObjectObject ID

Get Value

controlLightCurrentState

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.4.1

2

Example 2

Using GET Command when the Signal Towerʼs Amber light is oﬀ
ObjectObject ID

Get Value

controlLightCurrentState

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.4.2

1181

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.3.1.3. Controlling Signal Tower States・ This section describes the procedure to use various commands to control the state of the Signal Tower.
・ Before executing this operation, enable the command function and set the command main unit operation
settings.
・"8.3.1.1. Setting Up the Command Main Unit Operation Settings" ( ☞ page 172)

● Using RSH/SSH Commands
・ For information on RSH/SSH Commands, refer to "5.3.10. RSH/SSH Command Function" ( ☞ page 35).
・ You can control the state of the Signal Tower with the "alert", "sound", and "color" commands.
・ The following describes control with "alert" and "color" commands.
Example 1

rsh

With product IP address of "192.168.10.10" and account "patlite", turn on Signal Towerʼs Red andGreen lights, turn oﬀ others, and play channel 62 (buzzer pattern 2)

192.168.10.10-lpatlitealert

101002

Response: 101002
Example 2

rsh

With product IP address of "192.168.10.10" and account "patlite", change Multi-color unit to White
with ﬂashing pattern 3 and emit buzzer pattern 4

192.168.10.10-lpatlite

color

White

4

-b

4

Response: White 4 -b 4

● Using PNS Commands
・For information on PNS Commands, refer to "5.3.11. PNS Command Function (product compatibility
commands)" ( ☞ page 43).
・You can control the state of the Signal Tower with "Signal Tower / Buzzer Control Command".
ExampleWhen turning Red Signal Tower light on, Amber ﬂashing pattern 1, Green ﬂashing pattern 2, turningBlue and White lights oﬀ, and emitting buzzer pattern 4・Setting
Product Category(XX)

ID (S)(unused)

58H

53H

00H

58H

Data Size
00H

06H

・Product Response
Normal response

Error response

ACK

NAK

06H

15H

182

Data Area: 6 bytes
01H

02H

03H

00H

00H

04H

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Using PHN Commands
For information on PHN Commands, refer to "5.3.12. PHN Command Function (product compatibility
commands)" ( ☞ page 52).
ExampleWhen turning on the Signal Towerʼs Red and Amber lights, and emitting channel 62 (buzzer pattern 2)・Setting
W (57H)
0

1

0

1

0

Response Data (13H)
1

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

・Product Response
Normal response (output response)

Error response (output failed)

A (41H)C (43H)K (4BH)N (4EH)A (41H)K (4BH)

1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byte1 byteCAUTION
Using PHN Commands, you cannot control the following for Signal Tower and channels.
To control these states, use other methods such as PNS or RSH Commands.
The Signal Towerʼs Red, Amber, and Green lights with flashing pattern 2, flashing pattern 3, or flashing pattern 4
The Signal Towerʼs Blue and White lights on, with flashing pattern 1, flashing pattern 2, flashing pattern 3, or
flashing pattern 4
Buzzer pattern 3, buzzer pattern 4, or buzzer pattern 5
Channels 1 to 60, or channels 63 to 71
Be cautious as channels 61 and 62 (Buzzer pattern 1, 2) are always played back in [Playback from latest inputmode].
For information, refer to " ● Audio Playback Mode"( ☞ page 25 ).

Point● For operations you want performed, enter "1" for the operation bit, for operations you do not want performed,
enter "0".

● Using HTTP Commands
・For information on HTTP Commands, refer to "5.3.13. HTTP Command Reception Function" ( ☞ page 54).
・You can control the state of the Signal Tower with the "alert", "led", and "color" parameters.
・The following procedure describes how to use the "alert" parameter.
ExampleTo turn on the Signal Towerʼs Red and Green lights, turn oﬀ Amber, Blue, and White, and emit buzzer
pattern 2

http://192.168.10.1/api/control?alert=101002

183

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Using SNMP Commands
・For information on SNMP Commands, refer to "5.3.14. SNMP Command Functions" ( ☞ page 60).
・For information on MIB, refer to "10. MIB List" ( ☞ page 367).
・You can control the state of the Signal Tower with the "SNMP SET Command".
Example 1

To turn on the Signal Towerʼs Red light after 10 seconds
ObjectObject ID

ValuecontrolLightControlState

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.2.1

2controlLightControlTimer

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.3.1

10

Example 2

To turn oﬀ the Signal Towerʼs Amber light
ObjectObject ID

ValuecontrolLightControlState

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.2.2

1controlLightControlTimer

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.3.2

0

Example 3

To execute the Clear operation function
ObjectObject ID

ValuecontrolLightSnmpClear

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.3.0

1184

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.3.1.4. Controlling Audio

8. Operation

NHV Series・ This section describes procedures on how to use commands to control audio on this product.
・ Before executing this operation, enable the command function and set the command main unit operation
settings.
・"8.3.1.1. Setting Up the Command Main Unit Operation Settings" ( ☞ page 172)

● Using RSH/SSH Commands
・For information on RSH/SSH Commands, refer to "5.3.10. RSH/SSH Command Function" ( ☞ page 35).
・Audio control commands are "alert", "sound", and "stop".
・The following describes control with "sound" and "stop" commands.
Example 1

rsh

With product IP address of "192.168.10.10" and account "patlite", One-shot playback of channel 24

192.168.10.10-lpatlitesound

24

CAUTION
Channels 61 to 64 and 71 (buzzer patterns 1 to 5) are always played using [Playback from latest input mode].
For information, refer to "5.3.2. Audio Playback Function" ( ☞ page 24).

Point
● The state of the Signal Tower can be set at the same time as audio playback.

Example 2

rsh

Product IP address of "192.168.10.10" and account "patlite", playing channel 55

192.168.10.10-lpatlitestop

Response: 55

185

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Using PNS Commands
・For information on PNS Commands, refer to "5.3.11. PNS Command Function (product compatibility
commands)" ( ☞ page 43).
・You can playback audio with the "MP3 Channel Control Command" and "Signal Tower/Channel Control
Command".
・The following procedure describes how to use the "Write MP3 Channel Control Command".
ExampleTo play channel 32, 15 times

・Setting
Product Category
(XX)
58H

58H

ID (V)(unused)

56H

00H

Data Size
00H

Data Area: 4 bytes

04H

01H

0EH

00H

32H

・Product Response
Normal response

Error response

ACK

NAK

06H

15H

CAUTION
Channels 61 to 64 and 71 (buzzer patterns 1 to 5) are always played using [Playback from latest input mode].
For information, refer to "5.3.2. Audio Playback Function" ( ☞ page 24).

● Using HTTP Commands
・For information on HTTP Commands, refer to "5.3.13. HTTP Command Reception Function" ( ☞ page 54).
・The parameter for playing audio is "sound".
・The following describes the control procedure for using "sound" and "stop" parameters.
Example 1

To play channel 1 endlessly

http://192.168.10.1/api/control?repeat=255&sound=1
Example 2

To stop playing the channel

Example 3

To play the next audio in memory in Memory playback mode

http://192.168.10.1/api/control?stop=1
Point● When HTTP Command Control Function is [Disabled], this function does not operate.
● Specify the "repeat" parameter at the same time as the "sound" parameter or "speech" parameter.
● The parameters that you can specify together are as follows.
"led" & "sound""sound" & "repeat""led" & "sound" & "repeat""led" & "speech""led" & "speech" & "repeat"

186

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Using SNMP Commands
・For information on SNMP Commands, refer to "5.3.14. SNMP Command Functions" ( ☞ page 60).
・For information on MIB, refer to "10. MIB List" ( ☞ page 367).
・You can control the state of the Signal Tower with the "SNMP Set Command".
ExampleSignal Towerʼs Green light ﬂashing pattern 2, Repeat playback of channel 65 one time
ObjectObject ID

ValuecontrolSoundLight

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.2.2.0

993991001065

8.3.1.5. Play Any Text

NHV Series・ This section describes procedures on how to use commands to playback text on this product.
・ Before playing text on this product, enable the command function and set the command main unit operation
settings.
・ For information on each, refer to "8.3.1.1. Setting Up the Command Main Unit Operation Settings" ( ☞ page
172).

● Using HTTP Commands
・ The parameter for playing any text is "speech".
・The following procedure describes how to play audio using the GET methodʼs "speech" parameter.
Example 1

To play "こんにちは " in Japanese

http://192.168.10.1/api/control?speech=こんにちは &lang=jp
Example 2

To play "Hello" in English

http://192.168.10.1/api/control?speech=Hello&lang=en
・ If you omit a parameter, play with the following settings. For information on each parameter refer to "5.3.13.
HTTP Command Reception Function" ( ☞ page 54).
Parameter Name

Default

lang

jp

voice

male

speed

0

tone

0

notify0

notifyTail0lineout

0187

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.3.1.6 Clearing the Status of This Product・ This section describes procedures on how to use commands to clear the status of this product.
・ Before clearing the status of this product, enable the command function and set the command main unit
operation settings.
・ For information on each, refer to "8.3.1.1. Setting Up the Command Main Unit Operation Settings" ( ☞ page
172).

● Using RSH/SSH Commands
・ For information on RSH/SSH Commands, refer to "5.3.10. RSH/SSH Command Function" ( ☞ page 35).
・ You can clear the status with the "clear" and "doclear" commands.
・ The following procedure describes how to use the "clear" command.
Example 1

rsh

192.168.10.10

Example 2

rsh

Product IP address of "192.168.10.10", send-from address is set to disable, with common account"patlite"patliteclear

When Account is Omitted

192.168.10.10

Example 3

-l

clear

Using ssh command to clear the product IP address "192.168.10.100", login name "patlite", andpassword "patlite", all except the Signal Towerssh 192.168.10.100 -l patlite clear -z (patlite's password:) patlite● Using PNS Commands
For information on PNS Commands, refer to "5.3.11. PNS Command Function (product compatibility
commands)" ( ☞ page 43).
ExampleReturn to normal operation status

・Setting
Product Category (XX)
58H

58H

ID (C)(unused)

43H

00H

Data Size
00H

00H・Return Value
Normal response

Error response

ACK

NAK

06H

15H

● Using HTTP Commands
・ For information on HTTP Commands, refer to "5.3.13. HTTP Command Reception Function" ( ☞ page 54).
・ Return to normal operation state with the "clear" parameter.
ExampleTo execute the Clear operation

http://192.168.10.1/api/control?clear=1

188

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Using SNMP Commands
・ For information on SNMP Commands, refer to "5.3.14. SNMP Command Functions" ( ☞ page 60).
・ For information on MIB, refer to "10. MIB List" ( ☞ page 367).
・ You can control the state of the Signal Tower with the "SNMP Set Command".
ExampleTo execute the Clear operation function
ObjectObject ID

ValuecontrolLightSnmpClear

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.3.0

1

8.3.1.7. Checking the Contact Input/Output States

NHV Series ( D model)

・ This section describes the procedure to use commands to check the state of Contact Input/Output.
・ Before executing this operation, enable the command function and set the command main unit operation
settings.
・ "8.3.1.1. Setting Up the Command Main Unit Operation Settings" ( ☞ page 172)

● Using RSH/SSH Commands
For information on RSH/SSH Commands, refer to "5.3.10. RSH/SSH Command Function" ( ☞ page 35).
Example 1Get the operation state of main unit whose product IP address is "192.168.10.10", account is "patlite",
contact input 1 and 4 are OFF, and 2 and 3 are ON

rsh 192.168.10.10 -l patlite status di
Response: DI:0110
Example 2

When product IP address is "192.168.10.10", account is "patlite", and contact output 1 is ON and 2 isOFF

rsh 192.168.10.10 -l patlite status do
Response: DO:10● Using SNMP Commands
・ For information on SNMP Commands, refer to "5.3.14. SNMP Command Functions" ( ☞ page 60).
・ For information on MIB, refer to "10. MIB List" ( ☞ page 367).
Example 1 Sending GET Command with digital input 3 ON
ObjectObject ID

Value

diEntry3

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.3.0

1

Example 2 Sending GET Command with digital output 1 OFF
ObjectObject ID

Value

doEntry1

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.5.1.0

0189

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.3.1.8. Controlling Contact Output

8. Operation

NHV Series ( D model)

・ This section describes procedures on how to use commands to control contact output on this product.
・ Before controlling contact output on this product, enable the command function and set the command main unit
operation settings.
・ For information on each, refer to "8.3.1.1. Setting Up the Command Main Unit Operation Settings" ( ☞ page
172).

● Using RSH/SSH Commands
For information on RSH/SSH Commands, refer to "5.3.10. RSH/SSH Command Function" ( ☞ page 35).
Examplersh

To turn digital output 1 OFF and digital output 2 ON when product IP address is "192.168.10.10" andaccount is "patlite"

192.168.10.10 -l

patlite

alert

do

01

Response: 01

CAUTION
When set to Busy output, during a Busy output operation you cannot use RSH/SSH Commands to operate digital
output.

● Using PNS Commands
For information on PNS Commands, refer to "5.3.11. PNS Command Function (product compatibility
commands)" ( ☞ page 43).
Example 1

To turn contact output 1 on and not to change contact output 2

・Command
Product Category (XX)
58H

58H

ID (D)(unused)

44H

00H

Data Size
00H

Data Area
02H

01H

09H

・Return Value
Normal response

Error response

ACK

NAK

06H

15H

Example 2

To turn contact output 1 oﬀ and contact output 2 on・Command
Product Category (XX)
58H

58H

ID (D)(unused)44H

00H・Return Value
Normal response

Error response

ACK

NAK

06H

15H

190

Data Size
00H

Data Area
02H

00H

01H

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

CAUTION
Digital output control commands enabled only when [Contact Output] is set to [Digital Output Mode].
For information, refer to "5.3.5. External Contact Output Function" ( ☞ page 29).

● Using HTTP Commands
・ For information on HTTP Commands, refer to "5.3.13. HTTP Command Reception Function" ( ☞ page 54).
・ The parameter for controlling contact output is "output".
ExampleTo turn contact output 1 on and contact output 2 oﬀ

http://192.168.10.1/api/control?output=10● Using SNMP Commands
・ For information on HTTP Commands, refer to "5.3.14. SNMP Command Functions" ( ☞ page 60).
・ For information on MIB, refer to "10. MIB List" ( ☞ page 367).
・ You can control the state of contact output with the "SNMP Set Command".
ExampleTo turn on contact output 2
ObjectObject ID

Value

doEntry2

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.5.2.0

1191

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.3.1.9. Performing the Self-test Operation
・ This section describes the procedure to use commands to execute the self-test operation.
・ Before executing this operation, enable the command function and set the command main unit operation
settings.
・"8.3.1.1. Setting Up the Command Main Unit Operation Settings" ( ☞ page 172)

● Using RSH/SSH Commands
・ For information on RSH/SSH Commands, refer to "5.3.10. RSH/SSH Command Function" ( ☞ page 35).
・ You can use the "test" or "dotest" command to execute the operation test.
Example 1

Operation check with product IP address of "192.168.10.10", when send-from address is set todisable with common account "patlite"rsh

192.168.10.10-lpatlitetestrsh

192.168.10.10-lpatlitedotestResponse: None
Example 2

When account is omitted

rsh

192.168.10.10

test

rsh

192.168.10.10

dotestResponse: None

CAUTION
When the test is run, the Signal Tower is in operation.
If you want to do this at run time, check that running the operation will not cause any issues.
The monitoring function continues running during the test. Be cautious when you use the test function to check theoperation of this product.
During or after the test is executed, PHN and PNS Commands return an error response.
Additionally, the RSH/SSH Command returns a Busy response.
After the test is complete, Signal Tower operations executed with the monitoring function run normally.
For information on test operation stop methods, refer to "5.3.22. Self-test Function"( ☞ page 79 ).
Executing a test operation clears the memory.

192

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.3.2. Checking and Controlling the Signal Tower on the Web Setup Screen
You can check and control the state of the Signal Tower on the Web Setup Screen.

8.3.2.1. Checking the Signal Tower States❶ From the [Main unit operation settings] tab,click [Signal Tower Operation] to enter the[Signal Tower Operation] screen.

❶
Normal LED Unit

❷ From [Current Status], check the states ofthe listed Signal Tower.

When the multi-color unit is selected, "OFF" isdisplayed when the control state is not supported.

❷
Multi-color unit❷
8.3.2.2. Controlling Signal Tower States❶ From the [Main unit operation settings] tab,click [Signal Tower Operation] to enter the[Signal Tower Operation] screen.

❶❷ Define the settings on the [Signal Tower

Normal LED Unit

Operation] screen.

■ Normal LED Unit

1

For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].
■ Multi-color unit

Multi-color unit

Select the color of the Signal Tower light, [Red],
1 [Amber], [Green], [Blue], [White], [Purple], or [Lightblue].
Select operation [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].

193

1 2

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.3.3. Operating the Product with the Clear Button
The Clear button clears the states on the product and notifies the user that it has been cleared.
[Clear Button Settings] and [Clear Operation Settings] must be set. Make sure you set these up before use.

8.3.3.1. Setting Up the Clear Operation Settings❶ From the [Main unit operation settings] tab,❶click [Clear Operation Settings] to enter the[Clear Operation Settings] screen.

❷ In the [Clear Button Settings] screen, set❷[Clear Button] to [Enabled].

❸ When the Clear button is pressed, set [Send❸Email], [SNMP Notification], [Send HTTP
Command], [Send MQTT], and [PLC Information Write Command Destination].

194

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❹ When the Clear button is pressed,

notifications set to [Enabled] are executed.

Note: To execute notifications, notification settingsmust be configured beforehand based on the
notification method.
"8.1. Notifying Equipment" ( ☞ page 134)
■ Using Send Email

Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content beforehand is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
2

Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2■ Using SNMP Notification

Using SNMP Notification

Before using SNMP notification, [SNMP Notification]must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)
■ Using Send HTTP Command

Using Send HTTP Command

Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)
Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

1

Using Send MQTT

■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)
■ Using Send PLC Information Write Command

Using Send PLC Information Write Command

When sending PLC information write command, it
is necessary to register the destination of the PLC
information write command in advance.
"5.3.25.2. PLC Information Write Command
Transmission Function" ( ☞ page 87)

1

Select the destination of the PLC information write
command.
1 ・ You can select multiple destinations.
・ The command will not be sent to an
unregistered destination even if you select it.

❺ For [Clear stages], select either [Clear All] or❺[Depress twice to Clear all].

■ Using Clear All
Simultaneously clear Signal Tower, digital output, andchannels.
■ Using Depress twice to Clear all
・ The first time the button is pressed, the buzzer,
channel, and contact output are cleared.
・ The second time the button is pressed, the Signal
Tower is cleared.

195

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❻ Select [Audio] from [Stop] or [Skip].

❻

Note: To use this function, the [Audio Playback Mode]
must be set to [Memory playback mode].
"7.12. Setting Up Audio Playback Mode" ( ☞page 124)■ When Stopped
・ Stops audio playback and stops Busy output.
・ Memory is erased.
■ Skip Track
・ Stops audio playback and starts playback of audio
registered in the memory.
・ If the memory is empty, audio playback will stop.

❼ Select the Signal Tower colors to clear.
・ The operation state of color units set to [Enabled]
becomes Clear or Normal. The states of color units
set to [Disabled] do not change.
・ In [Additional units], when [Multi-color unit] isselected, you can set just one target in the multicolor unit to clear.

❼❼❽ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

8.3.3.2. Using Clear Button to Execute Clear Operation❶ Press the Clear Button.
・ When the Clear Button is pressed, the clear
operation specified in the [Clear Operation
Settings] is executed.

Clear Button

196

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.4. Monitoring
8.4.1. Ping Monitoring・ Set up to use ping monitoring.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.3.1. Ping Monitoring Settings" ( ☞ page 286).

8.4.1.1. Setup Procedure
Individual Monitoring❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click[Individual setting] to enter the [PingMonitoring Settings] - [Individual setting]screen.

❶❷ Specify the [Ping Monitoring Settings] [Setting Number].

❷

For each setting number, you can set one monitoringtarget.
Select from 1 to 24 for the [Setting Number].

197

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❸ Set the Monitored Equipment.
1

8. Operation

1
2

In [Monitored Equipment], register the Monitored
Address of the equipment.

4

In [Unit name], register the name of the device tomonitor.
2 ・ The unit name is used to identify the device on
which an event occurred for use in emails.
・ This setting can be omitted.

5

3

6

The group configured in [Ping Monitoring Settings]- [Group Settings].
3
・ Use the Monitoring Group Setting for multiple
monitored equipment.
In [Number of transmissions] (0-30), set the
4 number of Ping responses that are identified as
errors.
5

In [PING Monitoring Cycle (1-600) sec.], set thefrequency of Ping transmissions.

6

In [Number of transmissions] (1-3), set the
number of Ping to send for each frequency.

❹ Set operation settings for when an error
occurs.

■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.

Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This Product

In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].

198

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual■ Controlling Audio

Controlling Audio

NHB

● NHB

Select the Buzzer, [Stop], [Buzzer pattern 1],
1 [Buzzer pattern 2], [Buzzer pattern 3], [Buzzer
pattern 4], [Buzzer pattern 5], or [No change].

1

NHV
To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered. "7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

8. Operation

● NHV

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.
Using Send Email■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2
Using SNMP Notification■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)

Using Send HTTP Command■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
Using Send MQTT

■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)

Using Contact Output■ Using Contact Output
Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page
143)

199

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❺ Sets operation setting for recovery from anerror.

Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This Product■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].
■ Controlling Audio

Controlling Audio

NHB

● NHB

Select the buzzer, [Stop], [Buzzer pattern 1],
1 [Buzzer pattern 2], [Buzzer pattern 3], [Buzzer
pattern 4], [Buzzer pattern 5], or [No change].

1

NHV
To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered. "7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

● NHV

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.
Using Send Email■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2
Using SNMP Notification■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)200

1

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual■ Using Send HTTP Command

8. Operation

Using Send HTTP Command

Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
Using Send MQTT

■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)
■ Using Contact Output

Using Contact Output

Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page143)

❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
・ For each monitoring target setting, click the [Set]button to apply the defined settings to the product.
Settings for multiple monitoring targets cannot be
updated at one time.

❼ Ping monitoring is started.
・ Restart is unnecessary.

201

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Using the Group Monitoring Function
Use the Monitoring Group Setting for multiple monitored equipment. If more than one monitored equipment in agroup enters an error state, the product continues with error state operations until all the equipment in the groupare restored.

❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click[Group Settings] to display the [PingMonitoring Settings] - [Group Settings]
screen.

❶❷ Select the [Group] to configure.
❷・ You can set up three groups (A, B, and C).

❸ Select the [Equipment] for the group.
・ Devices specified in a group do not perform theoperation defined in the individual setting, but
perform the operation defined in the group setting.
・ A device assigned to a group cannot also be
assigned to another group.

❸202

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❹ Set operation settings for when an error
occurs.

■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductControlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].
■ Controlling Audio

Controlling Audio

NHB

● NHB

Select the buzzer, [Stop], [Buzzer pattern 1],
1 [Buzzer pattern 2], [Buzzer pattern 3], [Buzzer
pattern 4], [Buzzer pattern 5], or [No change].

1

NHV
To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

● NHV

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.
Using Send Email■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2
Using SNMP Notification■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)2031

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Using Send HTTP Command■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)

Using Send MQTT

■ Using Contact Output

Using Contact Output

Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page143)

❺ Set operation setting for recovery from anerror.

■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductControlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].
■ Controlling Audio

Controlling Audio

NHB

● NHB

Select the buzzer, [Stop], [Buzzer pattern 1],
1 [Buzzer pattern 2], [Buzzer pattern 3], [Buzzer
pattern 4], [Buzzer pattern 5], or [No change].

1

NHV
To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

● NHV

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.

204

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

8. Operation

Using Send Email1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2
Using SNMP Notification■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)
■ Using Send HTTP Command

Using Send HTTP Command

Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
Using Send MQTT

■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)
■ Using Contact Output

Using Contact Output

Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page143)

❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
・ For each monitoring target setting, click the [Set]button to apply the defined settings to the product.
Settings for multiple monitoring targets cannot be
updated at one time.

❼ Ping monitoring is started.
・ Restart is unnecessary.

205

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.4.2. SNMP TRAP Monitoring・ Set up TRAP monitoring settings or TRAP receive settings.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.3.2. TRAP Reception Settings" ( ☞ page 292).

8.4.2.1. Setup Procedure● Enable SNMP Function❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click[Basic Settings] to enter the [TRAP
Reception Settings] - [Basic Settings]
screen.

❶❷ Set the [TRAP Reception Function] to[Enabled].

❷❸ From [Version selection], select [v1/v2c] or
[v3].

❸

206

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❹ Set up TRAP receive.

8. Operation

v1/v2c■ v1/v2c
1 Set up the TRAP Reception Community.

1

■ v3
v3

1 Set an user name.
Select the security level, [noAuthNoPriv],[AuthNoPriv], or [AuthPriv].
・ noAuthNoPriv: Communication authenticationand encryption are not performed.
2・ AuthNoPriv: Performs communication
authentication only.
・ AuthPriv: Performs communication
authentication and encryption.
When either [AuthNoPriv] or [AuthPriv] is selected
for the security level, set the Authentication
method and authentication password.
3・ For the Authentication method, select either[MD5] or [SHA]. Select to match settings on
supported equipment.
When you set the [Security Level] to [AuthPriv],
set the Encryption Method and Encrypted
Password.
4・ For the Encryption Method, select either[DES] or [AES]. Select to match settings on
supported equipment.

❺ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

207

2

3

1

4

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual● Set up SNMP TRAP Monitoring❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click[Reception Settings] to enter the [TRAP
Reception Settings] screen.

❶❷ Specify the [Group Settings] for TRAP
Reception Settings.

❷

・ Select from 1 to 16 for the [Group Settings].

❸ In [Group Name], set the name for the❸selected number.

208

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❹ Configure the TRAP Receive group settings.
1

Set the [SNMP Notification Source Address] and[TRAP Number].

Set [variable-bindings (1-2)].
・ Of two registration items in [variable-bindings],
it can be registered only with the first of these.
・ In [variable-bindings], you can use an asterisk( * ) at the end.
When an asterisk ( * ) is used, any integer
value at the end is considered to match thecondition.
2・ With the Receive Function, the number ofvariable-bindings that can be identified is up to64 per TRAP.
When a TRAP is received with more than 65
variable-bindings, among variable-bindings
OID, the 65th and subsequent OID will notwork even if they are set up.
・ When a SNMP notification source address item
is entered, you can omit the [TRAP Number] and[variable-bindings] fields. If the [TRAP Number]and [variable-bindings] fields are omitted, all
TRAP received from the address in the [SNMP
Notification Source Address] field will be received.
・ If the [SNMP Notification Source Address] isomitted, only the TRAP number is used.
・ If both [SNMP Notification Source Address] and[TRAP Number] are omitted, after receipt nooperation is performed.
・ When duplicate TRAP numbers are registered ina group, group operations use the TRAP with thesmallest number. Operation for the subsequentgroup number is not performed.
・ If the [GenericTrap type] of the TRAP received is
6 (enterprisespecific), at the end of the received
TRAP append the specific-trap value.

209

1
2

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❺ Sets the operation when TRAP is received.
■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductControlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].
■ Controlling Audio

Controlling Audio

NHB

● NHB

Select the buzzer, [Stop], [Buzzer pattern 1],
1 [Buzzer pattern 2], [Buzzer pattern 3], [Buzzer
pattern 4], [Buzzer pattern 5], or [No change].
NHV
To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

1
● NHV

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.

■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

Using Send Email1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2
Using SNMP Notification■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)210

1

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Using Send HTTP Command■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)

Using Send MQTT

■ Using Contact Output

Using Contact Output

Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page143)

❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
・ For each TRAP Receive group setting, click the[Set] button to apply the defined settings to the
product. Settings for multiple TRAP Receive groups
cannot be updated at one time.

❼ SNMP TRAP monitoring is started.
・ Restart is unnecessary.

211

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.4.3. SNMP Device Monitoring・ Set up to use SNMP Device Monitoring.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.3.3. SNMP Device Monitoring Settings" ( ☞ page 297).

8.4.3.1. Setup Procedure● Enable SNMP Device Monitoring Function❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click[Basic Settings] to enter the [SNMP Device
Monitoring Settings] - [Basic Settings]
screen.

❶❷ In [SNMP Device Monitoring], set [SNMP

Device Monitoring Function] to [Enabled].

❷❸ When using SNMP v1 or v2c, in the [SNMP
v1/v2c Settings] set [GET Community
Name].

❸

212

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❹ When using SNMP v3, in [SNMPv3❹

Certification] select the [Connection
Destination Number].

・ You can register up to 20 connection destination
numbers.

❺ Set the connection for the selected[Connection Destination Number].

1 Set an user name.
Select the security level, [noAuthNoPriv],[AuthNoPriv], or [AuthPriv].
・ noAuthNoPriv: Communication authenticationand encryption are not performed.
2・ AuthNoPriv: Performs communication
authentication only.
・ AuthPriv: Performs communication
authentication and encryption.

3

When either [AuthNoPriv] or [AuthPriv] is selected
for the security level, set the Authentication
method and authentication password.
・ For the Authentication method, select either[MD5] or [SHA]. Match settings on supported
equipment.
When you set the [Security Level] to [AuthPriv],
set the Encryption Method and Encrypted
Password.
・ For the Encryption Method, select either[DES] or [AES]. Match settings on supported
equipment.

❻ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
・ For each connection destination, click the [Set]button to apply the defined settings to the product.
Settings for multiple connection destinations cannot
be updated at one time.

213❺

8. Operation

1
2
3

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation● Set up SNMP Device Monitoring
Match Detection❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click[Match Detection Settings] to enter the[SNMP Device Monitoring Settings] - [Match
Detection Settings] screen.

❶❷ Select a [Condition Settings Number].

❷・ You can register up to 20 condition settings.

❸ Set the Match Detection for the selected

1[Condition Settings Number].

2

Register the Equipment Name.
・ The unit name is used to identify the device on
1which an event occurred for use in email.
・ This setting can be omitted.

3

2 Set the Monitored Address.
Specify the SNMP Version.
・ When v3 is selected, SNMPv3 Certification is3
displayed.
Specify the connection destination number that was
set in the [Basic Settings].
Set the Judgment condition.
・ Select the OID detection method from [Specified
OID only] and [All Specified OID Below].
・ You can omit the value.
4 ・ Select from [Equal to], [More than], and [Lessthan].
・ If both Judgment conditions are set, theoperation is performed when both conditions aremet.
5 Set the Monitoring Period from 0 to 60 seconds.

214

4
5

3

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❹ Sets the [Operation during communication

8. Operation

1

timeout].

2

To put this product in monitoring status when acommunication timeout with the monitoring target
occurs, set up the following.
1 Set [Release Conditions] to [Enabled].
2 Set the [Number of retries] from 0 to 10.

❺ Set the operation when the condition
matches.

■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductControlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].
Controlling Audio■ Controlling Audio

● NHB

NHB
Select the buzzer, [Stop], [Buzzer pattern 1],
1 [Buzzer pattern 2], [Buzzer pattern 3], [Buzzer
pattern 4], [Buzzer pattern 5], or [No change].

1

NHV
To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

● NHV

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.

■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

Using Send Email1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2

215

1

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Using SNMP Notification■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP Notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)

Using Send HTTP Command■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
Using Send MQTT

■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)

Using Contact Output■ Using Contact Output
Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page143)

❻ Set the release condition operation.
■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductControlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].

216

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Controlling Audio■ Controlling Audio

● NHB

NHB
Select the buzzer, [Stop], [Buzzer pattern 1],
1 [Buzzer pattern 2], [Buzzer pattern 3], [Buzzer
pattern 4], [Buzzer pattern 5], or [No change].

1
● NHV

NHV
To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
2
to play.
Using Send Email■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2
Using SNMP Notification■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)

Using Send HTTP Command■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
Using Send MQTT

■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)

Using Contact Output■ Using Contact Output
Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page
143)

When Re-evaluation of Match is Selected■ When Re-evaluation of Match is Selected
This setting can be omitted. Set this product setting so
you can re-evaluate specific equipment.

217

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❼ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
・ For each condition setting, click the [Set] button to
apply the defined settings to the product. Settings
for multiple conditions cannot be updated at onetime.

❽ SNMP Device Monitoring is started.
・ Restart is unnecessary.

218

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Detect Change❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click[Change detection settings] to enter the[SNMP Device Monitoring Settings] [Change detection settings] screen.

❶❷ Select a [Condition Settings Number].
❷・ Select from [Change detection 1] to [Change
detection 5].

❸ Set the Change detection.

1

Register the Equipment Name.
・ The equipment name is used to identify the device1
on which an event occurred for use in emails.
・ This setting can be omitted.
2 Set the Monitored Address.
Specify the SNMP Version.
・ When v3 is selected, SNMPv3 Certification is3
displayed.
Specify the connection destination number thatwas previously set.

2
3
4
5

4 Set the Monitored OID.
5 Set the Monitoring Period from 0 to 60 seconds.

219

3

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❹ Set the operation for when a change is
detected.

■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductControlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].
■ Controlling Audio

Controlling Audio

NHB

● NHB

Select the buzzer, [Stop], [Buzzer pattern 1],
1 [Buzzer pattern 2], [Buzzer pattern 3], [Buzzer
pattern 4], [Buzzer pattern 5], or [No change].

1

NHV
To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.

● NHV

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
2
to play.
Using Send Email■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2
Using SNMP Notification■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)2201

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Using Send HTTP Command■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings" ( ☞page 141)

1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
Using Send MQTT

■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)

Using Contact Output■ Using Contact Output
Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page143)

❺ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
・ For each condition setting, click the [Set] button to
apply the defined settings to the product. Settings
for multiple conditions cannot be updated at onetime.

❻ SNMP Device Monitoring is started.
・ Restart is unnecessary.

221Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.4.4. Contact Input Status Monitoring

NHV Series ( D model)

・ This setting is used when monitoring the status of contact input.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.3.4. Contact Input Setting" ( ☞ page 305).

8.4.4.1. Setting Up Contact Input Function❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click[Status Change Detection Settings] to enter
the [Contact input setting] - [Status Change
Detection Settings] screen.

❶❷ From [Port Selection], select the Contact
input to set up.

❷❸ Set [Contact Input] to [Enabled].

❸❹❹ Select the [Boolean Value] as either [Contact❺

A] or [Contact B].

❺ Select the Signal Definition, [ON Status

Change], [OFF Status Change], and [Statuschange].

222

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❻ Set operation settings for ON Status
Change.

Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This Product■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].
■ Controlling Audio

Controlling Audio

To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.
Using Send Email■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)

223

1

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Using SNMP Notification■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings" ( ☞page 141)

Using Send HTTP Command

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
■ Using Send MQTT

1

Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)
■ Using Contact Output
Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page
143)

Using Send MQTT

■ Configuring Clear Conditions

Using Contact Output

・ Before clearing conditions, match detection settingsmust be set up.
"8.4.5. Contact Input Condition Monitoring" ( ☞page 227)
・ By setting this item, when the contact changes
state OFF → ON, as per the condition specified
in the [Match Detection Settings], the input time isreset.
"5.3.19. Contact Input Match Detection" ( ☞ page68)

Configuring Clear Conditions❼ Set operation settings for OFF Status
Change.

Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This Product■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].

224

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual■ Controlling Audio

Controlling Audio

To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

8. Operation

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.

■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

Using Send Email1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2■ Using SNMP Notification

Using SNMP Notification

Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)
■ Using Send HTTP Command

Using Send HTTP Command

Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)
Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

1■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)

Using Send MQTT

■ Using Contact Output

Using Contact Output

Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page143)
■ Configuring Clear Conditions

Configuring Clear Conditions

・ Before clearing conditions, match detection settingsmust be set up.
"8.4.5. Contact Input Condition Monitoring" ( ☞page 227)
・ By setting this item, when the contact changes
state ON → OFF, as per the condition specified inthe [Match Detection Settings], the input time isreset.
"5.3.19. Contact Input Match Detection" ( ☞ page
68)

225

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❽ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
・ For each port setting, click the [Set] button to apply
the defined settings to the product. Settings for
multiple ports cannot be updated at one time.

❾ Contact input status monitoring is started.
・ Restart is unnecessary.

226

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.4.5. Contact Input Condition Monitoring

NHV Series ( D model)

・ This setting is used when monitoring the condition of contact inputs.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.3.4.2. Match Detection Settings" ( ☞ page 308).

8.4.5.1. Setting Up Contact Input Condition❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click[Match Detection Settings] to enter the[Contact input setting] - [Match Detection
Settings] screen.

❶❷ Set the Condition Settings Number in the[Contact input setting] - [Match Detection
Settings] screen.

❷

・ You can register up to 4 condition settings.

❸ Select a port number for the Conditions.

❸❹・ You can register up to 4 port numbers.

❹ Select the length of input time for theConditions.

・ If 0 is set, detection is disabled.

❺ Select [Enabled] or [Disabled] for theoperation when Clear button pressed.

❺

・ By setting this item, when the Clear button ispressed, the conditionʼs input time is reset.
"5.3.19. Contact Input Match Detection" ( ☞ page
68)

227

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❻ Select [Enabled] or [Disabled] for the [Action
when there is a match].

❻

・ Enabled: Even after the first detect condition
match, operation is executed every time a detect
condition match occurs.
・ Disabled: Operation is executed only the first timea detect condition match occurs, and not after evenif other detect condition matches occur.
・ When set to [None], perform the following
operations to detect match again.
Run the Clear operation .
1 ・ "5.3.21. Clear Operation Function" ( ☞page 77)
Enable clear condition, and press the Clear
button.
2・ "8.3.3. Operating the Product with theClear Button" ( ☞ page 194)
In [Contact input setting] - [Status Change
Detection Settings], from [Clear Conditions],
select the condition that you want to detect
3 match again, and then change the state ofcontact input.
・ "8.4.5. Contact Input Condition Monitoring"( ☞ page 227)

❼ Set the operation when the condition
matches.

Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This Product■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].

228

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction ManualControlling Audio■ Controlling Audio
To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

8. Operation

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.
Using Send Email■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2■ Using SNMP Notification

Using SNMP Notification

Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)
■ Using Send HTTP Command

Using Send HTTP Command

Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
■ Using Send MQTT

Using Send MQTT

Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)
■ Using Contact Output

Using Contact Output

Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page
143)

229

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❽ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
・ For each condition setting, click the [Set] button to
apply the defined settings to the product. Multiple
condition settings cannot be updated at one time.

❾ Contact input condition monitoring is started.
・ Restart is unnecessary.

230

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.4.6. Detecting EmailNHV Series

・ Set up to use the detect email function.
・ For information on each item, refer to "9.3.5. Mail Detection Setting" ( ☞ page 311).

8.4.6.1. Setup Procedure● Set the Mail Server to Monitor❶ From the [Mail detection setting] tab, click[Mail server settings] to enter the [Mailserver settings] screen.

❶❷ In the [Mail server settings], set the❷[Incoming mail server], [Protocol], [Mailserver port number], [Authentication
method], [Encryption Method], [Username],[Password], [Mail check interval],[Authentication method], and [Mail checkinterval (10-3600) sec.].

・ For the Authentication method, you can select[OAuth2] or [Password Authentication] when oneof the following addresses is specified as the[Incoming mail server]. When any other serveris specified, authentication is fixed as [Password
Authentication].
・ Gmail server: imap.gmail.com
pop.gmail.com
・ Outlook server: outlook.office365.com

When Connecting to Gmail■ Connecting to Gmail*¹ *²
Register the credential file in the [Credential] section.

When Connecting to Outlook■ Connecting to Outlook*¹ *²
Register the [Client ID], [Authorization Endpoint URL]
and [Token Endpoint URL].
*1 Set the [State] to [Enabled].
*2 Click the [Acquisition of authorization code] button,and from the authentication screen that pops up,
get the authentication code. In the [Authentication
code entry] field, enter the authentication code thatyou retrieved.

231

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation[POP] is Selected in [Protocol]
・ When [POP] is selected in [Protocol], [Delete the mail in the server after receiving] is set.
・By enabling this function, email detected as having been received by this product are deleted from the mailserver. Do not enable this function if you handle important emails.

❸ Press the [Check connection] button toconfirm you can connect to the mail serverwith the defined settings.

❸

・ When [OAUTH2] is specified in [Authentication
method], get the authentication code, and enter
the authentication code that you retrieved in the[Authentication code entry] field again.

❹ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

232Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual● Set Filter Rules❶ From the [Mail detection setting] tab, click[Filter rule settings] to enter the [Filter rulesettings] screen.

❶❷ Select a condition.

❷
❸
❹
❺

・ You can register to detect from 1 to 20 conditions.
・ For a single condition, you can register up to 5
rules.
・ By registering multiple rules, you can fine tune thedetection range.

❸ Select the range of conditions, [Meets all of
the following], [Meets one of the following],and [None].

❹ Select what to detect, from [Sender],[Subject], and [Body text].

❺ Enter a string in the [Keyword] field, andselect the Judgment condition from [Matcheswith], [Beginning with], [Include], and [Befree of].

❻ To set more conditions, register a second or
subsequent rules.

233

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual❼ Select the operation contents from [Main8. Operation❼

unit operation], [Read aloud the contents ofthe email], or [Control by the contents of theemail]

If you select [Main unit operation]
Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This Product■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].
■ Controlling Audio

Controlling Audio

To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.

■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

Using Send Email1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)

Using SNMP Notification■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

Using Send HTTP Command

1

234

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)

Using Send MQTT

■ Using Contact Output

Using Contact Output

Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page
143)

235

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

If you select [Read aloud the contents of the email]■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.

Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This Product

In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].
■ Settings of read aloud the contents of the email"5.3.20.1. Reading Aloud Email Contents" ( ☞ page
70)

Settings of read aloud the contents of the email

Select the audio from [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, also
specify the number of times for it to play.
Set the [Language], [Speed], [Voice], and [Tone]
values.
・ With the [Language] setting, read aloud text inJapanese or English or Chinese (Mandarin).
・ With the [Voice] setting, read aloud text in a2
male or female voice. Also, by decreasing the[Tone] value, read aloud text in a calmer voice.
・ With the [Speed] setting, read aloud text fasterby increasing the value. Also, by decreasing
the value, slow down the reading of text.

6
7
8

Select the readout range selection from [Sender/
Subject/Body text].

Select [Enable/Disable] for omitting reading aloudin [Read aloud range].
・ When set to disabled, it will be read aloud asfollows.
・ To read aloud the "Sender": read aloud"Email received from" before the "Sender" ofthe email.
6・ To read aloud the "Subject": Before reading
aloud the content of "Subject" of the email,read aloud "Subject".
・ To read aloud the "Body Text": Before
reading aloud the content of "Body Text" ofthe email, read aloud "Body Text".
Select [Enable/Disable] for the automatic
extraction function of reading parts.

8

The content to be read out will be displayed.
Please check if the contents are correct.
(The displayed language differs depending on thesettings in "Language")3
5

4 Select [Enable/Disable] for the line out.

7

2
4

Set the values for [Notification Sound (Before)]and [Notification Sound (After)].
3
・ If you do not want to set a notification sound,
set it to [Unselected].

5

1

236

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

8. Operation

Using Send Email1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)
■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

Using SNMP Notification

Using Send HTTP Command1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)

Using Send MQTT

■ Using Contact Output

Using Contact Output

Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page143)

If you select [Control by the contents of the email]■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

Using Send Email1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)
■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

Using SNMP Notification

Using Send HTTP Command1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

237

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)

Using Send MQTT

■ Using Contact Output

Using Contact Output

Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page143)

❽ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
・ For each condition, click the [Set] button to apply
the defined settings to the product. Multiple
conditions cannot be updated at one time.

238

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.4.7. Monitor PLC Equipment･ Configure settings for monitoring PLC equipment.
･ For detailed explanations of each setting item, refer to "9.3.6. PLC Communication Function Settings" ( ☞ page317).
･ The following PLCs have been tested for operation.
Manufacturer

ProtocolMitsubishi Electric

SLMP(MC)

Omron

FINS

Series Name/CPU Unit Name
MELSECiQ-R series, iQ-F series, Q series, L series
CP2E, CJ2, NX1*Not all device types and ranges from each company are supported.
*For details, please refer to the instruction manual of each PLC device.
*When using a sequencer manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric, set the sequencer as follows before using it.
･ Communication data code settings: Set to "Binary code communication"･ Open method: Set to "MC protocol"･ Set to "Allow write during RUN"

8.4.7.1. Perform Basic Settings❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click[Basic Settings] of [PLC Linkage Function
Settings] to enter the [PLC Linkage Function
Basic Settings] screen.

❷ Set Enable/Disable for various functions.

❷❸❹■ When Using PLC Information Read Command Function
When using PLC information read command function,
it is necessary to set the PLC information readcommand function in advance.
"8.4.7.2. Setting PLC Information Read Command
Function" ( ☞ page 241)
■ When Using PLC Information Write Command Function
When using PLC information write command function,
it is necessary to set the PLC information write
command function in advance.
"8.4.7.3. Setting PLC Information Write Command
Function" ( ☞ page 243)
■ When Using PLC Information Write Command
Transmission Function
When using PLC Information Write Command
Transmission Function, it is necessary to set the PLC
Information Write Command Transmission Function inadvance.
"8.4.7.4. Setting Count Value Write Function to the
PLC" ( ☞ page 244)

❸ Select the protocol from [SLMP(MC) / FINS].
･ You cannot select both.

❹ Select the transmission interval from [10 ms/ 50 ms / 100 ms].

239

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❺ Set the operation when an error data is
acquired by the PLC information readcommand.

Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This Product■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].
■ Controlling Audio

Controlling Audio

To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.

■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

Using Send Email1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)

Using SNMP Notification■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

Using Send HTTP Command

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

1
Using Send MQTT240

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Using Send MQTT

■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)
■ Using Contact Output

Using Contact Output

Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page143)

8.4.7.2. Setting PLC Information Read Command Function❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click [PLCInformation Read Command Settings] of [PLC
Linkage Function Settings] to enter the [PLCInformation Read Command Settings] screen.

❷ In the [PLC Information Read Command❷

Settings] screen, select the setting numberof the PLC Information Read Command
Settings.

･ You can register up to 16 settings.

❸ Set the monitored devices.
1 Set the connection destination address.

1

2 Set the device name.

45

4 Set the source port.

6

5 Select the protocol from [TCP / UDP].
6 Set the timeout from 1 to 10 seconds.
7

3

2

3 Set the connection destination port.

For SLMP (MC) protocol

Set each item.
<For SLMP (MC) protocol>
Serial number: Add / Do NOT add Network number
Station number
Request unit I/O number: Local station / Management CPU / CPU1 to
CPU4 device
Reading device / Number of reading points
Operation for when the condition matches<For FINS protocol>
DNA
DA1
DA2
SNA
SA1
SA2
SID
DeviceStart address / Number of elements
Operation for when the condition matches

7

For FINS protocol

7241Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❹ Set the operation when the condition

matches by the PLC information readcommand.
Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This Product■ Controlling Signal Tower Lights on This ProductDepending on the selections in [Basic Settings] [Additional units], setup items may differ.
In [Additional units], [Not Used] is selected
For each Signal Tower light ([Red], [Amber],[Green], [Blue], and [White]), select [OFF],1 [Continuous ON], [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashingpattern 2], [Flashing pattern 3], [Flashing pattern4], or [No change].

1

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is selected
1

Select the color, [Red], [Amber], [Green], [Blue],[White], [Purple], [Light blue], or [No change].

Select the pattern, [OFF], [Continuous ON],
2 [Flashing pattern 1], [Flashing pattern 2], [Flashingpattern 3], [Flashing pattern 4], or [No change].
■ Controlling Audio

Controlling Audio

To play audio other than the presets, the audio
needs to be registered."7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)
Select the audio, [Stop], [One-shot playback],[Repeat playback], or [No change].
1・ When [Repeat playback] is selected, specify
the number of times for it to play.
2

1

2

From [Audio Channel], specify the audio channel
to play.

■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

Using Send Email1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2■ Using SNMP Notification
Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)

Using SNMP Notification■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

Using Send HTTP Command

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

1242

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

Using Send MQTT

■ Using Send MQTT
Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)
■ Using Contact Output

Using Contact Output

Before using contact output, the Contact Output
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact Output Settings" ( ☞ page143)

8.4.7.3. Setting PLC Information Write Command Function❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click [PLCInformation Write Command Settings] of [PLC
Linkage Function Settings] to enter the [PLCInformation Write Command Settings] screen.

❷ In the [PLC Information Write Command❷

Settings] screen, select the setting numberof the PLC Information Write Command
Settings.

･ You can register up to four settings.

❸ Set the monitored devices.
1 Set the connection destination address.

1

2 Set the device name32

3 Set the connection destination port.

44 Select the protocol from [TCP / UDP].
5

Set each item.
<For SLMP (MC) protocol>
Serial number: Add / Do NOT add Network number
Station number
Request unit I/O number
DeviceWriting device / Number of writing points
Write data
<For FINS protocol>
DNA
DA1
DA2
SNA
SA1
SA2
SID
DeviceStart address / Number of elements
Write data

For SLMP (MC) protocol

5

For FINS protocol

5243Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.4.7.4. Setting Count Value Write Function to the PLC❶ From the [Monitoring Settings] tab, click [PLCCount Value Write Settings] of [PLC Linkage
Function Settings] to enter the [PLC Count
Value Write Settings] screen.

❷ In the [PLC Count Value Write Settings]❷

screen, select the setting number of the PLC
Count Value Write Settings.

･ You can register up to four settings.

❸ Set the monitored devices.
1 Set the connection destination address.

1

2 Set the device name.
3 Set the connection destination port.
4 Select the protocol from [TCP / UDP].

4
5

5 Set the write cycle in the range of "1 to 10 seconds."
6

3

2

Set each item.
<For SLMP (MC) protocol>
Serial number: Add / Do NOT add Network number
Station number
Request unit I/O number
DeviceWriting device / Number of writing points<For FINS protocol>
DNA
DA1
DA2
SNA
SA1
SA2
SID
DeviceStart address / Number of elements

For SLMP (MC) protocol

6

For FINS protocol

6244Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5. Doing Maintenance8.5.1. Checking the Product Settings
・ You can check the product settings and product status from the home screen and status LED on the main unit.
・ On the home screen, you can check the main unit information and list of current settings.
・ This section describes how to display the home screen.

8.5.1.1. Screen Display Procedure● Go to the Setup Screen
Before Logging in to the Web Setup Screen❶ From a Web browser, enter the IP address❶of this product.

・ If this product is being used for the first time, or if
the product is initialized, refer to "7. Before Use" ( ☞page 105).

❷ On the login screen, enter the user nameand password, and click the [Login] button.

❷❸ The Home screen appears.

Home Screen

245Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

When Logged in to the Web Setup Screen❶ In the upper right corner of the current Web
Setup Screen, press the❶

button .

❷ The Home screen appears.

Home Screen● How to Read the Home Screen

①

②

③

④

⑤

⑥

⑦
No.

Name

Description①

Equipment Name

Indicate the equipment name registered in Basic Settings - Main unit settings.

②

MAC Address

Check the MAC Address on the product.

③

Firmware Version

Check the firmware version that the product is currently using.

④

ButtonThere are the home button and the logout button in the home screen.

⑤

Main Unit Information

Check the product model name, operating power supply, and clock.

⑥

Product Function List

Check the setup status of each function.

⑦

Internet connection check

You can check whether the product is connected to the Internet.
For information, refer to "8.5.1.3. How to Check the Internet Connection" ( ☞page 248).

246

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.1.2. Using Status LED to Check the Status of this ProductYou can check the product status by checking the status LED on the main unit.

Check LED status

LED Status

Description

Blue light

Product is operating.

Green light

Product is starting up.

Flashing Red

Product is in an error state.

Magenta light

Product initialization is complete.

Amber light

Product changed to DHCP mode.

Flashing Cyan / Cyan lightFlashing Blue / Blue lightFlashing: Configuration, sound package write, or firmware upload is in progress.
Light on: Above running completed.
Flashing: Loading event log, config, audio package is in progress.
Light on: Above running completed.

Point● For information on DIP Switches operation processes, refer to the following.

・ "7.1. Enabling DHCP Function" ( ☞ page 106)・ "8.5.2.2. Initialization with DIP Switches" ( ☞ page 250)
・"8.5.7.2. Reading Configuration and Sound Packages Using USB Memory" ( ☞ page 259)
・"8.5.7.4. Writing Configuration and Sound Packages Using USB Memory" ( ☞ page 261)
・"8.5.8.2. Updating Firmware Using USB Memory" ( ☞ page 263)
・"8.5.9.3. Downloading Log Using USB Memory" ( ☞ page 265)

247

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.5.1.3. How to Check the Internet Connection
You can check whether the product is connected to the Internet.

❶ Click "Check Internet Connection" on the"Main unit settings" tab to move to the home
screen.

❷ Enter the connection destination address.

❷❸･ The default value is entered as "www.patlite.com."･ Input methods that can be entered are host nameand IPv4 address format.

❸ Click "Check Execute".
❹ The connection result is displayed in a pop-

If the connection is successful

up dialog.

･ Check the contents and click the [OK] button.
･ If the connection fails, the product is not connectedto the Internet. Check the displayed message andtake action.

If the connection fails

248

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.2. Initializing This Product・ From the Web Setup Screen, you can initialize the settings of the product.
For information on setup items, refer to "9.8.1. Settings Initialization" ( ☞ page 360).
・ Using DIP switches, you can perform operations such as initialize network settings only, or resetting to the factory
default state.

8.5.2.1. Initialization on the Web Setup Screen❶ From the [Management] tab click❶[Initialization], to enter the [Initialization]screen.

・ If the current setting information is required, extract
the configuration data beforehand.
"8.5.7.1. Extracting the Configuration" ( ☞ page258)
・ If the log is required, download the Event Log
beforehand.
"8.5.9.2. Downloading the Log" ( ☞ page 264)

❷ Select the required initialization items.

❷❸■ Initialize Including Network Settings
・ Select the [Initialize network] check box.
・ [Network Settings] refer to items in the [Network
Settings] screen, such as [IP Address], [Subnet
Mask], [Prefix length], [Default Gateway], [DNS
Server Address], and [Host Name].
・ When network settings are also initialized, as the
IP address is reset to the factory default, network
settings have to be set up again.
■ Initializing Audio Registered in [Voice
Registration] Screen
・ Select the [Initialize Audio Data] check box.
・ Audio data registered from the Web Setup Screen
is erased when initialization is executed.

❸ Click the [Execute] button.
❹ Settings are initialized.
・ After settings are initialized, the product is
automatically restarted.

249

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.2.2. Initialization with DIP Switches

WARNING
Before any work is done, disconnect the power.

CAUTION
Do not use excessive force on this product. Failure to follow this instruction could result in deformed frame and productdamage.
Do not use sharp tipped objects with this product. Operation may become impossible as scratches develop on switches
and switch contacts are interfered with.
Do not set the DIP switch ON if it is not required.

❶ Turn off the power on the product.
❷ Set DIP switches ON in accordance withhow much to initialize.

SwitchNumberInitialize only
Network Settings

1
2
3
4

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

Initialize andReturn to Factory
Default Settings
ON
ON
ON
ON

DIP Switches❸ Power up the product.
❹ Settings are initialized.
・ When initialization is complete, the status LEDchanges from Green to Magenta.
・ In NHV Series, following messages are played at
the initializing.
● Initializing only Network settings"The network setup was initialized. Return thesetting switch and reboot the main unit."● Initializing and Returning to Factory Default
Settings"The setting has been initialized. Return the setting
switch and restart the main unit."

Green light❺ After initialization is complete, turn the
power off.

❻ Reset all the DIP switches OFF.
・ As required, start up and set up the product.

250

Magenta lightNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.3. Restarting this Product・ You can restart this product from the Web Setup Screen. For information on setup items, refer to "9.8.2. Restart" (☞page 361).
・ You can also restart this product with the Reset button.
・ To prevent accidental operation, the Reset button is located on the back of the product, inside a hole.

8.5.3.1. Restarting from the Web Setup Screen❶ From the [Management] tab click [Restart]
to enter the [Restart] screen.

❶❷ Click the [Restart] button.

❷❸ Restarting begins.

251Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.3.2. Restarting with the Reset Button❶ On the back of the main unit, press theReset Button with a wire about 1 mm indiameter (such as a straightened paper clip).

・ Do not press too hard. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in equipment damage.
・ Pressing the Reset button restarts the system,
however, all output terminal blocks are open during
this time.
Be cautious when pressing the Reset button while
the system is in operation.
・ Do not use excessive force on this product.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in
deformed frame and product damage.
・ Do not use sharp tipped objects with this product.
Operation may become impossible as scratches
develop on switches and switch contacts areinterfered with.

Reset Button

Wire❷ Restarting begins.

・ For action in restarting, refer to "6.6.3. Checking at
Startup" ( ☞ page 104).

252

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.4. Changing the Sound Volume
・ From the Web Setup Screen, change the volume all at once of all channels played by all playback events on thisproduct.
・ Change the volume separately for the speaker and line out.
・ For information on setup items, refer to "9.1.5. Basic Settings" ( ☞ page 277).
・ For buzzer and speaker volume, change the volume using the volume buttons on the front of the speaker.
・ On the NHB, adjust the speaker volume from three levels.
・ On the NHV, adjust the volume on both speaker and line out from 16 levels.

CAUTION
If audio is distorted or cracked, turn down the volume.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in speaker damage.

8.5.4.1. Adjusting the Volume on the Web Setup Screen❶ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click[Basic Settings] to enter the [Basic Settings]
screen.

❶❷ In the [Basic Settings] screen, use the slider

Changing the Buzzer Volume

to adjust the speaker volume.

■ Changing the Buzzer Volume

NHB Series・ In the [Main Unit Information] screen, use the pulldown to adjust the line out volume.
■ Changing the Speaker Volume

Changing the Speaker Volume

NHV Series
Low
Volume・ In the [Main Unit Information] screen, use the slider
to adjust the speaker volume.
・ To mute the volume, select the [Mute] check box tothe right of the slider.
Turning off the power or restarting disables mute.
■ Changing the Line Out Volume

High
VolumeChanging the Line Out Volume

NHV Series

Low
Volume・ In the [Main Unit Information] screen, use the slider
to adjust the line out volume.

❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

253

High
VolumeNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.5.4.2. Adjusting the Volume with + / - Volume Control Buttons❶ Log in to the Web Setup Screen.

❷ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click❷[Enable Feature] to enter the [Main unit
control settings] screen.

❸ In the [Main unit control settings] set [Volume❸+/- Button] to [Enabled].

❹ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
❺ Press the +Volume and -Volume buttons on
the main unit to adjust the volume.

・ Press the +Volume button to increase thevolume by 1.
・ Press the -Volume button to decrease thevolume by 1.
・ Each press of the button changes the volume
one time.
・ When adjusting the volume, the following soundis emitted .
Adjusting（min.）NHV Series

None

NHB Series

None– Volume
Button+ Volume
ButtonAdjusting（max.）
Double"Pop""Pop""Beep"

Adjusting254

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.5.4.3. Muting the Volume

8. Operation

NHV Series❶ Log in to the Web Setup Screen.

❷ From the [Main unit settings] tab, click❷[Enable Feature] to enter the [Main unit
control settings] screen.

❸ In the [Main unit control settings] set [Volume❸+/- Button] to [Enabled].

❹ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

❺ Press and hold the -Volume button on themain unit for at least two seconds to mutethe volume.

・ When muted, the status LED flashes blue threetimes.
・ Press the +Volume button to disable mute.
・ Turning off the power or restarting disables mute.

– Volume
ButtonPress for 2 seconds or longer

255

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.5. Verifying the Self-test Operation
・ You can set the operation for when the Test button is pressed from the Web Setup Screen.
・ For information on setup items, refer to "9.6.2. Test Button Setting" ( ☞ page 351).

8.5.5.1. Enabling the Test Button Function❶ From the [Main unit operation settings] tab,open [Test button settings].

❶❷ Set a notification for when the Test button ispressed.

Using Send Email■ Using Send EmailTo send email, setting up email notifications and email
content is required.
"8.1.2. Setting Up Email Notification Settings" ( ☞page 138)

1

1

1 Select the Subject and Body text.
Select the email recipients.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
2・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.

2■ Using SNMP Notification

Using SNMP Notification

Before using SNMP notification, the SNMP Notification
Function must be [Enabled].
"8.1.1. Setting Up SNMP (Trap Inform) Notification
Settings" ( ☞ page 134)
Using Send HTTP Command■ Using Send HTTP Command
Before sending HTTP Commands, the HTTP
Command must be registered.
"8.1.3. Setting Up HTTP Command Sending Settings"( ☞ page 141)

1

Select the HTTP Command Destination.
・ You can select multiple recipients.
1
・ If the recipient is not registered, it will not besent even when selected.
■ Using Send MQTT

Using Send MQTT

Before using Send MQTT, the Cloud function must be
enabled.
"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page 144)

❸ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
256

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation❹ Press the Test button.
The test operation is started.

・After test operation, press the clear button to
return to normal operation.

Test Button

8.5.6. Changing User Authentication Settings
・ You can edit passwords for logging in to this product.
・ After completing setup, you can use the passwords from the next login.
・ For information on setup items, refer to "9.8.6. User Authentication Settings" ( ☞ page 365).

8.5.6.1. User Authentication Settings❶ From the [Management] tab, click [Userauthentication settings] to enter the[Changing user credentials] screen.

❶❷ In [New Username], set a new user name.

❷❸❸ In [New password], set a new password.
❹ In [Verify Password], enter the set password.
❺ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.

257❹

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.7. Exporting and Importing Product Settings (Configuration)
・ You can extract the product settings and save them to your computer as configuration data.
・ There are two files of config data that can be extracted: operation setting information (config.ini) and audio data(sound_cfg.json, NHV series only).
・ Select configuration data extracted from the product for writing.
・ For information on setup items, refer to "9.8.3. Configuration" ( ☞ page 362).

8.5.7.1. Extracting the Configuration❶ From the [Management] tab click[Configuration] to enter the [Reading
Configuration Data] screen.

❶❷ From [Reading Configuration Data], click[Read] to save the configuration data to yourcomputer.

❷・ The configuration data consists of operation
settings registered in the main unit.
The following content is not included inconfiguration data.
・Network Settings
・Cloud Settings
・Security Settings
・ If the multiple file download confirmation dialog isdisplayed, select "Allow".

258

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.7.2. Reading Configuration and Sound Packages Using USB Memory
・If the NH folder does not exist on the USB memory when the read function is executed, it is createdautomatically.
・The name of the configuration file saved on the USB memory is "config.ini" and the name of the sound package
file is "sound.pkg".
・Sound package reading is only available for NHV series.
・For the detailed explanation of the USB memory function, please refer to "5.3.24. USB Memory Function" ( ☞page 82).

❶ Turn ON DIP switch 3 while the product is innormal startup mode.

DIP switch❷ Plug in the USB memory.

❶❸ Press the Test button.
・Recognizing the USB memory may take some time.
If the status LED turns red, wait 10 seconds andpress the test button again.

❷❹ Configuration and sound package download
begins, and the status LED starts flashingblue.

Note: Do not remove the USB memory while reading
the configuration file or sound package file.

❸

The files on the USB memory may be corrupted.

❺ When the status LED changes from flashingto light on.
For the NHV series, the message "Saving
setting data to USB memory is complete.
Reset the DIP switches." is played.

DIP switch❻ remove the USB memory and turn off all DIP
switches.

❻259

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8.5.7.3. Writing to Configuration＜ When writing configuration data ＞❶ From the [Management] tab click❶[Configuration] to enter the [Writing
Configuration Data] screen.

❷ Click the [Select file] button in the device

setting data of [Write configuration data],
and select the configuration data you want
to write to this product.

❷❸❹・ You can carry forward not only NHB and NHV
series settings, but also NH-FB and NH-FV series
settings.
Note: Do not register configuration data from products
other than those listed above. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in product damage.
Note: If you write configuration data for the NH-FB
series or NH-FV series, some functions may beenabled.
＜ When writing an audio package (NHV only) ＞❸ Select the audio package you want to write
to this product by clicking the "Select file"button in the audio setting data of "Write
config data".

・ After the write is complete, the product restarts
automatically.

❹ From [Writing Configuration Data], click the[Write] button to begin the write operation.

・ Old sound setting data (sound_cfg.json) can also
be written.
In that case, perform steps ❺ to ❼ after step ❹ .

❺＜ When writing the old sound setting data (sound_cfg.json) ＞❺ When voice data is written, click [Voice❻

Registration] to enter the [Voice Registration]screen.

❻ Select the channel you want to register thevoice and click the [Add to Channel List]
button.

❼ Click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
260

8. Operation

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.7.4. Writing Configuration and Sound Packages Using USB Memory
・For preparation, create an NH folder on the USB memory, and place the configuration file for writing "config_w.ini"
and the sound package file "sound_w.pkg" in the conf folder.
・Three patterns of writing from USB memory are possible: configuration only, sound package only, and bothconfiguration and sound package.
・Sound package writing is only available for NHV series.
・For the detailed explanation of the USB memory function, please refer to "5.3.24. USB Memory Function" ( ☞ page82).

❶ Turn off the power on the product.
❷ Turn ON DIP switch 3.
❸ Plug in the USB memory.

DIP switch❷❹ Power up the product.
❺ After starting the main unit, press the Test❹

button.

・ For the NHV series, the system sound reads out
the file to write after starting the main unit. Confirm
that the file to write is correct before pressing theTest button.

❻ Uploading of configuration and soundpackages begins, and the status LED starts
flashing cyan.

❺

Note: Do not remove the USB memory while
uploading the configuration file or soundpackage file.
This product may not operate properly.

❼ When the status LED changes from flashingto light on.
For the NHV series, the message "Writing
is complete. Reset the DIP switches andrestart the main unit." is played.

❽ Remove the USB memory and turn off all
the DIP switches.

DIP switch❽
261

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.8. Updating Firmware
・ You can update the product firmware by selecting the firmware saved to your computer or other location.
・ For information on setup items, refer to "9.8.4. Updating Firmware" ( ☞ page 363).

CAUTION・While updating, do not disconnect the power or LAN cables.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in product failure.
・Before updating, check the version and models supported by the firmware.
Updating with unsupported firmware could result in equipment damage.

8.5.8.1. Updating Firmware❶ From the [Management] tab, click [Firmware
Update] to enter the [Firmware Update]screen.

❶❷ In the [Firmware Update] screen, click❷[Select a file] and select the firmware to write
to this product.

❸❸ Click [Execute] to start updating.
・ After the update is complete, the product restarts
automatically.

262

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.8.2. Updating Firmware Using USB Memory
・For preparation, create an NH folder on the USB memory and place the firmware update file "nh_update" inthe update folder.
・For the detailed explanation of the USB memory function, please refer to "5.3.24. USB Memory Function" ( ☞page 82).

❶ Turn off the power on the product.
❷ Turn ON DIP switch 2.

DIP switch❷❸ Plug in the USB memory.
❹ Power up the product.
❺ After starting up the main unit, confirm tha
and press the Test button.

❹

・For the NHV series, after starting the main unit,
the system sound plays "Execute updating thefirmware. Press the TEST button.".
・Recognizing the USB memory may take some time.
If the status LED turns red, wait 10 seconds andpress the test button again.

❻ The firmware update begins and the status
LED starts flashing cyan.

❺

Note: Do not remove the USB memory while
uploading the configuration file or soundpackage file.
This product may not operate properly.

❼ When the status LED changes from flashingto light on.
For the NHV series, the message "Firmware
update complete. Reset the DIP switches
and restart the main unit." is played.
DIP switch❽ Remove the USB memory and turn off all
the DIP switches.

❽263

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.9. Checking the Event Log
・ Displays the productʼs event log.
・ You can display the latest 100 logged events.
・ You can click [Download Event Log] to download the event log file.
・ The event log can have up to 1000 events.
・ For information on setup items, refer to "9.8.5. Event Log" ( ☞ page 364).

CAUTION
The event log is cleared when the following operation is performed.
・From the [Initialization] screen, execute initialization
・Initialize and Return to Factory Default Settings in DIP Switches

8.5.9.1. Displaying the Event Log❶ From the [Management] tab click [EventLog] to enter the [Event Log] screen.

・ The [Event Log] screen is displayed.

❶

8.5.9.2. Downloading the Log❶ From the [Management] tab click [EventLog] to enter the [Event Log] screen.

・ The [Event Log] screen is displayed.

❶❷ Click the [Download] button to download theevent log file.

❷264

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.9.3. Downloading Log Using USB Memory
・If the NH folder does not exist on the USB memory when the download log function is executed, it is createdautomatically.
・The log file downloaded to the USB memory is named "log.txt".
・For the detailed explanation of the USB memory function, please refer to "5.3.24. USB Memory Function" ( ☞page 82).

❶ Turn ON DIP switch 2 while the product is innormal startup mode.

DIP switch❶❷ Plug in the USB memory.

❸ Press the Test button.
❷❹ Log download begins, and the status LED
starts flashing blue.

Note: Do not remove the USB memory while reading
the configuration file or sound package file.
The files on the USB memory may be corrupted.

❸❺ When the status LED changes from flashingto light on.
For the NHV series, the message "The event
log has been saved to USB memory. Resetthe DIP switches." is played.

❻ Remove the USB memory and turn off all DIP

DIP switch

switches.

❻
265

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

8. Operation

8.5.9.4. Event Log contents
Displayed
Event Name
Event Details

coldStart

Displayed
Event NameACCESS

Event Details

Displayed
Event Name

Event Details

Displayed
Event Name
Event Details

Displayed
Event Name

Event Details

Displayed
Event Name

Event Details

Displayed Event
Contents
Records from the start up time.

No Display

Displayed Event No Display
Contents
Records at the moment of authentication failure.
• At the moment of a Web login failure"send mail""Mail sending failure"
MAIL"SMTP authentication mail sending failure""POP authentication mail sending failure""send mail": It records at the moment of an E-mail transmission.
"Mail sending failure" : It records at the moment of an E-mail transmission failure.
"SMTP authentication mail sending failure" : It records at the moment of the SMTP authentication mail failure.
"POP authentication mail sending failure": It records at the moment of the POP authentication mail failure.
Displayed Event
Contents

Displayed Event "received"Contents"received" : It records when the registered Trap is received.

TRAP"error occurred", the IP address, the registered number, andthe group
Displayed Event "error recovered", the IP address, the registered number, andPING
Contents
the group*
It records when the Ping monitor status changes.
"error occurred" : It records with the target IP address and the target group when an abnormality event in the Ping
monitor occurs.
"error recovered" : It records with the target IP address and the target group when an abnormality in thePing monitor is restored.
* "non" is displayed when the target is not belong to the group.
""CLEAR" Button""SNMP""RSH/SSH" and designated sender IP address
Displayed Event "PNS Command"
CLEAR
Contents"Web Setup Tool""HTTP Command""Azure""AWS"The Signal Tower is returned to its normal operating status during operation.
""CLEAR" Button" : It records when the clear button to this product is pushed.
"SNMP" : It records when a "CLEAR" has been executed by the SNMP Command (controlLightSnmpClear).
"RSH/SSH" : It records when a "CLEAR" has been executed by the RSH Command, and displays thedesignated sender IP address.
"PNS Command" : It records when a "CLEAR" has been executed by the PNS Command.
"Web Setup Tool" : It records when a "Clear" has been executed from the Web Setup Screen.
"HTTP Command" : It records when a "clear" has been executed by the HTTP Command.
"Azure" : It records when a "clear" has been executed from the Azure.
"AWS" : It records when a "clear" has been executed from the AWS.

266

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Displayed
Event Name

Event Details

Displayed
Event Name

Event Details

Displayed
Event Name

Event Details

Displayed
Event Name

Event Details

8. Operation"alert", command argument, and the designated sender IP
address"status""test"
Displayed Event "sound", audio playback channel, and the designated sender
RSH/SSH
Contents
IP address"stop" and the designated sender IP address"color"*
It records when the RSH/SSH Command is executed. (The "Clear" execution is not included)"alert" : When the "alert" command is executed, it records the argument and designated sender IP address.
"status" : The "status" command is recorded at the time of execution.
"test" : The "test" command records at the time of execution.
"sound" : When the "sound" command is executed, it records the audio playback channel and designated sender IP
address.
"stop" : When the "stop" command is executed, it records the designated sender IP address.
"color" : The "color" command records at the time of execution.
*In RSH command, an IP address is not written in cases where the designated sender address isinactivated.
"Sound controlled" and audio playback channel"Sound stop controlled"
Displayed Event "Signal controlled" and the index number of OID
SNMPContents"Get status""Digital out"
"Signal/Sound controlled" and command argument"Sound controlled" : It records when audio playback is played by SET command of SNMP.
"Sound stop controlled" : It records when playing audio playback is stopped by SET command of SNMP.
"Signal controlled" : It records when Signal Tower is operated by SET command of SNMP.
"Get status" : It records when GET command of SNMP is received.
"Digital out" : It records when digital outputs are operated SET command of SNMP.
"Signal/Sound controlled" : It records when Signal Tower and audio playback are operated by SET
command of SNMP.
"RECV""RECV PHN"
Displayed Event "SEND"
SOCKET
Contents"SEND PHN"
"ERROR""RECV" : When the PNS command is executed and this product is operated, it records the ID.
"RECV PHN" : When the PHN command is executed and this product is operated, it records the Request
Command.
"SEND" : When the PNS/PHN command is executed and this product responds, it records "ACK" or "NAK".
When the Get status in PNS command is executed and this product responds, it records the Response
Command "G".
"SEND PHN" : When the PHN command is executed and this product responds, it records the Response
Command "R".
"ERROR" : It records when the PNS/PHN command is executed and the error occurs.
"SNMP matched the condition""SNMP release the condition""SNMP detected the change"
It will record, depending on the Supported equipment SNMP Monitor Operation.
"SNMP matched the condition" : It records, depending on the condition agreement operation.
"SNMP release the condition" : It records, when the condition is canceled.
"SNMP detected the change" : It records, when it operates by a Change Detection.
SNMPGET

Displayed Event
Contents

267

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Displayed
Event Name
Event Details

The "digital input operation" port number and status"digital input state change ON" and port number"digital input state change OFF" and port number"digital input state change ON" : When it changes to ON for the digital input set up signal definition, it isrecorded.
"digital input state change OFF" : When it changes to OFF for the digital input set up signal definition, it isrecorded.

DIN

Displayed
Event Name
Event Details

COND

Displayed
Event Name

DOUT

Event Details"Digital Output", port number, and status"Digital Output Busy" and status"Digital Output" : When it changes to ON or OFF for the digital output set up signal definition, it is recorded.
"Digital Output Busy" : When it changes to ON or OFF for the busy output set up signal definition, it isrecorded.
HTTP

Displayed
Event NameHTTPSEND

Displayed
Event Name
Event Details

Displayed
Event Name

Event Details

Displayed
Event Name

Event Details

Displayed Event
Contents

Displayed Event "matched the condition setting" and condition number
Contents"matched the condition setting" : It records, depending on the digital input condition agreement.

Displayed
Event Name
Event Details

Event Details

8. Operation

Displayed Event
Contents

Displayed Event "CONTROL"
Contents
It records when the HTTP Command is executed. (The "clear" execution is not included)
Displayed Event Command name and "HTTP send command"Contents
Command name and "HTTP command failure""HTTP send command" : It records when HTTP command is send.
"HTTP command failure" : It records when sending HTTP command fails.
"CONNECTED""DISCONNECTED""CONTROLLED""CONNECTED" : It records when connecting to Azure.
"DISCONNECTED" : It records when closing the connection to Azure.
"CONTROLLED" : It records when Azure operation is run.
AZURE

Displayed Event
Contents"CONNECTED""CONNECTION_FAILED"AWS"DISCONNECTED""CONTROLLED""CONNECTED" : It records when connecting to AWS.
"CONNECTION_FAILED" : It records when AWS connection fails.
"DISCONNECTED" : It records when closing the connection to AWS.
"CONTROLLED" : It records when AWS operation is run.
Displayed Event
Contents"Filter matched" and the matched filter number"Failed to receive email"
Displayed Event "Failed to read email"
MAILDETECT
Contents"controlled""Failed to controll""Filter matched": It records when receiving the mail that is matched the set filter.
"Failed to receive email": It records when receiving emails fails.
"Failed to read email": It records when reading aloud emails fails.
"controlled": It records when the mail control function controls the main unit when the filter matches.
"Failed to control": It records when the mail control function fails to control the main unit when the filter matches.

268

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Displayed
Event Name
Event Details

Displayed
Event Name
Event Details*

8. Operation

Displayed Event "PLC-Matched" and condition settings number
Contents"PLC-Error" and condition settings number
It records when the operation by the PLC information read command is executed.
"PLC-Matched": It records when the set condition matches and the operation is performed.
"PLC-Error": It records when an error response is received.

PLC

Displayed Event "ERROR: PLC-READ" and condition settings number
Contents"ERROR: PLC-WRITE" and condition settings number"ERROR: PLC-READ": It records when the source port could not be set when sending a PLC information
read command.
"ERROR: PLC-WRITE": It records when the source port could not be set when sending a PLC information
write command.

SOURCE_PORT

Displayed events within the double quotes are not recognized in the log.

269

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions
・This section describes the settings for using the various functions.
・To implementing the various settings, click the item you want to set. The selected set up screen is displayed.
・If you want to move from one of the various setting screens to another setting screen, click the item you want to
set.

①
②
③
④
⑤
⑥
⑦
⑧

No.

Item

Description①

Main unit settings

You can configure [Enable Feature], [Network Settings], [LTE Settings], [Internet Connection
Check], [Clock Settings], and [Basic Settings].

②

Command
Reception
Settings

You can configure [Socket communication settings], [RSH/SSH Command Reception Settings],
and [SNMP Command-reception Settings].

③

Monitoring
Settings

You can configure [Ping Monitoring Settings, Individual Settings, Group Settings], [TRAP Reception
Settings, Basic Settings, Receive Settings], [SNMP Device Monitoring Settings, Basic Settings,
Match Detection Settings, Change Detection Settings], [Contact Input Setting, Status Change
Detection Settings, Match Detection Settings], [Mail Detection Setting, Mail Server Settings,
Filter Rule Settings], and [PLC Linkage Function Settings, Basic Settings, PLC Information Read
Command Settings, PLC Information Write Command Settings, PLC Count Value Write Settings].

④

Notification
settings

You can configure [SNMP Notification Settings], [Email Notification], and [HTTP Transmission⑤

Cloud Settings

You can configure [Azure Connection Settings] and [AWS Connection Settings].

⑥

Main unit
operation settings

You can configure [Clear Operation Settings], [Test Button Settings], [Contact output setting], and[Signal Tower Operation].

⑦

Voice Registration

You can configure [Voice Registration] and [Notification Sound Registration] settings.

⑧

Management

You can run operations for [Initialization], [Restart], [Configuration], [Firmware Update], [Event
Log], [User authentication settings], and [Security Settings].

Settings], [HTTP command recipient settings], [Change information recipient settings].

270

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.1. Main Unit Settings
9.1.1. Function Activation
You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled] product functions.

⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑪
No.

Item

⑫

⑬

⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩⑭

⑱ ⑰ ⑯ ⑮
Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Input
Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model①

SSH Command
Reception
Function

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the SSH Command Reception Function.

●

●

●

●

②

RSH Command
Reception
Function

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the RSH Command Reception Function.

●

●

●

●

③

HTTP CommandControl

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the HTTP Command Control function.

●

●

●

●

④

Socketcommunication
settings

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the Socket Communication settings
function.

●

●

●

●

⑤

Transmissionof change
information

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the Transmission of change information
function.

●

●

●

●

⑥

LTE
Communication
Function

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the LTE Communication function.

●

●

●

●

⑦

Clear Button

EnabledEnabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the Clear Button operation.

●

●

●

●

⑧

Test button

EnabledEnabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the Test Button operation.

●

●

●

●

⑨

Volume +/- Button Enabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the Volume +/- Button.

●

●

●

●

271

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Input
Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model⑩

Contact input 1

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Contact input 1.

–

–

–

●

⑪

Contact input 2

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Contact input 2.

–

–

–

●

⑫

Contact input 3

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Contact input 3.

–

–

–

●

⑬

Contact input 4

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Contact input 4.

–

–

–

●

⑭

Contact output 1

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Contact output 1.

–

–

–

●

⑮

Contact output 2

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Contact output 2.

–

–

–

●

⑯

Receive SNMP

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the SNMP Command-reception
Function.

●

●

●

●

⑰

TRAP Reception
Function

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the TRAP Reception Function.

●

●

●

●

⑱

SNMP Device
Monitoring

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the SNMP Device Monitoring Function.

●

●

●

●

⑲

SNMP Notification

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
the SNMP Notification Function.

●

●

●

●

272

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.1.2. Network Settings
You can change the network settings on this product.

CAUTION
After changing network settings, click [Set] to apply the defined settings.
Click [Set] to automatically restart the network.

Screen when [Manual Settings] is selected in ① and ⑤④ ③ ② ①⑫

⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨

Screen when [Auto Settings] is selected in ① and ⑤

273

⑪ ⑩

Refer to the above

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
No.

Item

Default Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

●

●

●

●

Enter the IPv4 address of thisproduct.

●

●

●

●

Enter the subnet mask of thisproduct.

●

●

●

●

Enter the default gateway ofthis product.

●

●

●

●

Set up manually /Select how to configure theSet up
IPv6 address for this product.
automatically

●

●

●

●

①

Setting Method

Set up manually /Select how to configure theManual Settings
Set up
IPv4 address for this product.
automatically②

IP Address*¹

192.168.10.1③

Subnet Mask*¹

255.255.255.0④

Default
gateway*¹⑤

Setting Method

Manual Settings⑥

IPv6 Link Local
Address*²––

Displays the link local addressof this product.

●

●

●

●

⑦

IP Address*³(Blank)IPv6 Address
FormatEnter the IPv6 address of thisproduct.

●

●

●

●

⑧

Prefix length*²(Blank)1 to 128

Enter the Prefix length of thisproduct.

●

●

●

●

⑨

Default
gateway*²(Blank)IPv6 Address
FormatEnter the default gateway ofthis product.

●

●

●

●

⑩

Setting Method

Set up manually /Select how the DNS server is
Set upconfigured for this product.
automatically

●

●

●

●

⑪

DNS server
address(Blank)IPv4/IPv6
Address Format

Enter the DNS server
address.

●

●

●

●

⑫

Host namenh

63 single-bytealphanumericcharactersEnter the host name.

●

●

●

●

IPv4 Address
Format0.0.0.0

Manual Settings*1

When [Automatic Settings] is selected, input is disabled.

*2

When [Automatic Settings] is selected, setup items do not display.

*3

When [Automatic Settings] is selected, up to three IPv6 addresses acquired by this product are displayed.

274

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9.1.3. LTE Settings
This function is for Japan only.

275

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.1.4. Clock Settings
Set the clock on this product. There are two ways to set the clock on the product.
For information, refer to "7.6. Setting Up the Clock" ( ☞ page 116)

③

No.

Item

①

NTP Server
Address②

Correction interval
(min)

③

Time zone

Default
Value

②

①

Displays the time seton the product.

Displays the time seton the computer.

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelIP Address Format(Blank) (v4/v6) or host name Set the NTP Server address.*(63 characters)

●

●

●

●

Set the interval for NTP server
communication.

●

●

●

●

Set the Time zone.

●

●

●

●

0

0 to 1440

UTC+9UTC-12 to +12* When you do not use a NTP server, either leave the NTP Server address blank or set to "0.0.0.0".

276

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.1.5. Basic Settings
Set basic operations on this product.
NHV⑦ ⑤ ③ ② ①

⑩

⑥

⑪

NHB

④
①

277

⑧

⑨

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes, –: No)

Default
Value

Input Range
31 single-byteor double-bytecharacters
31 single-bytealphanumeric andunderscore ( _ )Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelEnter the Equipment name forthis product.

●

●

●

●

Enter the installation location ofthis product.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

0
Configure the buzzer volume on（OFF） this product.

●

–

–

–

Configure the speaker volume on
this product.

–

●

●

●

–

●

●

●

–

●

●

●

–

●

●

●

Select the unit from [Not Used],[WDT], or [Multi-color unit].

●

●

●

●

Set the brightness of the Signal(minimum) Tower when on or flashing.

●

●

●

●

Red / Amber / Green /Set the Signal Tower light during
Blue / White /normal operation.
Do not turn ON

●

●

●

●

①

Equipment
Name

Network
SignalTower②

Installation
Location(Blank)③

Contact(Blank)④

Buzzer

⑤

Speaker
Volume8⑥

Mute*¹(Not
selected)–⑦

Line Out
Volume120 to 15⑧

Audio
Playback
Mode

Select either [Post-priority
Post-priority Post-priority Playback
Playback Mode] or [Memory
Playback
Mode / Memory
playback mode] for audio
Modeplayback mode
playback.

⑨

Additional
units*² *³

Not Used⑩

Dimming

4 / 3 /
4
(maximum) (maximum)⑪

Normaloperation
settings*⁴

Do not turnON

Email address format(maximumEnter the contact information.
63 characters)

2 / 1
2(Maximum) （Maximum）/

0 to 15

Set whether to mute the volume
on this product.
Select the check box to erase
sound on the product.
Configure the line out volume on
this product.

Not Used/ WDT /Multi-color unit
2

/

1

*1

Mute is automatically disabled when the product is turned off or restarted.

*2[WDT] and [Multi-color unit] cannot be selected at the same time.

*3

When [WDT] or [Multi-color unit] is selected, the dimmer is fixed at [Maximum].

*4

If you execute the clear operation after setup is complete, the product starts up in the set normal operation.
Colors other than the set Signal Tower color are turned off during normal operation.

278

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.2. Command Reception Settings
9.2.1. Socket Communication Settings
Set socket communication used by PNS and PHN Commands.

④ ③ ② ①

When ④ [Sent-from address settings] is [Disabled]

When ④ [Sent-from address settings] is [Enabled]

④
⑤

No.

Item

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Input Range

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelYou can select to [Enabled]or [Disabled] the Socket
Communication function.

●

●

●

●

Select either [TCP] or [UDP].

●

●

●

●

Enter the port number forreceiving data.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

①

Socketcommunication
function②

ProtocolTCP

TCP / UDP③

Port number

10000

5000 to 65535④

Sent-fromaddress settings

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

You can choose whether or
not to limit addresses that cantransmit commands by selecting
either [Enabled] or [Disabled].

⑤

Source address
1 to 8(Blank)IP Address Format(v4/v6)Enter the IP addresses that areallowed to execute commands.

279

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.2.2. RSH/SSH Command Reception Settings
Define the settings for receiving RSH or SSH Commands.
Screen when [Disabled] is selected in ⑨, or
screen when [Key Authentication] is selected in ⑰

⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑫

⑬
⑭

280

⑰
⑮

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Screen when [Enabled] is selected in ⑨, or
screen when [Password Authentication] is selected in ⑰

⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨

⑩

⑪

⑬
⑭

⑯

281

⑰
⑮

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
No.

Item

Default Value

Input Range①

RSH
Command
Reception
Function

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled②

SSH
Command
Reception
Function

Disabled

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelYou can select to [Enabled] or[Disabled] the RSH Command
Reception function.

●

●

●

●

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or[Disabled] the SSH Command
Reception function.

●

●

●

●

Set [Common] or [Individual] forthe timer function so you can set
the operating time of each colorand buzzer of the Signal Tower.

●

●

●

●

③

Restore timer

CommonCommon /Individual④

Send email

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

For when a command isreceived, set [Enabled] or[Disabled] for Send email.

●

●

●

●

⑤

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select the subject of the email to
send.

●

●

●

●

⑥

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of the email
to be sent.

●

●

●

●

⑦

Mail
destination
setting(Not selected)–

Select the email recipient.

●

●

●

●

⑧

SNMP
Notification

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
SNMP Notification.

●

●

●

●

⑨

Sent-fromaddresssettings

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can choose whether or not tolimit addresses that can transmit
RSH Commands by selecting
either [Enabled] or [Disabled].

●

●

●

●

⑩

Source IP
address(Blank)IP Address
Format (v4/v6)

Enter the IP addresses thatare allowed to execute RSH
Commands.

●

●

●

●

282

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
No.

Item

Default Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

⑪

Login name(Blank)16 single-bytealphanumericcharacters,
period ( . ), andhyphen ( - )⑫CommonLogin Name

(Blank)16 alphanumeric Enter the login name for whenor symbol
the RSH Commandʼs [Sent-fromcharacters
address settings] is [Disabled].

⑬

Port number

22

1 to 65535

Set the port for receiving SSH
Commands.

●

●

●

●

⑭

Source IP
address(Blank)IP Address
Format (v4/v6)

Enter the IP addresses thatare allowed to execute SSH
Commands.

●

●

●

●

Enter the login names thatare allowed to execute SSH
Commands.

●

●

●

●

Enter the login names thatare allowed to execute RSH
Commands.

⑮

Login name(Blank)16 single-bytealphanumericcharacters,
period ( . ), andhyphen ( - )⑯

Password(Blank)32 alphanumericEnter the password for Password
or symbol
Authentication.
characters

●

●

●

●

⑰

Authentication
methodFor the [Authentication method],
select either [Password
Authentication] or [KeyAuthentication].

●

●

●

●

Key
Authentication

Password
Authentication /Key
Authentication

283

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.2.3. SNMP Command Reception Settings
Set the [Community Name], [Security Level], [Authentication method], and so on, used with SNMP to reference andset each these items for this product.

When [Version selection] is set to [v1/v2c] in ②

④ ③ ② ①

When [Version selection] is set to [v3] in ②⑥⑤

When ⑥ [Security Level] is set to [AuthNoPriv]

When ⑥ [Security Level] is set to [AuthPriv]

When ⑥ [Security Level] is set to [noAuthNoPriv]

⑥
⑦
⑧
⑨
⑩

284

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
No.

Item

Default Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

●

●

●

●

①

SNMP Commandreception Function

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled]or [Disabled] the SNMP
Command-reception Function.

②

Version selection

v1/v2cv1/v2c / v3

Select the SNMP version to use
for Receive SNMP.

●

●

●

●

③

SET Community
Name*¹

private32 single-byteEnter the name for reading andalphanumericwriting settings with SNMP v1/
characters andv2c.
underscore ( _ )

●

●

●

●

④

GET Community
Name*¹

public32 single-bytealphanumeric Enter the name for reading
characters and settings with SNMP v1/v2c.
underscore ( _ )

●

●

●

●

⑤

Username*²(Blank)32 single-bytealphanumericcharacters

Set the user name used forauthentication in SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑥

Security Level*²

AuthPriv

noAuthNoPriv /Select the security level for
AuthNoPriv /authentication in SNMP v3.
AuthPriv

●

●

●

●

⑦

Authentication
method*² *³

MD5MD5 / SHA1

Select the Authentication
method for authentication in
SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑧

Authentication
password*² *³(Blank)8 to 64
single-bytealphanumericcharacters

Register the Authentication
password.

●

●

●

●

⑨

Encryption
Method*² *⁴

DES

DES / AES

Select the Encryption Method
for authentication in SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑩

Encryption
Password*² *⁴(Blank)8 to 64
single-bytealphanumericcharacters

Register the Encrypted
Password.

●

●

●

●

*1

Displays when [v1/v2c] is selected for [Version selection].

*2

Displays when [v3] is selected for [Version selection].

*3

If you select [noAuthNoPriv] for the [Security Level], you cannot configure this setup item.

*4

If you select [noAuthNoPriv] or [AuthNoPriv] for the [Security Level], you cannot configure this setup item.

285

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3. Monitor Settings
9.3.1. Ping Monitoring Settings
9.3.1.1. Individual Settings
・ Set up ping monitoring.
・ When the monitoring result is identified as an error, the operation for when there is a monitoring error is
performed. After a monitoring error occurs, if there is a response to the ping request, it is determined to haverecovered from the error state and the operation for when there is a recovery is performed.

⑦⑥ ⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑧
⑫
⑯

⑰
⑱

⑲
⑳

⑬
⑭
⑮

㉑

㉒
㉓

㉔
⑧

⑫
⑯

⑰
⑱

⑲
⑳

㉑

㉒
㉓
NHB

㉔
In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is specified

⑨
⑩
⑪

286

⑬
⑭
⑮

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

Default
Value

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

Description

1

1 to 24

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect the setting number for Ping
Monitoring Settings.

●

●

●

●

Enter the address to monitor.

●

●

●

●

①

Setting Number②

Monitored
Address(Blank)IP Address
Format (v4/v6)
or host name (63characters)③

Unit name(Blank)32 single-byteor double-bytecharactersEnter the name of equipment tomonitor.

●

●

●

●

④

Monitoring Group
Setting*¹--

Displays the monitoring group inwhich the monitored equipment is
set.

●

●

●

●

⑤

Number oftransmissions (0-30)

00 to 30

Select the number of transmissions
until an error is detected.

●

●

●

●

⑥

PING Monitoring
Cycle (1-600) sec.

60

1 to 600

Select the frequency of pingtransmissions.

●

●

●

●

⑦

Number oftransmissions (1-3)

1

1 to 3

Select the number of ping to send
at a time.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Specify the color of the Multi-color
unit.

●

●

●

●

No
changeContinuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 / Specify the lighting pattern of theFlashing pattern 3 / Multi-color unit.
Flashing pattern 4/ OFF / No change

●

●

●

●

BuzzerNochangeStop /
Buzzer pattern 1 /Buzzer pattern 2 /Buzzer pattern 3 /Buzzer pattern 4 /Buzzer pattern 5 /No change

Select the buzzer sound pattern.

●

–

–

–

Audio

No
changeStop /
One-shot playback/Select the audio playback pattern.
Repeat playback /No change

–

●

●

●

Set the number of times to repeat.
In addition to normal audio
playback, the audio is repeatedthe specified number of times. If
the number of times to repeat is
set to 255, playback is endless.

–

●

●

●

Select a registered channel.

–

●

●

●

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send email.

●

●

●

●

⑧

⑨

⑩

⑪

⑫

Red, Amber,
Green, Blue,
White

Color

PatternNochangeNochangeContinuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 / Select each color of the Signal
Flashing pattern 3 / Tower.
Flashing pattern 4/ OFF / No change
Red / Amber /Green / Blue /White / Purple /Light blue /No change⑬

Audio (when[Repeat playback]is selected)

0

0 to 255⑭

Audio Channel*²

Not
selected

Not selected /⑮

Send email

Disabled Enabled / Disabled

1 to 71287

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model⑯

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select a subject for the email.

●

●

●

●

⑰

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of the email.

●

●

●

●

⑱

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)–

Select the email recipient.

●

●

●

●

⑲

SNMP
Notification

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled] SNMP
Notification.

●

●

●

●

⑳

Send HTTP
CommandDisabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled] Send
HTTP Command.

●

●

●

●

㉑

HTTP Command
Sending Settings(Not
selected)–

Select the recipient of the HTTP
Command.

●

●

●

●

㉒

Send MQTT

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled] Send
MQTT.

●

●

●

●

㉓

Contact output
1*³

NochangeON / OFF /No change

Specify operation of contact output 1.

–

–

–

●

㉔

Contact output 2

NochangeON / OFF /No change

Specify operation of contact output 2.

–

–

–

●

*1

Set up monitoring group settings in [Ping Monitoring Settings] - [Group Settings].

*2

For the audio channel, you can select the following channels.
・In the [Voice Registration] screen, channel with registered audio
・Preset channel*3

When [Busy output] is specified in [Function] in [Contact output setting], this function is not operated.

288

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.1.2. Group Settings
② ①

③
⑦
⑪

⑫

⑭
⑮

⑬

⑧
⑨
⑩

⑯

⑰
⑱

⑲
③

⑦
⑪

⑫

⑭
⑮

⑬
⑯

⑰
⑱
NHB

⑲
In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is specified

④
⑤
⑥

289

⑧
⑨
⑩

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

①

Group

②

Monitored
Equipment

③

④

⑤

⑥

⑦

Default
Value

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

●

●

●

●

A

A/B/C

Select the group for the Ping
Monitoring Settings.

(Not
selected)–

Select the equipment to specify
for the group.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Red, Amber,
Green, Blue,
White

No
changeContinuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 / Select each color of the Signal
Flashing pattern 3 / Tower.
Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

Color

No
changeRed / Amber /Green/ Blue / White/ Specify the color of the MultiPurple / Light blue / color unit.
No change

●

●

●

●

No
changeContinuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 / Specify the lighting pattern of theFlashing pattern 3 / Multi-color unit.
Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

●

●

●

●

BuzzerNochangeStop /
Buzzer pattern 1 /Buzzer pattern 2 /Buzzer pattern 3 /Buzzer pattern 4 /Buzzer pattern 5 /No change

●

–

–

–

Audio

No
changeStop /
One-shot playback / Select the audio playback
Repeat playback / pattern.
No Change

–

●

●

●

Set the number of times torepeat. In addition to normal
audio playback, the audio isrepeated the specified number oftimes. If the number of times torepeat is set to 255, playback isendless.

–

●

●

●

Select a registered channel.

–

●

●

●

Pattern

Select the buzzer sound pattern.

⑧

Audio (when[Repeat playback]is selected)

0

0 to 255⑨

Audio Channel*¹

Not
selected

Not selected /⑩

Send email

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send email.

●

●

●

●

⑪

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select a subject for the email.

●

●

●

●

⑫

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of the email.

●

●

●

●

⑬

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)–

Select the email recipient.

●

●

●

●

⑭

SNMP
Notification

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
SNMP Notification.

●

●

●

●

⑮

Send HTTP
CommandDisabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send HTTP Command.

●

●

●

●

1 to 71290

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

Default
Value⑯

HTTP Command
Sending Settings⑰

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
Input Range

Description(Notselected)

Send MQTT⑱⑲*1

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model–Select the recipient of the HTTP
Command.

●

●

●

●

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send MQTT.

●

●

●

●

Contact output 1*²

NochangeOFF / ON / NochangeSpecify operation of contact
output 1.

–

–

–

●

Contact output 2

NochangeOFF / ON / NochangeSpecify operation of contact
output 2.

–

–

–

●

For the audio channel, you can select the following channels.
・In the [Voice Registration] screen, channel with registered audio
・Preset channel*2

When [Busy output] is specified in [Function] in [Contact output setting], this function is not operated.

291

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.2. TRAP Reception Settings
9.3.2.1. Basic Settings
You can set which TRAP are allowed to be received.
When [Version selection] is set to [v1/v2c]

③

②

①

When [Version selection] is set to [v3]

⑥

⑤

④

⑦

⑩

<When ⑤ [Security Level] is set to [AuthNoPriv]>

When ⑤ [Security Level] is set to [AuthPriv]

When ⑤ [Security Level] is set to [noAuthNoPriv]

⑤
⑥
⑦
⑧
⑨
⑩

⑤

⑩

292

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
No.

Item

Default Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

●

●

●

●

①

TRAP Reception
Function

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or[Disabled] the TRAP Reception
Function.

②

Version selection

v1/v2cv1/v2c / v3

Select the SNMP version touse for receiving TRAP.

●

●

●

●

③

TRAP Reception
Community*¹

public32 single-bytealphanumeric Enter the name for receiving
characters and settings with SNMP v1/v2c.
underscore ( _ )

●

●

●

●

④

Username*²(Blank)32 single-bytealphanumericcharacters

Set the user name used forauthentication in SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑤

Security Level*²

AuthPriv

noAuthNoPriv /Select the security level for
AuthNoPriv /authentication in SNMP v3.
AuthPriv

●

●

●

●

⑥

Authentication
method*² *³

MD5MD5 / SHA1

Select the Authentication
method for authentication in
SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑦

Authentication
password*² *³(Blank)8 to 64
single-bytealphanumericcharacters

Register the authentication
password.

●

●

●

●

⑧

Encryption
Method*² *⁴

DES

DES / AES

Select the Encryption Method
for authentication in SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑨

Encryption
Password*² *⁴(Blank)8 to 64
single-bytealphanumericcharacters

Register the Encrypted
Password.

●

●

●

●

⑩

Engine ID*²––

Displays this productʼs engine
ID.

●

●

●

●

*1

Displays when [v1/v2c] is selected for [Version selection].

*2

Displays when [v3] is selected for the [Version selection].

*3

If you select [noAuthNoPriv] for the [Security Level], you cannot configure this setup item.

*4

If you select [noAuthNoPriv] or [AuthNoPriv] for the [Security Level], you cannot configure this setup item.

293

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.2.2. Reception Settings
You can set which TRAP are allowed to be received, and the operation to run after receiving TRAP.

⑦ ⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑥

⑧
⑮
⑯

⑫
⑰
⑱

⑲
⑳

㉑
㉒
㉔

㉓
NHB

⑬

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is specified

⑨
⑩

⑪

294

⑭

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

Default
Value

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
Input Range

Description

1 to 16

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect the group number from
1 to 16.

●

●

●

●

32 single-byte orEnter the name of the group.
double-byte characters

●

●

●

●

Enter the SNMP Notification
Source Address from which toreceive.

●

●

●

●

①

Group Settings

1②

Group Name

(Blank)③

SNMP
Notification
Source Address(Blank)④

TRAP Number(Blank)OID format

Enter the TRAP OID toreceive.

●

●

●

●

⑤

OID

(Blank)OID format

Enter the variable-bindings
OID to receive.

●

●

●

●

Integer

For the variable-bindings
OID to receive, select the
Integer /OCTET STRING (String)/ type from [integer], [OCTETOCTET STRING (Binary) STRING (String)], or [OCTETSTRING (Binary)].

●

●

●

●

(Blank)0 to 2147483647 /63 single-bytecharacters / 16 bytes(including comma as
1Byte)

Enter the value of variablebindings to receive.

●

●

●

●

Continuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

Select each color of the
Signal Tower.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

⑥

⑦

SeriesValue⑧

Red, Amber,
Green, Blue,WhiteNo change

⑨

Color

No change⑩⑪⑫

Pattern

BuzzerAudio

IP Address Format(v4/v6)

Red / Amber / Green /Specify the color of the MultiBlue / White / Purple /color unit.
Light blue / No change

No change

Continuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

Specify the lighting pattern of
the Multi-color unit.

●

●

●

●

No change

Stop /
Buzzer pattern 1 /Buzzer pattern 2 /Buzzer pattern 3 /Buzzer pattern 4 /Buzzer pattern 5 /No change

Select the buzzer soundpattern.

●

–

–

–

No change

Stop /
One-shot playback /Repeat playback /No Change

Select the audio playback
pattern.

–

●

●

●

Set the number of times torepeat. In addition to normal
audio playback, the audio
is repeated the specified
number of times. If the numberof times to repeat is set to255, playback is endless.

–

●

●

●

Select a registered channel.

–

●

●

●

⑬

Audio (when[Repeatplayback] isselected)0

0 to 255⑭

Audio
Channel*¹

Not
selected

Not selected /1 to 71295

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)

Default
Value

Input Range

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSet to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Sending email.

●

●

●

●

⑮

Send email⑯

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select a subject for the email.

●

●

●

●

⑰

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of the email.

●

●

●

●

⑱

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)–

Select the email recipient.

●

●

●

●

⑲

SNMP Notification

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled] SNMP
Notification.

●

●

●

●

⑳

Send HTTP
CommandDisabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled] Send
HTTP Command.

●

●

●

●

㉑

HTTP Command
Sending Settings(Not
selected)–

Select the recipient of the HTTP
Command.

●

●

●

●

㉒

Send MQTT

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled] Send
MQTT.

●

●

●

●

㉓

Contact output 1*²

NochangeON / OFF /No change

Specify operation of contact output
1.

–

–

–

●

㉔

Contact output 2

NochangeON / OFF /No change

Specify operation of contact output
2.

–

–

–

●

*1

For the audio channel, you can select the following channels.
・In the [Voice Registration] screen, channel with registered audio
・Preset channel*2

When [Busy output] is specified in [Function] in [Contact output setting], this function is not operated.

296

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.3. SNMP Device Monitoring Settings
9.3.3.1. Basic Settings
You can perform the SNMP Device Monitoring Functionʼs authentication settings.

④ ③ ② ①⑤ ⑥ ⑦

When ⑤ [Security Level] is set to [AuthNoPriv]

When ⑤ [Security Level] is set to [AuthPriv]

When ⑤ [Security Level] is set to [noAuthNoPriv]

⑤
⑥
⑦
⑧
⑨

⑤

297

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
No.

Item

Default Value

Input Range

Description

Enabled /Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or[Disabled] the SNMP Device
Monitoring Function.

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

●

●

●

●

32 single-bytealphanumeric Enter the name for setting
characters and SNMP v1/v2c.
underscore ( _ )

●

●

●

●

①

SNMP Device
Monitoring Function②

GET Community
Namepublic③Connection
Destination Number

Host 1

Host 1 to 20

Select the setting numberof the monitoring target toconnect with via SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

④

Username(Blank)32 single-bytealphanumericcharacters

Set the user name used forauthentication in SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑤

Security Level

AuthPriv

noAuthNoPriv /Select the security level for
AuthNoPriv /authentication in SNMP v3.
AuthPriv

●

●

●

●

⑥

Authentication
methodMD5

MD5 / SHA1

Select the Authentication
method for authentication in
SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑦

Authentication
password(Blank)8 to 64
single-bytealphanumericcharacters

Register the authentication
password.

●

●

●

●

⑧

Encryption Method

DES

DES / AES

Select the Encryption Method
for authentication in SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑨

Encryption
Password(Blank)8 to 64
single-bytealphanumericcharacters

Register the Encrypted
Password.

●

●

●

●

Disabled298

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.3.2. Match Detection Settings
You can perform the SNMP Device Monitoring Functionʼs Match Detection settings.

⑧⑥ ⑤ ④ ③ ② ①⑦ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪

⑫
⑯
⑳

㉑
㉒

㉓
㉔

⑰
⑱
⑲

㉕

㉖
㉗

㉘
⑫

⑯
㉑

⑳

㉒

㉓
㉔

㉕

㉖
㉗
NHB

㉙

㉘

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is specified

⑬
⑭

⑮

299

⑰
⑱
⑲

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction ManualNo.

Default
Value

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
Input Range

Description①

Condition
Match
Settings Number Detection 1

Match Detection
1 to 20②Equipment
Name(Blank)③

Monitored
Address

④
⑤

⑥

⑦

Item

(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect the condition settings
number to set.

●

●

●

●

32 single-byteor double-bytecharacters

Register the name of themonitored equipment.

●

●

●

●

(Blank)IP Address Format(v4/v6) or host name(63 characters)

Register the monitored
address.

●

●

●

●

SNMP Version

v2c

v1 / v2c / v3

Set the SNMP version to use.

●

●

●

●

SNMPv3
Certification(when SNMP
version v3 isselected)

1

1 to 20

As set in [Basic Settings],
specify the [Connection
Destination Number].

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Select the monitoring
frequency of the target
equipment.

●

●

●

●

Enabled / Disabled

Select either [Enabled] or[Disabled] for the releasecondition on a communication
timeout.

●

●

●

●

0

0 to 10

Select the number of SNMP
Command transmissions until
a communication timeout isidentified.

●

●

●

●

Red, Amber,
Green, Blue,WhiteNo change

Continuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

Select each color of the
Signal Tower.

●

●

●

●

Color

Red / Amber / Green /Blue / White / Purple / Specify the color of the MultiNo changeLight blue /color unit.
No change

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

OID

SeriesValue⑨

Monitoring
Period (0-60)
sec.

⑩

ReleaseConditions⑪

Number of
retries (0 ～ 10)⑬⑭

NHV Series

NHB
Series⑧⑫

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Pattern(Blank)Integer(Blank)0

Disabled

No change

Register the OID of the
127 numericmonitoring target. Also, selectcharacters and period
either [Specified OID Only], or(.)[All Specified OID Below].
Integer /OCTET STRING(String) /OCTET STRING(Binary)

Select the type of thevariable-bindings OID toreceive.

0 to 2147483647 /63 single-byteEnter the value of variablecharacters / 16 bytes
bindings to receive.
(including comma as
1Byte)
0 to 60

Continuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

Specify the lighting pattern of
the Multi-color unit.

300

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

⑮

⑯

⑰

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)

Default
Value

Input Range

BuzzerNochangeStop /
Buzzer pattern 1 /Buzzer pattern 2 /Buzzer pattern 3 /Buzzer pattern 4 /Buzzer pattern 5 /No change

Audio

No
changeNo.

Item

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect the buzzer soundpattern.

●

–

–

–

Stop /
One-shot playback / Select the audio playback
Repeat playback / pattern.
No Change

–

●

●

●

Set the number of times torepeat. In addition to normal
audio playback, the audio isrepeated the specified numberof times. If the number oftimes to repeat is set to 255,
playback is endless.

–

●

●

●

Select a registered channel.

–

●

●

●

Audio
(when [Repeat
playback] is selected)

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

0

0 to 255⑱

Audio Channel*¹

Not
selected

Not selected /⑲

Send email

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send email.

●

●

●

●

⑳

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select a subject for the email.

●

●

●

●

㉑

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of theemail.

●

●

●

●

㉒

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)–

Select the email recipient.

●

●

●

●

㉓

SNMP Notification

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
SNMP Notification.

●

●

●

●

㉔

Send HTTP
CommandDisabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send HTTP Command.

●

●

●

●

㉕

HTTP Command
Sending Settings(Not
selected)–

Select the recipient of the
HTTP Command.

●

●

●

●

㉖

Send MQTT

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send MQTT.

●

●

●

●

㉗

Contact output 1*²

NochangeOFF / ON / NochangeSpecify operation of contact
output 1.

–

–

–

●

㉘

Contact output 2

NochangeOFF / ON / NochangeSpecify operation of contact
output 2.

–

–

–

●

㉙

Re-evaluation of
Match

(Not
selected)

For the release condition
operation, select the condition
settings number that isreturned to monitoring status.

●

●

●

●

*1

*2

1 to 71–

For audio, you can select the following channels.
・In the [Voice Registration] screen, channel with registered audio
・Preset channel
When [Busy output] is specified in [Function] in [Contact output setting], this function is not operated.

301

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.3.3. Change Detection Settings
You can perform SNMP Device Monitoring Functionʼs Detect Change settings.

⑦ ⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑥

⑧

⑬

⑫
⑯

⑰

⑲
⑳

⑱
㉑

㉒
㉓
NHB

㉔
In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is specified

⑨
⑩

⑪

302

⑭
⑮

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)

Item

Default
Value

Input Range①

Condition Settings
NumberChangedetection
1

Change detection
1 to 5②

Equipment Name

(Blank)32 single-byteor double-bytecharacters③

Monitored Address(Blank)④

SNMP Version

v1

v1 / v2c / v3⑤

SNMPv3
Certification(when SNMP
version v3 isselected)

1⑥

Monitored OID⑦

Monitoring Period(0-60) sec.

No.

⑧

⑨

⑩

⑪

⑫

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect the condition settings
number to set.

●

●

●

●

Register the name of themonitored equipment.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Set the SNMP version to use.

●

●

●

●

1 to 20

As set in [Basic Settings],
specify the [Connection
Destination Number].

●

●

●

●

(Blank)127 numericcharacters andperiod ( . )Register the OID of themonitoring target.

●

●

●

●

0

0 to 60

Select the monitoring
frequency of the target
equipment.

●

●

●

●

Red, Amber,
Green, Blue,
White

No
changeContinuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

Select each color of the Signal
Tower.

●

●

●

●

Color

No
changeRed / Amber / Green/
Blue / White / Purple/ Specify the color of the MultiLight blue / Nocolor unit.
change

●

●

●

●

No
changeContinuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

Specify the lighting pattern of
the Multi-color unit.

●

●

●

●

BuzzerNochangeStop /
Buzzer pattern 1 /Buzzer pattern 2 /Buzzer pattern 3 /Buzzer pattern 4 /Buzzer pattern 5 /No change

Select the buzzer soundpattern.

●

–

–

–

Audio

No
changeStop /
One-shot playback / Select the audio playback
Repeat playback / pattern.
No Change

–

●

●

●

–

●

●

●

Pattern

IP Address Format
Register the monitored(v4/v6) or host nameaddress.
(63 characters)

Audio

⑬

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions(when [Repeat
playback] isselected)0

0 to 255

Set the number of times torepeat. In addition to normal
audio playback, the audio isrepeated the specified numberof times. If the number oftimes to repeat is set to 255,
playback is endless.

303

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

Default
Value

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect a registered channel.

–

●

●

●

⑭

Audio Channel*¹

Not
selected

Not selected /⑮

Send email

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send email.

●

●

●

●

⑯

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select a subject for the email.

●

●

●

●

⑰

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of theemail.

●

●

●

●

⑱

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)–

Select the email recipient.

●

●

●

●

⑲

SNMP Notification

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
SNMP Notification.

●

●

●

●

⑳

Send HTTP
CommandDisabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send HTTP Command.

●

●

●

●

㉑

HTTP Command
Sending Settings(Not
selected)–

Select the recipient of the
HTTP Command.

●

●

●

●

㉒

Send MQTT

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send MQTT.

●

●

●

●

㉓

Contact output 1*²

NochangeOFF / ON /No change

Specify operation of contact
output 1.

–

–

–

●

㉔

Contact output 2

NochangeOFF / ON /No change

Specify operation of contact
output 2.

–

–

–

●

*1

*2

1 to 71

For the audio channel, you can select the following channels.
・In the [Voice Registration] screen, channel with registered audio
・Preset channel
When [Busy output] is specified in [Function] in [Contact output setting], this function is not operated.

304

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.4. Contact Input Setting
9.3.4.1. Status Change Detection Settings

NHV Series ( D model)

Set the operation to run when there is a state change in contact input.

④ ③ ② ①

⑤
⑧
⑪
⑫

⑬
⑭

⑮
⑯

⑨
⑩

⑰
⑱
⑳

⑲
㉑
⑤
⑧
⑪
⑫

⑬
⑭

⑮
⑯

⑰
⑱
⑳

⑲
㉑
In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is specified

⑥
⑦

305

⑨
⑩

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

Default
Value

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelContact input 1 to 4

Select the contact input number
to set.

–

–

–

●

Enabled / Disabled①

Port Selection

Contact
input 1②

Contact input ■ *¹

Disabled

You can select to [Enabled] or[Disabled] the specified contact
input.

–

–

–

●

③

Boolean value

Select the [Boolean Value] asContact
Contact A / Contact B
either [Contact A] or [Contact B].
A

–

–

–

●

Signal Definition

Select the signal definition as
ON Status Change /OFF[ON Status Change], [OFF
Status OFF Status Change /Status Change], or [Status
Status change
Changechange].

–

–

–

●

④

⑤

⑥

⑦

⑧

Red, Amber,
Green, Blue, WhiteNo
changeContinuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

Select each color of the Signal
Tower.

–

–

–

●

Color

No
changeRed / Amber / Green/
Blue / White /Specify the color of the MultiPurple/ Light blue / color unit.
No change

–

–

–

●

PatternNochangeContinuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

–

–

–

●

Audio

No
changeStop /
One-shot playback / Select the audio playback
Repeat playback / pattern.
No change

–

–

–

●

Set the number of times torepeat. In addition to normal
audio playback, the audio isrepeated the specified numberof times. If the number oftimes to repeat is set to 255,
playback is endless.

–

–

–

●

Select a registered channel.

–

–

–

●

Specify the lighting pattern of
the Multi-color unit.

⑨

Audio
(when [Repeat
playback] isselected)0

0 to 255⑩

Audio Channel*²

Not
selected

Not selected /⑪

Send email

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send email.

–

–

–

●

⑫

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select a subject for the email.

–

–

–

●

⑬

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of theemail.

–

–

–

●

⑭

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)–

Select the email recipient.

–

–

–

●

⑮

SNMP Notification

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
SNMP Notification.

–

–

–

●

⑯

Send HTTP
CommandDisabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send HTTP Command.

–

–

–

●

1 to 71306

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

Default
Value⑰

HTTP Command
Sending Settings⑱

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

Description(Notselected)

Send MQTT⑲

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model–Select the recipient of the HTTP
Command.

–

–

–

●

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send MQTT.

–

–

–

●

Contact output 1*³

NochangeOFF / ON /No change

Specify operation of contact
output 1.

–

–

–

●

⑳

Contact output 2

NochangeOFF / ON /No change

Specify operation of contact
output 2.

–

–

–

●

㉑

Clear conditions(Not
selected)–

Select the condition to reset themeasurement time of the Match
Detection Settings.

–

–

–

●

*1
*2

*3

■ is a contact input number.
For the audio channel, you can select the following channels.
・In the [Voice Registration] screen, channel with registered audio
・Preset channel
When [Busy output] is specified in [Function] in [Contact output setting], this function is not operated.

307

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9.3.4.2. Match Detection Settings

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

NHV Series ( D model)

Set the operation to run when there is a condition match in contact input.

⑤④ ③ ② ①

⑥
⑩
⑪
⑫

⑨
⑬

⑭
⑮

⑯
⑰

⑱

⑲
⑳

㉑

In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is specified

⑦
⑧

No.

Item

①

Condition Settings
Number②

Port number③

Input time (0-3600)
sec.

④

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)

Default
Value

Input Range

Condition
1

Condition 1 to 4
None /

Clear Conditions

None

Contact input
1 to 40

0 to 3600

Disabled

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect the condition settings
number to set.

–

–

–

●

Select the contact input
number for performing thecondition setting.

–

–

–

●

Set the input time.

–

–

–

●

–

–

–

●

You can select to [Enabled] or[Disabled] the clear function
Enabled / Disabled
for when the Clear button ispressed.

308

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

⑤

⑥

⑦

⑧

⑨

Item

Default
Value

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
Input Range

Description

Disabled

Red, Amber,
Green, Blue, WhiteColorNHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelEnabled / Disabled

After the conditions match,
you can select to [Enabled] or[Disabled] re-evaluating thesame condition.

–

–

–

●

No
changeContinuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

Select each color of the Signal
Tower.

–

–

–

●

No
changeRed / Amber / Green /Blue / White / Purple/ Specify the color of the MultiLight blue /color unit.
No change

–

–

–

●

PatternNochangeContinuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /OFF / No change

Specify the lighting pattern of
the Multi-color unit.

–

–

–

●

Audio

No
changeStop /
One-shot playback /Repeat playback /No Change

Select the audio playback
pattern.

–

–

–

●

Set the number of times torepeat. In addition to normal
audio playback, the audio isrepeated the specified numberof times. If the number oftimes to repeat is set to 255,
playback is endless.

–

–

–

●

Select a registered channel.

–

–

–

●

Re-evaluation

⑩

Audio
(when [Repeat
playback] isselected)0

0 to 255⑪

Audio Channel*¹

Not
selected

Not selected /⑫

Send email

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send email.

–

–

–

●

⑬

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select a subject for the email.

–

–

–

●

⑭

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of theemail.

–

–

–

●

⑮

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)–

Select the email recipient.

–

–

–

●

⑯

SNMP Notification

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
SNMP Notification.

–

–

–

●

⑰

Send HTTP
CommandDisabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send HTTP Command.

–

–

–

●

1 to 71309

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

No.

Item

Default
Value⑱

HTTP Command
Sending Settings(Not
selected)–⑲

Send MQTT

Disabled⑳

Contact output 1*²㉑

Contact output 2*1*2

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect the recipient of the
HTTP Command.

–

–

–

●

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send MQTT.

‒

–

–

●

No
changeOFF / ON /No change

Specify operation of contact
output 1.

–

–

–

●

No
changeOFF / ON /No change

Specify operation of contact
output 2.

–

–

–

●

For the audio channel, you can select the following channels.
・In the [Voice Registration] screen, channel with registered audio
・Preset channel
When [Busy output] is specified in [Function] in [Contact output setting], this function is not operated.

310

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9.3.5. Mail Detection Setting

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

NHV Series

Configure the setting for detecting emails and the operation to perform when emails are detected.

9.3.5.1. Mail Server Settings
Mail server is undefined⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑬ ⑭ ⑮

Gmail server is specified and OAUTH2 is selected⑫ ⑪ ⑩ ⑥311

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Outlook server is specified and OAUTH2 is selected⑪ ⑩ ⑨ ⑧ ⑦⑫

POP is specified⑯

312Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
No.

Item

Default Value①

Incoming mailserver(Blank)②

ProtocolIMAP③

Mail server
port number④

Authentication
method⑤Input Range

Description

IP Address Format
Enter the mail server(v4/v6) or host nameaddress.
(63 characters)

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

–

●

●

●

IMAP / POP

Select the protocol for the
mail server.

–

●

●

●

993

1 to 65535

Enter the mail server port
number. The default port
for each protocol is enteredwhen the protocol is selected.

–

●

●

●

Password
Authentication

Password
Authentication /OAUTH2*¹

Select either [Password
Authentication] or [OAuth2].

–

●

●

●

Encryption
MethodSSL/TLS

SSL/TLS /STARTTLS /None

Select [SSL/TLS],[STARTTLS], or [None].

–

●

●

●

⑥

Credential––

Upload the Credential file.

–

●

●

●

⑦

Client ID(Blank)127 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol charactersEnter the client ID.

–

●

●

●

⑧

Authorization
Endpoint URL(Blank)511 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol charactersEnter the authorization
endpoint URL.

–

●

●

●

⑨

Token
Endpoint URL(Blank)511 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol charactersEnter the Token Endpoint
URL.

–

●

●

●

⑩

State

EnabledEnabled / Disabled

Select either [Enabled] or[Disabled] for the State.

–

●

●

●

⑪

Acquisition of
authorization
code

–

–

For an OAuth2 connection,
get an authorization code.

–

●

●

●

⑫

Authorization
code entry(Blank)–Enter the authorization code
you retrieved.

–

●

●

●

⑬

Username(Blank)63 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol charactersEnter a user name for
Password Authentication.

–

●

●

●

⑭

Password(Blank)32 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol charactersEnter the password for
Password Authentication.

–

●

●

●

⑮

Mail checkinterval (103600) sec.

10

10 to 3600

Specify the interval forchecking the mail server.

–

●

●

●

⑯

Delete themail in theserver after
receiving.*²

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Specify the interval forchecking the mail server.

–

●

●

●

*1

*2

You can select [OAUTH2] when one of the following addresses is specified as the [Incoming mail server].
・Gmail server: imap.gmail.com pop.gmail.com
・Outlook server: outlook.office365.com
Setting is available only when [POP] is selected.

313

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.5.2. Filter Rule Settings

①
②
③
⑤
⑥
⑲
㉒
㉓

⑱
⑳
㉑
㉕
㉖
㉗

㉔

When you specify [Multi-Color Unit] in [Additional Units]

When you specify [Read aloud the contents of the email]

④
⑦
⑩
⑪
⑭
⑮
When you specify [Control by the contents of the email]

314

⑨

⑰

⑧
⑫
⑬
⑯

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

Default
Value

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
Input Range

Description

1 to 20NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect the condition number to
set in a filter rule.

–

●

●

●

Meets all of theSpecify the match condition for
Meets all offollowing / Meets one of when multiple filter rules are
the following
the following / None
set.

–

●

●

●

Select the content to detect.

–

●

●

●

Enter the text to detect.

–

●

●

●

1

SenderSender / Subject /Body text(Blank)63 characters

Matcheswith

Matches with /Beginning with /Include / Be free of

Select the matching condition.

–

●

●

●

Basic
operations

Basic Operations /Specify the operation when theReading Aloud Emailfilter rule is matched.
/Mail Control

–

●

●

●

Red / Amber /Green / Blue /White

No change

OFF / Continuous ON/ Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /No change

Select each color of the Signal
Tower.

–

●

●

●

Color

No change

Red / Amber / Green /Blue / White / Purple /Light blue / No change

Specify the color of the Multicolor unit.

–

●

●

●

Pattern

No change

OFF / Continuous ON/ Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 /Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 / NochangeSpecify the lighting pattern of theMulti-color unit.

–

●

●

●

⑤

Audio

No change

Stop / One-shot
Select the audio playback
playback / Repeat
pattern.
playback / No change

–

●

●

●

⑥

Audio Channel

Not selected

–

●

●

●

⑦

Audio

No change

Stop / One-shot
In [Reading Aloud Email],playback / Repeat
select the audio playback
playback / No change pattern.

–

●

●

●

In [Reading Aloud Email],
Japanese / English / select either Japanese /Chinese (Mandarin)*2 English / Chinese (Mandarin)
for the playback language.

–

●

●

●

①

②

③

Conditions

Operation
settings④

Not selected /1 to 71*1

Select the registered channel.

⑧

Language

Japanese⑨

VoiceFemaleMale / Female

In [Reading Aloud Email],select either [Male] or [Female]for the voice used in playback.

–

●

●

●

⑩

Tone

0

-5 to 5

In [Reading Aloud Email], set
the tone of the audio playback.

–

●

●

●

⑪

Speed

0

-5 to 5

In [Reading Aloud Email],
set the speed of the audio
playback.

–

●

●

●

315

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model 🄳  Model⑫

Notification
Sound (Before)(Not
selected)(Not selected) /1 to 10

Set a notification sound to play
before the sound playback.

–

●

●

●

⑬

Notification
Sound (After)(Not
selected)(Not selected) /1 to 10

Set a notification sound to playafter the sound playback.

–

●

●

●

–

●

●

●

⑭

LineOut

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Select either [Enabled] or[Disabled] for LineOut outputof the audio to be played by[Reading Aloud Email].

⑮

Select a range
to read aloud(All selected)

Sender / Subject /Body text

Specify the email readout
range.

–

●

●

●

⑯

Omit range toread aloud""

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Select either [Enabled] or[Disabled] for omitting reading
aloud [Readout Range].

–

●

●

●

⑰

Automatic
extraction
function forreading aloudparts (only theemail body text)

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Select either [Enabled] or[Disabled] for automaticallyextracting the readout parts ofthe email body text.

–

●

●

●

⑱

Send email

Disabled

Enabled / DisabledSet [Enabled] or [Disabled] forSend email.

–

●

●

●

⑲

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select the subject of the email.

–

●

●

●

⑳

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of theemail.

–

●

●

●

㉑

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)-

Select an email recipient.

–

●

●

●

㉒

SNMP
Notification

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set SNMP Notification to[Enabled] or [Disabled].

–

●

●

●

㉓

Send HTTP
CommandDisabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set Send HTTP Command to[Enabled] or [Disabled].

–

●

●

●

㉔

HTTP Command
Sending Settings(Not
selected)-

Select the recipient of the
HTTP Command.

–

●

●

●

㉕

Send MQTT

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set Send MQTT to [Enabled]or [Disabled].

–

●

●

●

㉖

Contact
Output 1 *3

No change

OFF / ON /No change

Specify operation of Contact
Output 1.

–

–

–

●

㉗

Contact
Output 2

No change

OFF / ON /No change

Specify operation of Contact
Output 2.

–

–

–

●

*1

*2
*3

You can select the following audio channels.
・Channel with audio registered in the [Voice Registration] screen
・Preset channel"Chinese" will not be displayed for products that do not have the Voice Synthesizer of Chinese.
When [Busy output] is specified in [Function] in [Contact output setting], this function is not operated.

316

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.6. PLC Communication Function Settings
9.3.6.1. Basic Settings⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑥
⑩

NHB

⑭

⑮

⑰
⑱
⑳
㉑

⑲

⑯
㉒
In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is specified

⑦
⑧
⑨

317

⑪
⑫
⑬

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

Default
Value

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

Description①

PLC Information
Read Command
Disabled
Transmission Function

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)Enabled /Disabled

Select [Enabled] or [Disabled] for the
PLC Information Read Command
Function.

●

●

●

●

②

PLC Information
Write Command
Disabled
Transmission Function

Enabled /Disabled

Select [Enabled] or [Disabled] for the
PLC Information Write Command
Function.

●

●

●

●

③

PLC Write Count
Value Function

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Select [Enabled] or [Disabled] for the
PLC Count Value Write Function.

●

●

●

●

④

ProtocolSLMP(MC)SLMP(MC)/
FINS

Select a protocol to be used.

●

●

●

●

⑤

Transmission
Interval

100ms

10ms/50ms/
100ms

Select a transmission interval of the
PLC Information Read Command.

●

●

●

●

No
changeOFF /Continuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Flashing pattern 2 / Select each color of the Signal Tower.
Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /No change

●

●

●

●

No
changeRed / Amber /Green / Blue /Specify the color of the Multi- color
White / Purple /unit.
Light blue /No change

●

●

●

●

No
changeOFF /Continuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Specify the lighting pattern of the MultiFlashing pattern 2 /color unit.
Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /No change

●

●

●

●

BuzzerNochangeStop /
Buzzer pattern 1 /Buzzer pattern 2 /Buzzer pattern 3 /Buzzer pattern 4 /Buzzer pattern 5 /No change

●

–

–

–

⑩

Audio

No
changeStop /
One-shot playback /Select the audio playback pattern.
Repeat playback /No change

–

●

●

●

⑪

Audio (when"Repeat playback"is selected)

0

0 to 255

Set the number of times to repeat.
In addition to normal audio playback, theaudio is repeated the specified numberof times. If the number of times to repeat
is set to 255, playback is endless.

–

●

●

●

⑫

Audio Channel*1(Not
selected)

Not selected /1 to 71

Select the registered channel.

–

●

●

●

⑬

Send email

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled] Send
email.

●

●

●

●

⑭

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select a subject for the email.

●

●

●

●

⑮

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of the email.

●

●

●

●

⑯

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)-

Select an email recipient.

●

●

●

●

⑥

⑦

⑧

⑨

Red / Amber /Green / Blue / White

Color

Pattern

Select the buzzer sound pattern.

318

🄼  Model 🄳  ModelNetwork Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)Set SNMP Notification to [Enabled]or [Disabled].

●

●

●

●

🄼  Model 🄳  Model⑰

SNMP Notification

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled⑱

Send HTTP
CommandDisabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set Send HTTP Command to[Enabled] or [Disabled].

●

●

●

●

⑲

HTTP Command
Sending Settings(Not
selected)-

Select the recipient of the HTTP
Command.

●

●

●

●

⑳

Send MQTT

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set Send MQTT to [Enabled] or[Disabled].

●

●

●

●

㉑

Contact Output 1 *2NochangeOFF / ON / No
Specify operation of Contact Output 1.
change

–

–

–

●

㉒

Contact Output 2

NochangeOFF / ON / No
Specify operation of Contact Output 2.
change

–

–

–

●

*1

*2

You can select the following audio channels.
・Channel with audio registered in the [Voice Registration] screen
・Preset channel
When [Busy output] is specified in [Function] in [Contact output setting], this function is not operated.

319

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.6.2. PLC Information Read Command Settings⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑥
⑦
⑨
⑪

⑧
⑩
⑫
⑬

⑭
㉖

㉚

⑮
㉛

When [FINS] is specified for [Protocol] in Basic Settings

⑯
⑱
⑳
㉒
㉔
NHB

⑰
⑲
㉑

㉓
㉕
In [Additional units], [Multi-color unit] is specified

㉗
㉘
㉙

320

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

①

Setting Number②

Destination
adressDefault
Value
1（Blank）

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

1 to 16

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Enter the name od thecommand sending target(PLC)

●

●

●

●

Select a setting number for
setting the PLC Information
Read Command.

IP address format(v4) Enter the registered address ofthe command sending target.
Host name 63（PLC）
characters.

🄼  Model 🄳  Model③

Device Name

（Blank）

Up to 31 singlebyte or doublebyte characters
except single-byte
apostrophe[']④

Connection
Destination Port0

0 to 65535

Enter the local station port
number of the commandsending target(PLC

●

●

●

●

⑤

DesingnatedTransmissin
Port *500 to 65535

Set the port number of thisproduct.When 0 is set,thesource port can be any value.

●

●

●

●

⑥

ProtocolTCP

TCP/UDPSet the protocol to be used.

●

●

●

●

⑦

Timeout(1-10)
sec.

1

1 to 10

Enter the timeout period forreceiving a response.

●

●

●

●

Select whether a serial number
is assigned or not assigned.
Make sure to match the settingof the command sending
target(PLC).In the case of 3E
frame.select [Not assigned]

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

⑧

⑨

Serial No.

Not
assigned

Assigned/
Not assigned

00h:Local station
Network No.

001h to EFh:Other
stations.

Enter the network number to beaccessed.Make sure to matchthe setting of the commandsetting target(PLC).In the caseof a unit with an integrated
CPU/Ethernet interface. select[FFh:Loical station]

FFh:Local station⑩

01 to 78h:Station
number
Staion Number

1

7Dh:Designatedcontrol station
7Eh:Current contol
stationEnter the station number to beaccessed.Make sure to matchthe setting of the command.
sending target (PLC).In
the case of a unit with an
integrated CPU/Ethernet
interface.select [FFh:Local
station]⑪

Requestdestination
module i/o No.

Station⑫

DeviceInput(x*)*1

Select the type of the reading
device.

●

●

●

●

⑬

Read device

0

0 to 65535/
0000 to FFFFh

Enter the first number of thereading device.Make sure tomatch the format shown.

●

●

●

●

⑭

Number of
Device Points

1

1/2

Select the read points of thereading device.

●

●

●

●

Own

Own Station/Control Select the CPU unit to be
CPU/CPU1 to CPU4 accessed.

321

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

⑮

Item

Input Range(Blank)Change by the valueof read points
1:0000 to FFFFh
2:0000 to
FFFFFFFFh

Equal to⑯

DNA

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Opertion when
there is a match

00

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

🄼  Model 🄳  ModelEnter a device value to beacquired(response data) at
which it wil operate.
Specify using a hexadeccimal
number.

Equal to/Not equal to Set a condition under which/More than /Less than the acquireed device value(response data)will operate.
/ Or more /Or less

00 to 7Fh

Set the network address
number where the destination
node (PLC) exists.
00h: Local network
01 to 7Fh:Destination network
number⑰

DA1

00

00 to FFh

Set the node address of thedestination node (PLC).
00 to FFh: Node address ofdestination node set in PLC
Set the address of the unit in
the destination node (PLC).

⑱

DA2

00

00 to FEh

00h:CPU Unit
10 to 1Fh:CPU Bus Unit
E1h:Inner Board
FEh: Unit connected to network

⑲

SNA

00

00 to 7Fh

Set the address number of thesource (NHB/NHV) network.
01 to 7Fh: Source network
number
Set the Source node address(NHB/NHV).
・TCP
00h: Automatic setting
01 to FEh: Any value
・UDP

⑳

SA1

00

00 to FEh

01 to FEh: Any value*Node address with any value
If you set other SA1 set a valuethat does not overlap with.
*If you set 00h (automatic
setting) in TCP, please set"FINS/TCP Connection
Settings" on the PLC.

322

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

㉑

SA2

㉒

SID

㉓

DeviceDefault
Value00

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

Description

00 / 10 to 1Fh

Set the address of the sender(NHB/NHV).

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

🄼  Model 🄳  Model

00,10 to 1Fh: Any value
00

00 to FFh

Sets the source(NHB/NHV)
process identifier.
00 to FFh: Any value

CIO [bit]*2

Set the type of I/O memory.
Set the reading start device (3bytes).

㉔

Beginning
address*If the device is a channel,
000000000000 to FFFFFFh

Address (2byte) + 00h*If the device is a bit,
Address (2byte) + bit number(1byte)㉕

Number ofelements1

1/2

Set the number of read data
elements.

㉖

Red / Amber /Green / Blue /White

No change

OFF / Continuous ON/ Flashing pattern 1/ Flashing pattern 2 / Select each color of the Signal
Flashing pattern 3 /Tower.
Flashing pattern 4 / Nochange㉗

Color

No change

Red / Amber / Green /Blue / White / Purple /Light blue / No change

Specify the color of the Multicolor unit.

●

●

●

●

No change

OFF / Continuous ON/ Flashing pattern 1/ Flashing pattern 2 / Specify the lighting pattern ofFlashing pattern 3 /the Multi-color unit.
Flashing pattern 4 / Nochange●●●●Select the buzzer soundpattern.

●

–

–

–

Select the audio playback
pattern.

–

●

●

●

－

●

●

●

㉘

Pattern㉙

BuzzerNo change

Stop / Buzzer pattern
1 / Buzzer pattern 2/ Buzzer pattern 3/ Buzzer pattern 4 /Buzzer pattern 5 / Nochange㉚

Audio

No change

Stop / One-shot
playback / Repeat
playback / No change

00 to 255

Set the number of times torepeat.
In addition to normal audio
playback, the audio is repeatedthe specified number of times.
If the number of times torepeat is set to 255, playback
is endless.

Audio Channel*3(Not
selected)

Not selected /1 to 71

Select the registered channel.

－

●

●

●

㉝

Send email

Disabled

Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send email.

●

●

●

●

㉞

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select a subject for the email.

●

●

●

●

㉟

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of theemail.

●

●

●

●

㉛

Audio (when"Repeatplayback" isselected)㉜

323

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Input Range㊱

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)-㊲

SNMP Notification

Disabled㊳

Send HTTP
Command

㊴

No.

Item

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)Select an email recipient.

●

●

●

●

Enabled /Disabled

Set SNMP Notification to [Enabled]or [Disabled].

●

●

●

●

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set Send HTTP Command to[Enabled] or [Disabled].

●

●

●

●

HTTP Command
Sending Settings(Not
selected)-

Select the recipient of the HTTP
Command.

●

●

●

●

㊵

Send MQTT

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set Send MQTT to [Enabled] or[Disabled].

●

●

●

●

㊶

Contact Output 1 *4

NochangeOFF / ON / No
Specify operation of Contact Output 1.
change

–

–

–

●

㊷

Contact Output 2

NochangeOFF / ON / No
Specify operation of Contact Output 2.
change

–

–

–

●

*1

🄼  Model 🄳  Model

You can set the following devices.
DeviceDevice code binary (ASCII)

Type

Input (X*)

9CH

Hexadecimal

Output (Y*)

9DH

Hexadecimal

Internal relay (M*)

90H

DecimalLatching relay (L*)

92H

Annunciator (F*)

93H

DecimalEdge relay (V*)

94H

DecimalLink relay (B*)

A0H

Hexadecimal

Data register (D*)

ABH

DecimalLink register (W*)

B4H

Hexadecimal

Timer (TN)C2H

Accumulation timer (STN)

C8H

DecimalCounter (CN)C5H

DecimalLink special relay (SB)

A1H

Bit

Hexadecimal

Link special register (SW)

B5H

Word

Hexadecimal

Direct input (DX)

A2H

Direct output (DY)

A3H

Index register (Z*)

CCH

Bit

Word

Bit
Word

324

Specified range

DecimalDecimalHexadecimal
Hexadecimal
Decimal0 to 65535 fordecimal0000 to FFFFh forhexadecimalSpecify in therange of the device
numbers ownedby the units to beaccessed.

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

*2

*3
*4
*5

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

You can set the following devices.
DeviceDevice code binary(ASCII)Type

CIO [Bit]

30H

Bit

CIO [Word]

B0H

Word (Channel)

Work [Bit]

31H

Bit

Work [Word]

B1H

Word (Channel)

Holding Bit [Bit]

32H

Bit

Holding Bit [Word]

B2H

Word (Channel)

Auxiliary Bit [Bit]

33H

Bit

Auxiliary Bit [Word]

B3H

Word (Channel)

Timer [Completion Flag]

09H

Counter [Completion Flag]

09H

Timer [PV]89HCounter [PV]89H

DM [Bit]

02H

Bit

DM [Word]

82H

Word (Channel)

Task Flag [Bit]

06H

Bit

Task Flag [Status]

46H

Index Register (IR)

DCH

Data Register (DR)BCH

Clock Pulses [bit]07H

Condition Flag [Bit]07H

Specified range

000000 to FFFFFFh

Bit
Hexadecimal
Word (Channel)

Specify in the rangeof the device numbers
owned by the units tobe accessed.

Word (Channel)

Bit

You can select the following audio channels.
・Channel with audio registered in the [Voice Registration] screen
・Preset channel
When [Busy output] is specified in [Function] in [Contact output setting], this function is not operated.
If you set the designated transmission port to a value other than 0, please set a different port number for eachsetting number.

325

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.6.3. PLC Information Write Command Settings⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑥
⑦
⑨
⑫

⑧
⑩
⑪

⑬

When [FINS] is specified for [Protocol] in Basic Settings

⑭
⑯
⑱
⑳
㉒

No.

Item

⑮
⑰
⑲

㉑
㉓

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Input Range

1

1 to 4
IP address format(v4)
Host name63 characters

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)Select a setting number for setting
the PLC Information Write Command.

●

●

●

●

Enter the registered address ofthe command sending target(PLC).

●●●●Up to 31 single-byte or Enter the name of the
double-byte characterscommand sending target
except single-byte(PLC).
apostrophe [']

●

●

●

●

🄼  Model 🄳  Model①

Setting Number②

Destination
Address(Blank)③

Device Name

(Blank)④

Connection
Destination Port0

0 to 65535

Enter the local station port
number of the commandsending target (PLC).

●

●

●

●

⑤

ProtocolTCP

TCP/UDPSet the protocol to be used.

●

●

●

●

Add / Not Add

Select whether a serial number
is assigned or not assigned.
Make sure to match the settingof the command sending target(PLC).In the case of 3E frame,
select [Not assigned].

●

●

●

●

⑥

Serial No.

Not Add326

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

⑦

Item

Default
Value

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

00h: Local station
Network No.

0⑧

Station Number

1⑨

Requestdestination
module I/O No.

Own
Station⑩

Device9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

01 to EFh: Other
stations

FFh: Local station
01 to 78h: Station
number
7Dh: Designatedcontrol station
7Eh: Current control
stationDescription

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)Enter the network number tobe accessed.
Make sure to match the settingof the command sending target(PLC).
In the case of a unit with an
integrated CPU/Ethernet
interface, select [00: Local
station].

●

●

●

●

Enter the station number to beaccessed.
Make sure to match the settingof the command sending target(PLC).
In the case of a unit with an
integrated CPU/Ethernet interface,select [FFh: Local station].

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Own Station / Control Select the CPU unit to be
CPU / CPU1 to CPU4 accessed.

🄼  Model 🄳  Model

Internal
Relay (M*)*1

Select the type of the writing
device.

●

●

●

●

⑪

Write Device

0

0 to 65535 / 0000 to
FFFFh

Enter the first number of thewriting device. Make sure tomatch the format shown.

●

●

●

●

⑫

Number of
Device Points

1

1/2

Select the points of the writing
device.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

⑬

⑭

Write DataDNA

(Blank)00

Change by the valueof write points
Enter the data to write.
1: 0000 to FFFFh
2: 0000 to FFFFFFFFh

00 to 7Fh

Set the network address
number where the destination
node (PLC) exists.
00h: Local network
01 to 7Fh:Destination network
number⑮

DA1

00

00 to FFh

Set the node address of thedestination node (PLC).
00 to FFh: Node address ofdestination node set in PLC
Set the address of the unit in
the destination node (PLC).

⑯

DA2

00

00 to FEh

00h:CPU Unit
10 to 1Fh:CPU Bus Unit
E1h:Inner Board
FEh: Unit connected to network327

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

⑰

Item

SNA

Default
Value00

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

00 to 7Fh

Description
Set the address number of thesource (NHB/NHV) network.
01 to 7Fh: Source network
numberNHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

🄼  Model 🄳  Model

Set the Source node address(NHB/NHV).
・TCP
00h: Automatic setting
01 to FEh: Any value
・UDP

⑱

SA1

00

00 to FEh

01 to FEh: Any value*Node address with any value
If you set other SA1 set a valuethat does not overlap with.
*If you set 00h (automatic
setting) in TCP, please set"FINS/TCP Connection
Settings" on the PLC.

⑲

SA2

⑳

SID

㉑

Device00

00 / 10 to 1Fh

Set the address of the sender(NHB/NHV).
00,10 to 1Fh: Any value

00

00 to FFh

Sets the source(NHB/NHV)
process identifier.
00 to FFh: Any value

CIO [bit]*2

Set the type of I/O memory.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

㉒

Beginning
address

000000000000 to FFFFFFh

Set the reading start device (3bytes).
*If the device is a channel,
Address (2byte) + 00h*If the device is a bit,
Address (2byte) + bit number(1byte)㉓

Number ofelements1

1/2

Set the number of read data
elements.

328

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual*1*2

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

You can set the following devices.
DeviceDevice code binary(ASCII)

Internal relay (M*)

90H

DecimalLatching relay (L*)

92H

DecimalAnnunciator (F*)

93H

Edge relay (V*)

94H

DecimalLink relay (B*)

A0H

Hexadecimal

Data register (D*)

ABH

DecimalLink register (W*)

B4H

Hexadecimal

Timer (TN)C2H

Accumulation timer (STN)

C8H

DecimalCounter (CN)C5H

DecimalLink special relay (SB)

A1H

Link special register (SW)

B5H

Index register (Z*)

CCH

Type

Specified range

Decimal

Bit

Word

Bit

Decimal0 to 65535 for decimal
0000 to FFFFh for hexadecimal

Hexadecimal

Word

Hexadecimal
Decimal

You can set the following devices.
DeviceDevice code binary(ASCII)Type

CIO [Bit]

30H

Bit

CIO [Word]

B0H

Word (Channel)

Work [Bit]

31H

Bit

Work [Word]

B1H

Word (Channel)

Holding Bit [Bit]

32H

Bit

Holding Bit [Word]

B2H

Word (Channel)

Auxiliary Bit [Bit]

33H

Bit

Auxiliary Bit [Word]

B3H

Timer [PV]89HCounter [PV]89H

DM [Bit]

02H

DM [Word]

82H

Index register (IR)

DCH

Data register (DR)

BCH

Word (Channel)
Bit
Word (Channel)

329

Specified range

000000 to FFFFFFh
HexadecimalSpecify in the rangeof the device numbers
owned by the units to beaccessed.

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.3.6.4. PLC Write Count Value Settings⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑥
⑧
⑩
⑬

⑦
⑨
⑪
⑫

When [FINS] is specified for [Protocol] in Basic Settings

⑭
⑯
⑱
⑳
㉒

No.

Item

⑮
⑰
⑲

㉑
㉓
Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Input Range

1

1 to 4
IP address format(v4)
Host name63 characters

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)Select a setting number for
setting the Count Value Write
Command.

●

●

●

●

Enter the registered address ofthe command sending target(PLC).

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

🄼  Model 🄳  Model①

Setting Number②

Destination
Address(Blank)③

Device Name

(Blank)④

Connection
Destination Port0

0 to 65535

Enter the local station port number ofthe command sending target (PLC).

●

●

●

●

⑤

ProtocolTCP

TCP/UDPSet the protocol to be used.

●

●

●

●

⑥

Writing Cycle (110) Sec

10

1 to 10

Enter the cycle at which Count
Value Write is executed.

●

●

●

●

Assigned /Not assigned

Select whether a serial number
is assigned or not assigned.
Make sure to match the settingof the command sending target(PLC). In the case of 3E frame,
select [Not assigned].

●

●

●

●

⑦

Serial No.

Not
assigned

Up to 31 single-byte orEnter the name of the
double-byte characterscommand sending target
except single-byte(PLC).
apostrophe [']330

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

⑧

Item

Default
Value

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

00h: Local station
Network No.

0

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

01 to EFh: Other
stations
FFh: Local station
01 to 78h: Station
number
7Dh: Designatedcontrol station
7Eh: Current control
stationDescription

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)Enter the network number
to be accessed. Make sure
to match the setting of thecommand sending target(PLC). In the case of a unit
with an integrated CPU/
Ethernet interface, select [00:Local station].

●

●

●

●

Enter the station number to beaccessed. Make sure to matchthe setting of the commandsending target (PLC). In thecase of a unit with an integrated
CPU/Ethernet interface, select[FFh: Local station].

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

🄼  Model 🄳  Model⑨

Station Number

1⑩

Requestdestination
module I/O No.

Own
Station⑪

DeviceDataregister(D*)

Data register (D*)

Select the type of the writing
device.
*Cannot select anything otherthan Data Register(D*).

⑫

Write Device

0

0 to 65535 /
0000 to FFFFh

Enter the first number of thewriting device. Make sure tomatch the format shown.

●

●

●

●

⑬

Number of
Device Points

1

1

Select the points of the writing
device.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

⑭

DNA

00

Own Station / Control Select the CPU unit to be
CPU / CPU1 to CPU4 accessed.

00 to 7Fh

Set the network address
number where the destination
node (PLC) exists.
00h: Local network
01 to 7Fh:Destination network
number⑮

DA1

00

00 to FFh

Set the node address of thedestination node (PLC).
00 to FFh: Node address ofdestination node set in PLC
Set the address of the unit in
the destination node (PLC).

⑯

DA2

00

00 to FEh

00h:CPU Unit
10 to 1Fh:CPU Bus Unit
E1h:Inner Board
FEh: Unit connected to network

⑰

SNA

00

00 to 7Fh

Set the address number of thesource (NHB/NHV) network.
01 to 7Fh: Source network
number331

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

Default
Value

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

🄼  Model 🄳  Model

Set the Source node address(NHB/NHV).
・TCP
00h: Automatic setting
01 to FEh: Any value
・UDP

⑱

SA1

00

00 to FEh

01 to FEh: Any value*Node address with any value
If you set other SA1 set a valuethat does not overlap with.
*If you set 00h (automatic
setting) in TCP, please set"FINS/TCP Connection
Settings" on the PLC.

⑲

SA2

⑳

SID

㉑

Device00

00 / 10 to 1Fh

Set the address of the sender(NHB/NHV).
00,10 to 1Fh: Any value

00

00 to FFh

Sets the source(NHB/NHV)
process identifier.
00 to FFh: Any valueDMDM

Set the type of I/O memory.
*Cannot select anything otherthan DM.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

㉒

Beginning
address

000000000000 to FFFFFFh

Set the reading start device (3bytes).
*If the device is a channel,
Address (2byte) + 00h*If the device is a bit,
Address (2byte) + bit number(1byte)㉓

Number ofelements

1

1

Set the number of write data
elements.

332

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Notes on using FINS
1) Please configure the IP address, FINS/UDP, FINS/TCP port (server specification/Keep-alive) settings, etc. to be used on the
PLC side.
2) It is possible to traverse up to 3 networks, including the local network.
3) Please check the range of usable devices in the manual of the PLC you are using.
Settings for the device and address range to be used may be required on the PLC side.
Also, when setting the start address, consider the number of elements used (1 point or 2 points) and the data length per element of the device used, and set it so that the address range does not exceed.
Example: Index register Data length per element: 4 bytes: The number of elements can only be set to “1”.
Example: Setting the start address
DeviceData memory (DM) [bit]Data memory (DM) [channel]

Setting details
D32767.15: 15th bit of data memory D32767ch
D32767: Data memory D32767ch

Value
7FFF0F
7FFF00*The upper 4 digits of the setting value represent the channel number in hexadecimal numbers, and the lower 2 digits represent
the bit number in hexadecimal numbers (set to 00 for channel).
For counters, index registers, data registers, etc., offset values may be set as the start address.
Please check the I/O memory addressing method of each PLC before setting.
Example Index register IR0
Start address 010000 (CS/CJ/NSJ series)
Offset 0100 to the hexadecimal value of address 0000.
4) When setting the operation value and write data value when the conditions are matched, consider the number of elements
to beused and the data length per element of the device.
Example Channel I/O [bit] Number of elements 2
The data length per element is 1 byte, set the condition that the 0th bit of 1ch is ON and the 1st bit isOFF.If you do so, please set it to 0100 (2 bytes).
5) When setting the communication protocol TCP/UDP, check the difference between FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP methods andthe number of connections for FINS/TCP before setting.
As a guideline,
Local network connection, multiple connections, FINS/UDP method,
multi-layer network connection, improved communication quality, FINS/TCP method
is recommended.
6) When connecting to the PLC that has multiple Ethernet ports, check the "FINS command compatible port" before wiring(connection).
Example: NX102 CPU unit
Use port 2 of the built-in EtherNet/IP port.
7) When using "PLC Information Write Command Settings", it is necessary to set the event that triggers the sending.
Example: When the transmission trigger for “PLC Information Write Command Settings” is set to “whenClear Button is pressed”① Set "Clear button settings" to "Enable"② Select the command you want to use from among the 4 options for "PLC Information Write Command
Destination".

333

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.4. Notification Settings
9.4.1. SNMP Notification Settings
Set TRAP transmission settings for external notification of events that occur on this product.
Screen when [v1 - Trap] or [ v2c - Trap/Inform] is selected in ⑤

⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

334

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Screen when [v3 - Trap/Inform] is selected in ⑤

⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩

⑪

335

⑫

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes, –: No)
No.

Item

Default Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelYou can select to [Enabled] orEnabled / Disabled [Disabled] the SNMP Notification
Function.

●

●

●

●

①

SNMP
Notification
Function

Disabled②

Number oftransmissions

1

0 to 10For SNMP notification, enter thenumber of times the same TRAP
is transmitted.

●

●

●

●

③

CommonTransmission
TRAP
CommunityNamepublic32 single-bytealphanumericcharacters andunderscore ( _ )When [v1/v2c] is selected, enter
the community name to transmit.

●

●

●

●

④

Notification
address(Blank)

●

●

●

●

IP Address Format
Set the target address to which(v4/v6) or host name
SNMP notifications are sent.
(63 characters)

⑤

Type

v2c - Trap

v1 - Trap /v2c - Trapv2c Inform/
v3 - Trap /v3 - Inform⑥

Username*¹(Blank)32 single-bytealphanumericcharacters

Set the user name used forauthentication in SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑦

Security
Level*¹

AuthPriv

noAuthNoPriv /AuthNoPriv /AuthPriv

Select the security level forauthentication in SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑧

Authentication
method*¹ *²

MD5

MD5 / SHA1

Select the Authentication method
for authentication in SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

⑨

Authentication
password*¹ *²(Blank)8 to 64 singlebyte alphanumericcharactersEnter the authentication
password of equipment that is
notified.

●

●

●

●

Select the SNMP version andnotification method.

●

●

●

●

336

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes, –: No)
No.

Item

⑩

Encryption
Method*¹ *³

⑪
⑫
*1
*2
*3

Default Value

Input Range

Description

DES

Encryption
Password*¹ *³
Engine ID*¹

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelDES / AES

Select the Encryption Method forauthentication in SNMP v3.

●

●

●

●

(Blank)8 to 64 singlebyte alphanumericcharactersEnter the Encrypted Passwordof equipment that is notified.

●

●

●

●

(Blank)64 hexadecimal
characters

Displays the engine ID ofequipment that is notified.

●

●

●

●

Displays when the [SNMP Version] is either [v3 - Trap] or [v3 - Inform].
If you select [noAuthNoPriv] for the [Security Level], you cannot configure this setup item.
If you select [noAuthNoPriv] or [AuthNoPriv] for the [Security Level], you cannot configure this setup item.

337

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.4.2. Email Notification Settings
Set the send email settings for this product, as well as the subject and body of email that is sent. When you send
email, you can select from the subject and body content registered here.
Screen when [SMTP Certification] is selected in ③

㉓ ⑬ ⑭ ⑲

⑫ ④ ③ ② ①

⑳

㉑

㉒

338

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions[Incoming Mail Server] is specified as [Gmail Server], and [Authentication Method] is [OAUTH2]⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬⑲⑳

[Incoming Mail Server] is specified as [Outlook Server], and [Authentication Method] is [OAUTH2]⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪

⑫
⑬
⑲
⑳

339

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Screen when [POP Authentication] is selected in ③

⑱ ⑰ ⑯ ⑮

③ ⑲ ⑳

㉑

㉒

340

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Screen when [No authenticate] is selected in ③

③ ⑲ ⑳

㉑

㉒

341

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
No.

Item

Default Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Select either [Password
Authentication] or [OAUTH2].

●

●

●

●

Upload the Credential file.

●

●

●

●

IP Address Format
Enter the SMTP Server(v4/v6) or host name
Address.
(63 characters)①

SMTP Server
Address(Blank)②

SMTP Server
Port

25

③

How toAuthenticate
SMTP

No
authentication④

Authentication
PasswordmethodAuthentication⑤

Credential

–

–

⑥

Client ID(Blank)127 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol charactersEnter the client ID.

●

●

●

●

⑦

Authorization
Endpoint URL(Blank)511 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol charactersEnter the authorization
endpoint URL.

●

●

●

●

⑧

Token
Endpoint URL(Blank)511 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol charactersEnter the Token Endpoint
URL.

●

●

●

●

⑨

State

EnabledEnabled / Disabled

Select either [Enabled] or[Disabled] for the State.

●

●

●

●

⑩

Acquisition of
authorization
code

–

–

For an OAuth2 connection,
get an authorization code.

●

●

●

●

⑪

Authorization
code entry––

Enter the authorization code
you retrieved.

●

●

●

●

⑫

Encryption
MethodNone

SSL/TLS /STARTTLS / None

Select [SSL / TLS],[STARTTLS], or [None].

●

●

●

●

⑬

SMTP AccountName(Blank)63 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol charactersEnter an account name for
SMTP authentication.

●

●

●

●

⑭

SMTP
Passwords(Blank)32 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol charactersEnter the password for SMTP
authentication.

●

●

●

●

⑮

POP Server
Address(Blank)IP Address Format
Enter the POP3 Server(v4/v6) or host name
Address.
(63 characters)

●

●

●

●

⑯

POP Server
Port

110

1 to 65535

Enter the POP3 Server port
number.

●

●

●

●

⑰

POP AccountName(Blank)63 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol characters

Register an account name for
POP authentication.

●

●

●

●

⑱

POP
Password(Blank)32 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol characters

Register a password for POP
authentication.

●

●

●

●

0 to 65535

Enter the SMTP Server port
number.

SMTP Certification / Select [SMTP Authentication],
POP Authentication / [POP Authentication], or [NoNo authentication
authentication].
Password
Authentication /OAUTH2*¹

342

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
No.

Item

Default Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelEnter the source address ofemail.

●●●●

Enter the email address of therecipient.

●

●

●

●

Email address format⑲

Sent-frome-mail address⑳

Send-toaddress(Blank)㉑

Email subject
1 to 16(Blank)32 single-byteor double-bytecharactersEnter subject 1 to 16.

●

●

●

●

㉒

Email bodytext Settings
1 to 16(Blank)63 single-byteor double-bytecharactersEnter body 1 to 16.

●

●

●

●

㉓

SMTP-AUTH
authentication
methodPLAIN

LOGIN / PLAIN

Register the SMTP-AUTH
authentication method.

●

●

●

●

(Blank)63 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol characters
Email address format*1

63 single-bytealphanumeric andsymbol characters

You can select [OAUTH2] when one of the following addresses is specified as the [SMTP Server Address].
・Gmail server: smtp.gmail.com
・Outlook server: smtp.office365.com

343

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.4.3. HTTP Transmission Settings
Set the HTTP Transmission Settings on this product.

⑤

⑦

②

①

⑧

344

③

④

⑥

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
No.

Item

Default Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model①

Name(Blank)64 single-byteor double-bytecharacters

Register the name of thecommand.

●

●

●

●

②

Command*¹(Blank)

256 single-byteor double-bytecharacters

Register the command.

●

●

●

●

③

Timeout (1-10)
sec.

3

1 to 10

Register the timeout time.

●

●

●

●

④

HTTP
Authentication

No
Authentication

●

●

●

●

⑤

Name

Register the name of theconnection target.

●

●

●

●

⑥

Destination
address(Blank)IP Address Format(v4/v6) or host name Register the connection(128 characters)
target address.
including "http / https"

●

●

●

●

⑦

User Name*²(Blank)64 single-byteor double-bytecharactersEnter the User name forauthentication

●

●

●

●

⑧

Password*²(Blank)64 single-byteor double-bytecharactersEnter the Password forauthentication

●

●

●

●

*1

You can enter the following symbols in locations that accept symbols.

(Blank)No authentication /Register the HTTP
Basic authentication /authentication method.
Digest authentication
64 single-byteor double-bytecharacters" - (Hyphen)", " . (Period)", " # (Sharp)", " % (Percent)", " , (Comma)", " * (Asterisk)", " + (Plus)"," _ (Underscore)"
Some symbols (" - (Hyphen)", " . (Period)", and " # (Sharp)") cannot use as the first character.
*2

User name and password fields are displayed only if Basic Authentication or Digest
Authentication is selected for HTTP Authentication Is.

345

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.5. Cloud Settings
9.5.1. Azure Connection Settings
Configure settings to connect to IoT Central (DPS) or Azure IoT Hub.
[Host] is speciﬁed as [IoT Central(DPS)]

④ ③ ②

①

[Host] is speciﬁed as [Azure IoT Hub], and [Authentication] is speciﬁed as [Symmetric key]

⑥ ⑤

①

346

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions[Host] is speciﬁed as [Azure IoT Hub], and [Authentication] is speciﬁed as [X.509 Certiﬁcate]

⑦ ⑤

No.

Item

①

⑧

⑨

⑩

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)

Default
Value

Input Range

IoT Central(DPS)

IoT Central (DPS) /Azure IoT Hub

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect [IoT Central (DPS)] or[Azure IoT Hub].

●

●

●

●

①

Host

②

Scope ID

(Blank)127 single-bytecharactersEnter the scope ID to connect to[IoT Central (DPS)].

●

●

●

●

③

Device ID(Blank)127 single-bytecharactersEnter the device ID to connect
to [IoT Central (DPS)].

●

●

●

●

④

SAS Token(Blank)127 single-bytecharactersEnter the SAS token to connect
to [IoT Central (DPS)].

●

●

●

●

⑤

Authentication
methodSymmetric
key

Symmetric key /X.509 Certificate

Select either [Symmetric key] or[X.509 Certificate].

●

●

●

●

⑥

Connection
String(Blank)511 single-bytecharactersEnter the connection string toconnect to [Azure IoT Hub].

●

●

●

●

⑦

Host name(Blank)255 single-bytecharactersEnter the host name of [Azure
IoT Hub].

●

●

●

●

⑧

Device ID(Blank)127 single-bytecharactersEnter the device ID to connect
to [Azure IoT Hub].

●

●

●

●

⑨

Certificate––

Upload the X.509 certificate.

●

●

●

●

⑩

Client Private
Key

–

–

Upload the client private key

●

●

●

●

347

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.5.2. AWS Connection Settings
Configure settings to connect to Amazon Web Services.

No.

Item

④

③

②

①

⑤

⑥

⑦

⑧
Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)

Default
Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelEnter the AWS IoT Core Device
data endpoint.

●

●

●

●

①

Host

(Blank)511 single-bytecharacters②

Port number

8883

443 / 8883

Select the port number used
to communicate with AWS IoT
Core.

●

●

●

●

③

Client ID(Blank)127 single-bytecharacters

Register the ID name (the nameof the thing).

●

●

●

●

④

Subscribe Topics(Blank)255 single-bytecharacters

Register topics to Subscribe forthis product.

●

●

●

●

⑤

Publish Topics(Blank)255 single-bytecharacters

Topic is registered when you run
Publish on this product.

●

●

●

●

⑥

Root CA
certificate––

Uploads the Root CA certificate.

●

●

●

●

⑦

Client Certificate––

Uploads the Client Certificate.

●

●

●

●

⑧

Client Private
Key

–

–

Uploads the Client Private Key.

●

●

●

●

348

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.6. Main Unit Operation Settings
9.6.1. Clear Operation Settings
Configure email, TRAP, or HTTP Commands transmitted when the Clear button is pressed, or when a SNMP or RSH
Command executes a clear operation.

⑦ ⑥ ⑤ ③ ② ①④⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫

⑬
③
⑥
⑧
⑩
③
⑥
⑧
⑩

②

④

⑤
⑦
⑨
②

④

⑤
⑦
⑨

In Basic Setup Screen, from [Additional units] the [Multi-color unit] option is selected⑭

349

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

Item

Default
Value

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

●

●

●

●

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send email.

●

●

●

●

①

Clear Button

Select either [Enabled] orEnabled Enabled / Disabled[Disabled] for the Clear button.

②

Send email

Disabled Enabled / Disabled③

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select a subject for the email.

●

●

●

●

④

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of the email.

●

●

●

●

⑤

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)–

Select the email recipient.

●

●

●

●

⑥

SNMP Notification

Disabled Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
SNMP notification.

●

●

●

●

⑦

Send HTTP
CommandDisabled Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send HTTP Command.

●

●

●

●

⑧

HTTP Command
Sending Settings(Not
selected)

Select a HTTP Command.

●

●

●

●

⑨

Send MQTT

Disabled Enabled / Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send MQTT.

●

●

●

●

⑩

Send PLC
information write
commandSelect [Enabled] or [Disabled] for
Disabled Enabled / Disabled the Send PLC Information Write
Command.

●

●

●

●

⑪

Clear stages

Clear all

Select the Clear button
Clear all / Depress
operation, [Clear all] or [Depress
twice to clear all
twice to clear all]

●

●

●

●

⑫

Audio
(in [Basic Settings],
when [Audio
Playback Mode]is set to [Memory
playback mode])

Select the clear operation ([Stop]or [Skip]) for the channel that isplaying.

–

●

●

●

⑬

For when the Clear button isClear Signal Towerpressed, select either [Enabled](Red, Amber,
Enabled Enabled / Disabledor [Disabled] for the Signal
Green, Blue, White)
Towerʼs normal operation setting.

●

●

●

●

⑭

For when the Clear button ispressed, select either [Enabled]
Enabled Enabled / Disabledor [Disabled] for the Signal
Towerʼs normal operation setting.

●

●

●

●

Clear Signal Tower

Stop

–

Stop / Skip

350

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.6.2. Test Button Setting
You can set the operation for when the Test button is pressed.

⑥ ⑤ ③ ② ①

④

⑦ ⑧ ⑨
No.

Item

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model①

Test button

EnabledEnabled /Disabled

Select either [Enabled] or[Disabled] for the Test button.

●

●

●

●

②

Send email

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send email.

●

●

●

●

③

Subject

1

1 to 17

Select a subject for the email.

●

●

●

●

④

Body text

1

1 to 17

Select the body text of the email.

●

●

●

●

⑤

Mail destination
setting(Not
selected)–

Select the email recipient.

●

●

●

●

⑥

SNMP Notification

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
SNMP notification.

●

●

●

●

⑦

Send HTTP
CommandDisabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send HTTP Command.

●

●

●

●

⑧

HTTP Command
Sending Settings(Not
selected)–

Select a HTTP Command.

●

●

●

●

⑨

Send MQTT

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Set to [Enabled] or [Disabled]
Send MQTT.

●

●

●

●

351

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9.6.3. Contact Output Setting

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

NHV Series ( D model)

Set output settings for the contact output. Using this screen, you can set up and switch between [Digital output] and[Busy output].

CAUTION
When changing the contact from [Digital output] to [Busy output], or from [Busy output] to [Digital output], the state of thecontact is maintained.
The contact output operation starts by either using contact output or executing the clear operation.

Screen when [Digital output] is selected in ③

⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

Screen when [Busy output] is selected in ③

⑥ ③ ② ①352

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
No.

Item

Default Value①

Port
Selection

Contact
output 1②

Contact
outputDisabled

Input Range

Description(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

–

–

–

●

Select to either [Enabled] or[Disabled] the contact output.

–

–

–

●

–

–

–

●

Contact output 1 /Select the contact output to set.
Contact output 2
Enabled /Disabled

NHV Series

NHB
Series③Function

Digital output

Digital output /Busy output

Select either [Digital output] or[Busy output] for the contact output
function. In [Port Selection], when[Contact output 2] is specified, thisis fixed to [Digital output].

④

Booleanvalue

Contact A

Contact A /Contact B

Select the [Boolean value] as either[Contact A] or [Contact B].

–

–

–

●

0

0 to 600

Enter the time for the [Auto OFF]function.

–

–

–

●

0

0 to 10

Enter the delay time for Busy
output.

–

–

–

●

⑤
⑥

Auto OFF(0 - 600)
sec.
Audio output
delay(0 - 10) sec.

353

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.6.4. Signal Tower Operation
You can operate the Signal Tower lights from the Web Setup Screen.

In Basic Setup Screen, from [Additional units] the [Not use] option is selected

② ①

④ ⑤

In Basic Setup Screen, from [Additional units] the [Multi-color unit] option is selected③

354

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

①

②

③

Item

Red, Amber,
Green, Blue,White

BuzzerDefault
Value

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Input Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelNo change

OFF /Continuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 /Specifies the lighting pattern ofFlashing pattern 2 /LED units.
Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4 /No change

●

●

●

●

No change

Stop /
Buzzer pattern 1 /Buzzer pattern 2 /Buzzer pattern 3 /Buzzer pattern 4 /Buzzer pattern 5 /No change

Specifies the buzzer pattern.

●

–

–

–

Red

Red / Amber /Green / Blue /White / Purple /Light blue

Specifies the colors of the multicolor unit.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Multi color
OFF

OFF /
Continuous ON /Flashing pattern 1 / Specifies the lighting pattern of theFlashing pattern 2 / multi-color unit.
Flashing pattern 3 /Flashing pattern 4④Operation
Execute––Signal Tower lights up using thespecified color and pattern.

●

●

●

●

⑤

Execute Clear––

Signal Tower enters normal
operating state.

●

●

●

●

355

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9.7. Voice Registration

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

NHV Series

9.7.1. Voice Registration
・ You can register MP3 files and titles to channels played by this product.
・ You can use the voice synthesizer function to register audio to a channel. For confirmation, you can playback
registered audio on this screen.
Screen when [Voice] is selected in ④

④ ⑨ ⑩ ⑲ ⑳ ⑪⑤ ⑧⑦⑥ ⑤ ④ ③ ② ①

⑫

⑬

⑭

⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱

Screen when [MP3 Data] is selected in ④

④ ③ ② ①

Refer to the above356㉑ ⑲ ⑳⑪

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

No.

①

Item
Registeredchannels

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)

Default
Value

Input Range

1

1 to 60

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect the channel to set.

–

●

●

●

Enter a title for the channel.

–

●

●

●

Displays the total capacity and percentage
used by registered audio data.

–

●

●

●

②

Audio Title(Blank)128 singlebyte or
double-bytecharacters③

Area in Use

–

–

④

Audio Type

Voice

Voice /
MP3 Data

Select either [Voice] or [MP3 Data] forregistered audio.

–

●

●

●

Enter the text to convert to audio data.

–

●

●

●

⑤

Text

(Blank)400 singlebyte or
double-bytecharacters⑥

Language

JapaneseJapanese /English /Chinese*⁶

Select either [Japanese] or [English] or[Chinese] for the playback language.

–

●

●

●

⑦

Voice

FemaleMale / Female

Select either [Male] or [Female] for thevoice used in playback.

–

●

●

●

⑧

Tone

0

-5 to 5

Set the tone of the audio playback.

–

●

●

●

⑨

Speed

0

-5 to 5

Set the speed of the audio playback.

–

●

●

●

⑩

Audio
Playback*¹––

Play audio with the current settings.

–

●

●

●

⑪

Add toChannel List––

Using the current settings, generates audio
data and adds it to the channel list.

–

●

●

●

⑫

Channelch1~ch60

ch1~ch60 /PresetSelect the channels to display, either[ch1~ch60] or [Preset].

–

●

●

●

⑬

CH

–

–

Displays the channel number.

–

●

●

●

⑭

Title

(Blank)

–

●

●

●

⑮

LineOut

Disabled

Enabled /Disabled

Select to either [Enabled] or [Disabled]
output to LineOut of registered audio.

–

●

●

●

⑯

Play*² *³ *⁴ *⁵––

Plays registered audio data.

–

●

●

●

⑰

Stop*²––

Stops playing the registered audio data.

–

●

●

●

⑱

Delete*²––

Deletes the registered audio data.

–

●

●

●

⑲

Notification
Sound(Before)(Not
selected)(Not selected), Set a notification sound to play before thesound playback.
1 to 10

–

●

●

●

⑳

Notification
Sound (After)(Not
selected)(Not selected), Set a notification sound to play after thesound playback.
1 to 10

–

●

●

●

㉑

File selection(Blank)

–

●

●

●

Displays the audio title of registered audio
128 characters data. You can change the title of registeredaudio data.

MP3 Data

Browse and select the MP3 data toregister.

357

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

If there is no text, audio does not play.
If there is no audio data registered to the channel, the buttons do not display.
During audio playback, when LineOut and Busy output are enabled, they operate as per their settings. Even ifconnected devices are operating, check that there are no problems.
Running audio playback interrupts playback of the current channel.
When [Audio Playback Mode] is set to [Memory playback mode], if there is an event while audio from thisscreen is playing, only after audio playback is complete will audio for the event be played.
"Chinese" will not be displayed for products that do not have the Voice Synthesizer of Chinese.

<how to check the supported languages of installed the Voice Synthesizer (Ver1.13 or later)>
Check in the pull-down menu of " ⑥ Language"

The Voice Synthesizer of Chinese will be available starting from October 2023 production.
By checking the nameplate affixed to the product, you can identify the production date.

Displays the last two digits of the year
(ex. 23 : 2023)
Display the month using alphabets*See below(ex. J : October)

Display A B C D E F G H I J K L
Month 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12358

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.7.2. Notification Sound Registration
・ You can register MP3 files and titles for notification sounds played by this product.
・ For confirmation, you can playback registered notification sounds on this screen.

⑤④ ③ ② ①

⑥
No.

①

Item
Registerednumbers⑦⑧ ⑨ ⑩
Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)

Default
Value

Input Range

1

1 to 5

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)Select the notification sound to set.

－

●

●

●

Enter a title for the notification sound,

－

●

●

●

🄼  Model 🄳  Model②

Audio Title(Blank)128 singlebyte or
double-bytecharacters③

Area in Use－－

Displays the total capacity andpercentage used by registered sound
data.

－

●

●

●

④

File selection(Blank)MP3 Data

Browse and select the MP3 data toregister.

－

●

●

●

⑤

Add to List－－

Add the currently selected notification
sound to the notification sound list.

－

●

●

●

⑥

Number－－

Displays the notification sound list
number.

－

●

●

●

Displays the titles of registered orprovisionally registered notification
sounds.

－

●

●

●

⑦

Title

(Blank)128 singlebyte or
double-bytecharacters⑧

Play ※ 1－－

Plays the notification sound of eachnumber.

－

●

●

●

⑨

Stop ※ 1－－

Stops playing the sound.

－

●

●

●

⑩

Delete ※ 1－－

Deletes the notification sound dataregistered for each number.

－

●

●

●

*1 If there is no sound data registered to the notification sound, the buttons do not display.

359

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.8. Management
9.8.1. Settings Initialization
You can initialize settings on this product.

No.

Item

③

②

Default
Value

Input
Range

①

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model①

Initialize
network*²––

When initialization is performed, also
initializes network settings*¹.

●

●

●

●

②

Initialize Audio
Data*³––

When initialization is performed, also
initializes audio data.

–

●

●

●

③

Execute––Executes initialization.

●

●

●

●

*1

[Network settings] refer to items in the network settings screen, such as [IP address], [Subnet mask], [Prefix
length], [Default gateway], [DNS server address], and [Host name].

*2

When [Initialize network] is selected, the IP address is reset to the factory default. To use it again, you need toreconfigure the network.

*3

Even if [Initialize Audio Data] is selected, the preset channels are not deleted.

360

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.8.2. Restart
You can restart this product.

①

No.

①

Item
RestartDefault
Value

Input
Range

–

–

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)
Description
Restarts this product.

361

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

●

●

●

●

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.8.3. Configuration
・ You can extract the product settings and save them to your computer as configuration data.
・ Select configuration data extracted from the product for writing.

CAUTION
The configuration data consists of operation settings registered in the main unit.
The configuration data does not include network settings or authentication passwords.

③

④

No.

①
②
③
④

Item
Read
File selection(Configuration)
File selection(Sound package)
Write

Default
Value

②

①

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Input
Range

Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

●

●

●

●

–

–

Read out configuration data from theproduct.

––

Select the configuration data stored on
the computer.

●

●

●

●

–

–

Select the sound package data stored
on the computer.

●

●

●

●

–

–

Write contents of the selectedconfiguration data to the product.

●

●

●

●

362

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.8.4. Updating Firmware
You can update the firmware on this product.

CAUTION
While updating, do not disconnect the power or LAN cables. Failure to follow this instruction could result in productdamage.
Before updating, check the version and models supported by the firmware.
Performing an update when an unsupported firmware is selected could result in equipment damage.
Adding supported languages for the Voice Synthesizer cannot be performed using this function.
(The chinese of the Voice Synthesizer is not installed in products manufactured before September 2023 It cannot be
added using this function.)

②

No.

Item

①

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)

Default
Value

Input Range①

File selection–

Select File②

Execute–ButtonDescription

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect the firmware to write to thisproduct.

●

●

●

●

Execute update.

●

●

●

●

363

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.8.5. Event Log
・ Displays the productʼs event log.
・ The event log displays the most recent 100 events.
・ You can click [Download] to download the event log file.
・ You can download up to 1000 events from the event log.

CAUTION
The event log is erased when initialization is executed from the [Initialization] screen.

①

No.

①

Item
Download

Setting ( ● : Yes – : No)

Default
Value

Input Range––

Description
Download the event log.

364

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  Model

●

●

●

●

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.8.6. User Authentication Settings
・ You can set the User Name and Password required for logging in to this product.
・ The set password is enabled the next time you log in.

③

No.

Item

②

Default
Value

Input
Range

①

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)
Description

NHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSet the new user name.

●

●

●

●

①

New Username(Blank)16
characters②

New password(Blank)16
characters

Set a new password.

●

●

●

●

③

Verify Password(Blank)16
characters

Set the new password (for confirmation).

●

●

●

●

365

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

9. Web Setup Screen Descriptions

9.8.7. Security Settings
・You can select the protocol used for communication with the productʼs Web Setup Screen.
・You can set the amount of time before you are automatically logged out when there is no operation.

CAUTION
If you select HTTPS communication, when you access the Web Setup Screen or display a pop-up, sometimes an error
screen with a message such as "This site is not secure" or "This connection does not protect privacy" will appear.
When the error screen is displayed, in the browser click the [Details] link, then click [Go to Web page] to access the Web
Setup Screen. (The displayed text differs depending on your browser and browser version.)④ ③ ② ①

No.

Item

Setting ( ● : Yes –: No)

Default
Value

Input
Range

Description

HTTP

HTTP /HTTPSNHV Series

NHB
Series(empty)🄼  Model🄳  ModelSelect either [HTTP] or [HTTPS] for thecommunication protocol.

●

●

●

●

①

Communication
Protocols②

Certificate––

Uploads the certificate which is used incommunicating via HTTPS.

●

●

●

●

③

Private Key––

Uploads the private key which is used incommunicating via HTTPS.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

④

Auto Logout Time10

0 to 30

Set the time before you are automaticallylogged out.
When "0" is specified, you are notautomatically logged out.

366

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

10. MIB List

10. MIB List
・ This product has a dedicated MIB.
・ This product is compatible with the NH series MIB, so you can use this product without changing existing designs.

10.1. NHB Series
iso 1: Object No.
org 3

dod 6

internet 1

mgmt 2

mib-2 1system 1

systUptime 3
sysContact 4

sysName 5

private 4

sysLocation 6
enterprises 1
patlite 20440
patliteModule 4

NetworkSignal
Tower 1

ident 1

identSwInit
Version 1

identSwAgent
Version 2
identHw
Version 3

conﬁg 2
alarm 3
monitor 4

pingServer 1
pingServer
NumEntries 1
pingServer
Table 2

pingServer
TableEntry 1
pingServer
TableIndex 1
pingServer
Name 2

pingServer
AlertValue 3

trapCatcher 2

Continued on next page

Continued on next page367

pingServer
IpAddress 4

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Continued from previous page

10. MIB List

Continued from previous page
control 5

controlLight1: Object No.

controlLight
NumEntries 1
controlLight
Table 2

controlLight
TableEntry 1

controlLight
DeviceColor 1

controlLight
ControlState2
controlLight
ControlTimer3

controlMulti
Color 3trap 6

controlLight
SnmpClear 3

controlMulti
ColorUnit 1

trapPatlite
AlarmAdded 1

trapPatlite
AlarmRemoved 2
trapPatlite
TrapReceived 3

trapPatlite
ClearExecuted 4
trapPatlite
RshExecuted 5

trapPatlite
TestSwExecuted8

trapPatliteSlmp
MonitoringAction9
trapPatliteSlmp
MonitoringError

trapPatliteSNMP
GetMatched

trapPatliteSNMP
GetReleased

trapPatliteSNMP
GetChange

trapPatliteGroup
AlarmAdded

trapPatliteGroup
AlarmRemoved
nhAdditional

7

snmpV2 6

slmpPattern
Num 1
pingPattern
Num 2

snmp
Modules 3

trapReceived
PatternNum 3

snmpMIB 1

snmpGetMatchPatternNum 4

snmpMIB
Objects 1

368

snmpGetChange
PatternNum 5
snmpTraps 5

coldStart 1

pingGroup
PatternNum 6

controlLight
CurrentState4

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

10. MIB List

10.2. NHV Series

iso 1: Object No.
org 3

dod 6

internet 1

mgmt 2

mib-2 1system 1

systUptime 3

sysContact 4
sysName 5
sysLocation6

private 4

enterprises1

patlite 20440

patliteModule 4

NetworkSignal
Tower 1

ident 1
identSwInit
Version 1

identSwAgent
Version 2
identHw
Version 3

config 2
alarm 3
monitor 4

pingServer1

pingServer
NumEntries1
pingServer
Table 2

pingServer
TableEntry1

pingServer
TableIndex1
pingServer
Name 2

pingServer
AlertValue 3

pingServer
IpAddress 4

trapCatcher2
diEntry 4

diEntry1 1
diEntry2 2
diEntry3 3
diEntry4 4

doEntry 5

doEntry11
doEntry22

Continued on next page

Continued on next page369

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Continued from previous page

10. MIB List

Continued from previous page
control 5

controlLight 1: Object No.

controlLight
NumEntries 1
controlLight
Table 2

controlLight
TableEntry 1

controlLight
DeviceColor 1

controlLight
ControlState 2controlLight
ControlTimer 3

controlSound 2

controlMulti
Color 3trap 6

controlLight
SnmpClear 3
controlSound
Channel 1
controlSound
Light 2

controlMulti
ColorUnit 1

trapPatlite
AlarmAdded 1

trapPatlite
AlarmRemoved2
trapPatlite
TrapReceived3

trapPatlite
ClearExecuted4
trapPatlite
RshExecuted 5

trapPatlite
TestSwExecuted8

trapPatliteSlmp
MonitoringAction9
trapPatliteSlmp
MonitoringError

trapPatliteDiState
ChangeOn

trapPatliteDiState
ChangeOﬀ
trapPatliteSNMP
GetMatched

trapPatliteSNMP
GetReleased
trapPatlite
DiCondition

diCondition
Match1 1
diCondition
Match2 2
diCondition
Match3 3
diCondition
Match4 4

trapPatliteSNMP
GetChange

trapPatliteGroup
AlarmAdded

trapPatliteGroup
AlarmRemoved

nhAdditional

7

trapPatliteMail
FilterMatch

slmpPattern
Num 1

pingPattern
Num 2

snmpV2 6

trapReceived
PatternNum3

snmp
Modules 3

snmpMIB 1

snmpGetMatchPatternNum 4
snmpGetChange
PatternNum 5
snmpMIB
Objects 1

370

pingGroup
PatternNum 6

snmpTraps 5

mailFilterNum 7
coldStart 1

controlLight
CurrentState 4

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

10. MIB List

10.3. MIB Description
Item
No.

OID

Item NameTypeMAXACCESS

Description

1

1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3

sysUptime

TimeTicks

read-only

Time that has elapsed (in hundredths ofa second) since the SNMP management
system was restarted

2

1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4

sysContact

DisplayString(SIZE (0..255))

read-only

Main unit settings - Basic Settings Contact
Information

3

1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5

sysName

DisplayString(SIZE (0..255))

read-only

Main unit settings - Network Settings Host
Name Information

4

1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6

sysLocation

DisplayString(SIZE (0..255))

read-only

Main unit settings - Basic Settings
Installation Location Information

5

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.1.1

identSwInitVersion

OCTET-STRING(2)read-only

Operating System Version Information6

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.1.2

identSwAgentVersion

OCTET-STRING(3)read-only

Application Version Information

7

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.1.3

identHwVersion

OCTET-STRING(3)read-only

Hardware Version Information8

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.1.1

pingServerNumEntries

INTEGER{0..24}

read-only

Number of Ping Monitoring

9

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.1.2.1.1

pingServerTableIndex

INTEGER{0..24}

read-only

Setting Number for Ping Monitoring

10 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.1.2.1.2

pingServerName

OCTET-STRING(31)read-only

Unit name for Ping Monitoring

11 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.1.2.1.3

pingServerAlertValueINTEGER{normal(1),read-only
occurred(2)}State of Ping Monitoring: Normal (1) /Ping Monitoring Error (2)12 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.1.2.1.4

pingServerIpAddress

OCTET-STRING(63)read-only

IP Address for Ping Monitoring

13 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.1

diEntry1

INTEGER{off(0),on(1)}read-onlyState of Digital Input 1: OFF (0) / ON (1)14 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.2

diEntry2

INTEGER{off(0),on(1)}read-onlyState of Digital Input 2: OFF (0) / ON (1)15 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.3

diEntry3

INTEGER{off(0),on(1)}read-onlyState of Digital Input 3: OFF (0) / ON (1)16 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.4.4

diEntry4

INTEGER{off(0),on(1)}read-onlyState of Digital Input 4: OFF (0) / ON (1)17 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.5.1

doEntry1

INTEGER{off(0),on(1)}read-write State of Digital output1: OFF (0) / ON (1)18 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.4.5.2

doEntry2

INTEGER{off(0),on(1)}read-write State of Digital output2: OFF (0) / ON (1)19 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.1

controlLightNumEntries

20 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.1

controlLightDeviceColor

INTEGER{6}
INTEGER{red(1),amber(2),green(3),blue(4),white(5),buzzer(6)}read-only

Number of Signal Tower to Control

read-only

Values of Signal Tower Color Information:
Red (1) / Amber (2) / Green (3) / Blue (4) /White (5) / Buzzer (6)State of Signal Tower Lights to Control:・Color State: Light off (1) / Light on (2) /Flashing 1 (3) / No change (4) / Flashing
2 (5) / Flashing 3 (6) / Flashing 4 (7) /21

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.2.(index)*controlLightControlStateINTEGER{1..7}

・Buzzer: Buzzer stop (1) /Buzzer pattern 1 (2) / Buzzer pattern 2 (3)/ No change (4) / Buzzer pattern 3 (5) /read-write
Buzzer pattern 4 (6) / Buzzer pattern 5 (7)・Audio Playback: Stop Playback (1) /Channel 61 Playback (2) /Channel 62 Playback (3) /No change (4) /Channel 63 Playback (5) /Channel 64 Playback (6) /Channel 71 Playback (7)371Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Item

OID

No
22

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.3.(index)*

Item NamecontrolLightControlTimerType
INTEGER{-1..99}

MAXACCESS

10. MIB List

Description

Number of seconds until control state isreflected: Disable control reflect (-1) /read-write
Time until control is reflected(0 to 99 seconds)
Current State of Signal Tower Lights:
・Color State: Light off (1) / Light on (2) /Flashing 1 (3) / Flashing 2 (4) /Flashing 3 (5) / Flashing 4 (6) /23

1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.2.1.4.(index)*24 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.1.3

25 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.2.1

controlLightCurrentState・Buzzer: Buzzer stop (1) /Buzzer pattern 1 (2) / Buzzer pattern 2 (3) /Buzzer pattern 3 (4) / Buzzer pattern 4 (5) /Buzzer pattern 5 (6)INTEGER{1..6}

read-only

controlLightSnmpClear

INTEGER{nop(0),execute(1)}・Audio Playback: Stop Playback (1) /Channel 61 Playback (2) /Channel 62 Playback (3) /Channel 63 Playback (4) /Channel 64 Playback (5) /Channel 71 Playback (6)Clear Control Status: Do Not Clear (0) /read-write
Execute Clear (1)controlSoundChannel

Control Audio Channel, Current Status:
Playback Stopped (0) /INTEGER{0..71, 200,
read-write Playback Channel Number (1 to 71) /201}
Text-to-speech playback by command (200,201)
Control state of Signal Tower lights with
12-digit numbers:
・Color state: 1st to 5th digits - Light off (0)/ Light on (1) / Flashing 1 (2) /Flashing 2 (3) / Flashing 3 (4) / Flashing 4 (5) /No change (9)26 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.2.2

controlSoundLightOCTET-STRING(SIZE (12))

read-write

・Audio Playback: 6th digit - Stop (0) /Playback (1)・Number of times to repeat audio:
7th to 9th digits - One-shot playback(000)/ Number of Times to Repeat (001to 254)/ Endless Playback (255)
・Audio Playback Channel:
10th to 12th digits - Playback Channel(001 to 071)
Control state of Multi-color unit with 2-digit
numbers:

27 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.5.3.1

controlMultiColorUnit

28 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.1

trapPatliteAlarmAdded

29 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.2

trapPatliteAlarmRemoved

30 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.3

trapPatliteTrapReceived

31 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.4

trapPatliteClearExecuted

32 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.5

trapPatliteRshExecuted

OCTET-STRING(SIZE(2))

read-write

・Color: 1st digit - Light off (0) / Red (1) /Amber (2) / Green (3) / Blue (4) / White (5) /Purple (6) / Light blue (7)・Lighting pattern: 2nd digit - Light off (0) /Light on (1) / Flashing 1 (2) / Flashing 2 (3) /Flashing 3 (4) / Flashing 4 (5)*Outputs "00" when the control status is notsupported by the multi-color unit.
Indicates an error in the monitoring target
notOBJECT-IDENTIFIER
that was specified in the Ping Monitoring
accessible
Settings.
Indicates the monitoring target specified by
notOBJECT-IDENTIFIER
the Ping Monitoring Settings has recovered
accessible
from the problem.
Indicates that the TRAP specified in
notOBJECT-IDENTIFIER
the TRAP Reception Settings has beenaccessible
received.
notIndicates the Clear button has been
OBJECT-IDENTIFIER
accessible pressed.
OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

372

notIndicates the RSH/SSH Command hasaccessible been received.

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Item
No

OID

33 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.8
34 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.9
35 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.10

Item NameTypeMAXACCESS

10. MIB List

Description

notIndicates the Test button has been pressed.
accessible
Indicates that data matching the condition
nottrapPatliteSlmpMonitoringAction OBJECT-IDENTIFIER
setting specified by the PLC Information Read
accessible
Command has been acquired.
notIndicates that error data is obtained by the
trapPatliteSlmpMonitoringError OBJECT-IDENTIFIER
accessible PLC Information Read Command.

trapPatliteTestSwExecuted

OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

36 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.11

trapPatliteDiStateChangeOn OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

notIndicates digital input has been turned on.
accessible

37 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.12

trapPatliteDiStateChangeOff

OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

notIndicates digital input has been turned off.
accessible

38 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.13

trapPatliteSNMPGetMatched

OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

notIndicates the SNMP monitoring condition has
accessible been met.

39 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.14

trapPatliteSNMPGetReleased

OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

notIndicates the SNMP monitoring condition has
accessible been released.

40 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.15.1

diConditionMatch1

OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

notIndicates the condition specified in Digitalaccessible Input Condition Setting 1 has been met.

41 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.15.2

diConditionMatch2

OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

notIndicates the condition specified in Digitalaccessible Input Condition Setting 2 has been met.

42 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.15.3

diConditionMatch3

OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

notIndicates the condition specified in Digitalaccessible Input Condition Setting 3 has been met.

43 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.15.4

diConditionMatch4

OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

notIndicates the condition specified in Digitalaccessible Input Condition Setting 4 has been met.

44 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.16

trapPatliteSNMPGetChange

OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

48 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.1

slmpPatternNum

INTEGER{1..16}

49 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.2

pingPatternNum

INTEGER{1..24}

50 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.3

trapReceivedPatternNum

INTEGER{1..16}

51 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.4

snmpGetMatchPatternNum

INTEGER{1..20}

52 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.5

snmpGetChangePatternNum

INTEGER{1..5}

53 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.6

pingGroupPatternNum

INTEGER{1..3}

54 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.7.7

mailFilterNum

INTEGER{1..20}

notIndicates the email detection number.
accessible

55 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1

coldStart

OBJECT-IDENTIFIER

notStarts up this product.
accessible

45 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.17

46 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.18

47 1.3.6.1.4.1.20440.4.1.6.19

notIndicates SNMP monitoring has detected aaccessible change.
Indicates an error in the monitoring target
nottrapPatliteGroupAlarmAdded OBJECT-IDENTIFIER
group that was specified in the Ping
accessible
Monitoring Settings - Group setting.
Indicates the monitoring target groupnotspecified by the Ping Monitoring Settings
trapPatliteGroupAlarmRemoved OBJECT-IDENTIFIER
accessible - Group setting has recovered from the
problem.
notrapPatliteMailFilterMatchOBJECT-IDENTIFIER
Indicates email has been detected.
accessible
notIndicates the condition setting number of theaccessible PLC Information Read Command. (1 to 16)
notIndicates the ping monitoring target number.
accessible (1 to 24)
Indicates the TRAP Reception Setting
notnumber of the TRAP that was received.
accessible(1 to 16)
Indicates the SNMP monitoring (match
notdetection) targetʼs monitoring setting
accessible
number. (1 to 20)
Indicates the SNMP monitoring (change
notdetection) targetʼs monitoring setting
accessible
number. (1 to 5)
notIndicates the ping group monitoring target
accessible number. (1 to 3)* The value to operate the Signal Tower or buzzer is entered into the (index).
Red (1) / Yellow (2) / Green (3) / Blue (4) / White (5) / Buzzer (6)373Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

11. Speciﬁcations

11. Specifications
11.1. NHB Series
5 tier

Model

Rated
Voltage
Operating
Voltage
Range
Rated Current
Consumption
Rated Power
Consumption

4 tier

3 tier2 tier

1 tier0 tier

NHB □ -5 □ NHB □ -4 □ NHB □ -3 □ NHB □ -2 □ NHB □ -1 □ NHB □ -0 □DC Power Jack

24 VDCAC Adapter
accessory*¹

Input: 100 to 240 VAC (50Hz/60Hz), Output: 24 VDC

DC Power Jack

21.6 to 26.4 VDC

AC Adapter
accessory*¹

90 to 264 VAC

Main Unit*²Standby: 110mA

Maximum: 155mA(24VDC input)

Signal Tower

40mA (per Unit)

Main Unit*²Standby: 3.2W Maximum: 4.4W (with AC Adaptor, 100VAC input)

Signal Tower

1.0W (per Unit, with AC Adaptor, 100VAC input)

Ambient Operating Temperature

0°C to 40°C (No Dew or Condensation)

Ambient Operating Humidity

20% RH to 80% RH (No Dew or Condensation)

Storage Ambient Temperature-10°C - 60°C (No Dew or Condensation)

Storage Ambient Humidity

20% RH to 80% RH (No Dew or Condensation)

Mounting Location

Indoor Only

Mounting Direction

Upright

Protection Rating

IP20

Insulation ResistanceMore than 10Mohm at 500VDC between live part and non-current carrying metallic partWithstand Voltage

1500VAC applied for 1min (10mA or less) between live part and non-current carrying
metallic part without breaking insulration

Sound Pressure Level (Buzzer)
Environmental
Conditions
Mass(Tolerance: ±10%)

Front direction from the center, at 1m, Maximum volume setting

NHB6

645g + (60g) x Signal Tower Tiers(AC Adaptor not included)

NHB4

635g + (35g) x Signal Tower Tiers(AC Adaptor not included)

Network Communication Format

Interface

80 dB or more (at 25 °C)

Ethernet (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T (Auto MDI/MDI-X compatible)

IP Network

IPv4/IPv6 dual stackUSB

USB2.0/1.1 Type-A 1ch

374

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

AC Adapter*¹, Adhesive Sheet

Accessories
LED Unit
NHB6
Compatible Unit
(Optional)

Remarks

Wireless Data Acquisition System
Transmitter
LED Unit

NHB4

Optional Parts

11. Speciﬁcations

LR6-E-RZ, RY, RG, RB, C
LR6-E-R, Y, G, B, MZ
WDT-6LR-Z2
LR4-E-RZ, RY, RG, RB, C
LR4-E-R, Y, G, B

Wireless Data Acquisition System
Transmitter

WDT-4LR-Z2

Wall Mounting Bracket

NH-001

Partition Mounting Bracket

NH-002

AC Adapter

ADP-001*1 Except N model*2 Excluding USB current consumption

375

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

11. Speciﬁcations

11.2. NHV Series

Model

Rated
Voltage

Voltage
Operating
Range

RatingCurrent
Consumption

Rating Power
Consumption

5 tier

4 tier

3 tier2 tier

1 tier0 tierNHV □ -5 □□□NHV □ -4 □□□NHV □ -3 □□□NHV □ -2 □□□NHV □ -1 □□□NHV □ -0 □□□DC PowerJack

24 VDCPoE Power
Supply*¹

48VDC Conforms to IEEE802.3at (PoE+)*²

AC Adapter
Accessory*³

Input: 100 to 240 VAC (50Hz/60Hz), Output: 24 VDC

DC PowerJack

21.6 to 26.4 VDC

PoE Power
Supply*¹

42.5 to 57 VDC

AC Adapter
Accessory*³

90 to 264 VAC

Main
Unit*⁴Standby: 120mA
Standby: 115mA

Maximum: 210mA

Maximum: 175mA(24VDC input)(PoE 48VDC input)

SignalTower

40mA (per Unit, 24VDC input) , 25mA (per Unit, PoE 48VDC input)

Main
Unit*⁴Standby: 3.5W Maximum: 6W (AC Adaptor, 100VAC input)

SignalTower

1.0W (per Unit, AC Adaptor, 100VAC input)

Ambient Operating
Temperature

0°C to 40°C (No Dew or Condensation)

Ambient Operating
Humidity

20% RH to 80% RH (No Dew or Condensation)

Storage Ambient
Temperature-10 °C to 60 °C (No Dew or Condensation)

Storage Ambient Humidity

20% RH to 80% RH (No Dew or Condensation)

Mounting Location

Indoor Only

Mounting Direction

Upright

Protection Rating

IP20

Insulation ResistanceMore than 10Mohm at 500VDC between live part and non-current carrying metallic partWithstand Voltage

1500VAC applied for 1min (10mA or less) between live part and non-current carrying
metallic part without breaking insulration

Sound Pressure Level
Environmental
Conditions
Audio Line Output

88dB or more
Front direction from the center, at 1m, 1.8kHz sine wave played back at -6dB
MP3 data of the content and use of the environment, the sound pressure level will change.
600 Ω

0dBV

376

(Unbalanced, Monaural Mini-Jack)

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Mass(Tolerance:± 10%)

11. Speciﬁcations

NHV6760g + (60g) x Signal Tower Tiers(AC Adaptor not included)

NHV4

750g + (35g) x Signal Tower Tiers(AC Adaptor not included)

NHV6-D

805g + (60g) x Signal Tower Tiers(AC Adaptor not included)

NHV4-D

795g + (35g) x Signal Tower Tiers(AC Adaptor not included)

NHV6-DP850g + (60g) x Signal Tower Tiers

NHV4-DP840g + (35g) x Signal Tower Tiers

External Contact Output( D model only)

Non-Voltage Contact Relay

Number ofContacts

2

Contact Rating(30VDC@3A) inrush current 5A or less (5VDC@1mA, Minimum, Reference)

Supported Wire
DiameterSolid Wire / Stranded Wire: φ 0.41 - 0.81mm (AWG26 - 20)

Wiring Method

Screwless Terminal Block

External Contact Input( D model only)

Non-voltage contact input

Number ofContacts
Contact Rating

NPN Transistor

4"ON" output current @ 6mA or less per channel
Terminal OFF condition Voltage: 24VDC

Supported Wire
DiameterSolid Wire / Stranded Wire: φ 0.41 - 0.81mm (AWG26 - 20)

Wiring Method

Screwless Terminal Block

Network Communication
FormatEthernet (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T (Auto MDI/MDI-X compatible)

IP Network
Interface

IPv4/IPv6 dual stackUSB

USB2.0/1.1 Type-A 1ch
AC Adapter*³, Adhesive Sheet

Accessories

NHV6

Wireless Data Acquisition System Transmitter

Compatible Unit
(Optional)
NHV4

Optional Parts

LED Unit

LED Unit

LR6-E-RZ, RY, RG, RB, C
LR6-E-R, Y, G, B, MZ
WDT-6LR-Z2
LR4-E-RZ, RY, RG, RB, C
LR4-E-R, Y, G, B

Wireless Data Acquisition System Transmitter

WDT-4LR-Z2

Wall Mounting Bracket

NH-001

Partition Mounting Bracket

NH-002

AC Adapter

ADP-001

377

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual*1 P model only
Remarks*2 PoE+ power supply HUB compliant with IEEE802.3at is required.
*3 Except for N and P models*4 Excluding USB current consumption

378

11. Speciﬁcations

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

12. Troubleshooting

12. Troubleshooting
12.1. Troubleshooting
12.1.1. Common to NHB and NHV Series
Issue

NHB Series

NHV Series

Check content

Reference

Is the power supply applied at the correct voltage?
Power does not turn on

Check that the power supply is applied at the rated
voltage.
Is the AC adapter connected correctly?

"6.6. Power Supply Method" ( ☞page 103)

Connect the AC adapter properly.
The adhesive strength of theadhesive sheet has been
weakened

Is there dirt or oil on the adhesive sheet?
Use a soft cloth, dampened with water and wrung tightly,
to wash off the dirt, then dry thoroughly before use.

–

Turn off the power on this product then turn the powerback on.
The status LED is flashing Red

If this does not solve the problem, please contact thetechnical support center listed on the website as there
may be some sort of failure.

Signal Tower lights are bright(blinding)

From [Basic Settings] - [Dimming], adjust the brightnessof the Signal Tower.
At startup, if access to the DHCP server is unavailable,
this product uses its default value 192.168.10.1 in the
network settings.

Cannot automatically get IP
address, does not start in
DHCP mode–"7.14. Setting Up LED Unit
Brightness Adjustment" ( ☞page 126)–

Check if the environment supports connecting to the
DHCP server.

Is allocation of IP addresses set to [Manual Settings]?
Change the setup method to [Automatic Settings].

"7.1. Enabling DHCP Function"( ☞ page 106)"7.5. Setting Up ProductNetwork Settings" ( ☞ page
114)

・ Are the [RSH/SSH Command Reception Settings]
correct?
・ Confirm the [RSH Command Reception Function]
or [SSH Command Reception Function] is set to[Enabled].
Unable to control using RSH/
SSH Commands

・If key authentication is selected for SSH, confirm the[Source IP address] and [Login name] are set correctly.

"8.3.1.1. Setting Up theCommand Main Unit Operation
Settings" ( ☞ page 172)

When you send commands without an account, confirm
the correct account is registered.
Check the settings of the source equipment and ofcommunication equipment on the transmission route
to confirm communication is not blocked by a firewall,
filtering, port blocking function, and so on.

379–

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Issue

Check content
Is the LAN cable connected?
Check that the cable is connected properly.

12. Troubleshooting

Reference"6.5. LAN Cable Wiring Method"( ☞ page 102)

Is the IP address for the product correct?
Check the IP address of the product.
Is the IP address for the product duplicated on otherequipment?
Check the IP address of the product.

"7.4. Displaying the Web Setup
Screen" ( ☞ page 111)

Are you accessing the correct the IP address?
Check the IP address of the product.
Is the IP address on the personal computer correct?
Check the personal computer settings.
The Web Setup Screen does
not display or does not display
correctly

Check the browser you are using.
Use either Google Chrome or Microsoft Edge.
In the browser security settings, is JavaScript disabled?
Enable running JavaScript in the browser.
Check operation after deleting the browser history.

"7.2. Setting Up Network
Settings on the PC" ( ☞ page
107)
–
–
–

You may be viewing browser cache data. Try one of thefollowing method.
・After logging out of the WEB Setup Screen, login again tocheck the displayed contents.
・Clear the browser cache, refresh teh WEB Setup Screen,–and check the displayed contents.
*The method for cleaning the browser cache varies
depending on the browser you are using.
Please follow your browser's cleaning method.
The event log is not recording

The event log is erased when initialization is run from theWeb Setup Screen and when using DIP switches to reset
the product to its factory default.
Is the socket communication setting correct?
Check if the [Socket Communication Function] isenabled, and check the [Port number] setting.

Is the communication command protocol correct?
Check the communication command protocol you areusing.
Socket communication is notpossible

Are you sending to the product address?
Check the IP address of the product.
Check the settings of the source equipment and ofcommunication equipment on the transmission route
to confirm communication is not blocked by a firewall,
filtering, port blocking function, and so on.
When [Sent-from address settings] is enabled, is the
specified IP address registered correctly?
Register IP addresses of equipment that will transmit
commands.

380–"8.3.1.1. Setting Up theCommand Main Unit Operation
Settings" ( ☞ page 172)"5.3.11. PNS Command
Function (product compatibility
commands)" ( ☞ page 43)"5.3.12. PHN Command
Function (product compatibility
commands)" ( ☞ page 52)"7.2. Setting Up Network
Settings on the PC" ( ☞ page107)–

"8.3.1.1. Setting Up theCommand Main Unit Operation
Settings" ( ☞ page 172)

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Issue

Check content
Is the normal operation setting set with any option otherthan [Light off]?

Even though I press the Clear
button, Signal Tower lights do
not turn off

Email notification is not
executed

When the lighting color is specified, pressing the Clear
button lights up the LED unit in the specified color.

12. Troubleshooting

Reference"7.15. Setting Up Normal Status"( ☞ page 127)

In the [Clear Operation Settings], confirm [Clear Signal
Tower] is not set to [Disabled].

"8.3.3. Operating the Productwith the Clear Button" ( ☞ page194)

On the mail server, check the authentication method andits settings.

–

If you use a host name, confirm the [DNS server address]
is set.
・ Are the operation settings of the function for which you
want to send an email notification correct?
・ Confirm the [Send email] is set to [Enabled].

"7.5. Setting Up ProductNetwork Settings" ( ☞ page114)–

・ Confirm the email destination is selected.
Unable to control using HTTP
Commands

・ Confirm the [HTTP Command Control Function] is set
to [Enabled].
・ Are you transmitting using the protocol (HTTP/HTTPS)
specified in the security settings?

"8.3.1.1. Setting Up theCommand Main Unit Operation
Settings" ( ☞ page 172)・ Are the [SNMP Command-reception Settings] correct?
Unable to SET / GET using
SNMP Commands

・ Check if [SNMP Command-reception Function] is set
to [Enabled].
・ Check if an incorrect SNMP version is specified.
・ Check if the various settings for the SNMP version are
correctly set.

"8.3.1.1. Setting Up theCommand Main Unit Operation
Settings" ( ☞ page 172)・ Is the SNMP Device Monitoring Settings correct?
・ Check if [SNMP Device Monitoring Function] is set to[Enabled].
・ Check if an incorrect SNMP version is specified.
SNMP Device Monitoring does
not run・ Check if the various settings for the SNMP version are
correctly set.
Confirm the target monitored address and Judgment
conditions are correctly specified.

"8.3.1.1. Setting Up theCommand Main Unit Operation
Settings" ( ☞ page 172)

Confirm the monitoring cycle of condition settings thatare not executed is not set to 0 seconds.
Even though power is turned,
the status LED does not turnBlue

Confirm the DIP switches are set to normal startup mode(all OFF).

"8.5.1.2. Using Status LED to
Check the Status of this Product"( ☞ page 247)

Volume buttons do not adjust
the volume

In the Web Setup Screen, if [Volume Button] operation is
set to [Disabled], the volume does not change even whenusing volume buttons.

"8.5.4.2. Adjusting the Volume
with + / - Volume Control
Buttons" ( ☞ page 254)

Turning on the power does notturn on Signal Tower

Confirm the LED unit is installed properly.

"6.1. Attaching and Detaching
Additional Units" ( ☞ page 90)381

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

Issue

Check content

12. Troubleshooting

Reference

Check that the cloud connection settings are set
correctly.
LED unit does not work
properly with the Cloud function

Check if the [Field Name] and [Value] are set correctly.
For AWS connections, confirm the client ID is not
duplicated with other equipment.

Cannot connect to [Azure IoT
Central]In the Cloud Connection Settings, verify the [Scope ID],
[Device ID], and [SAS Token] are set correctly.
Confirm the clock on this product is set correctly.
In the Cloud Connection Settings, verify values are notdefined for the [Scope ID], [Device ID], and [SAS Token].

Cannot connect to [Azure IoT
Hub]

All fields must be blank.
Check if the connection string for the Cloud Connection
Settings is set correctly.

"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page
144)

Confirm the clock on this product is set correctly.
Confirm the connection and client ID are set up correctlyin the Amazon Web Services Setup Screen.
Cannot connect to [AWS IoT
Core]Confirm the Amazon Web Services Setup Screenʼs RootCA certificate, client certificate, and client private key are
uploaded properly.
Confirm the certificate and policy are attached to thething created in the AWS IoT console.
Confirm the clock on this product is set correctly.

Certificate cannot be uploaded

The match condition of the PLC
Information Read Command
does not work.

12.1.2. NHB Series
Issue

Certificate file name may be too long.
Shorten the file name and try uploading again.
Check if the PLC settings such as the address and port
to be connected are correct.
If the protocol is set to TCP, provide one port for eachsetting number.
When setting the designated transmission port, please
set a different port number for each setting number.

NHB Series

Check content
Is the [Buzzer] set to [0(OFF)]?

There is no buzzer sound

Disable [OFF] on the device, or adjust the volume using
the speaker volume or the +/- volume buttons on the
product.
Is the [Buzzer] volume low?

The buzzer volume is low"5.3.25. PLC Linkage Function" ( ☞page 83)

Adjust the volume using the speaker volume or the +/volume buttons on the product.

382

Reference"7.9. Setting Up the Buzzer" ( ☞page 121)"8.5.4. Changing the Sound
Volume" ( ☞ page 253)
"7.9. Setting Up the Buzzer" ( ☞page 121)"8.5.4. Changing the Sound
Volume" ( ☞ page 253)

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

12.1.3. NHV Series
Issue

NHV Series

Check content
Is the [Speaker Volume] set to [Mute] or [Minimum]?

Audio does not play

Disable [Mute] on the device, or adjust the volume using
the speaker volume or the +/- volume buttons on the
product.
Confirm the audio is registered to the associated channel
in the channel list.
Is the [Speaker Volume] low?

The audio volume is low

Audio playback does not output
to Line Out

Adjust the volume using the speaker volume or the +/volume buttons on the product.
Check if the MP3 file sound is monaural. When the fileis stereo, the R channel of the MP3 file registered to thechannel is output.
Confirm Line Out in the channel list is set to [Enabled].

Line Out outputs sound on one
side only
Even though an event occurs,
does not change from buzzer
pattern 1 to 5 (in Memory
playback mode)

Failed to upload MP3 file

12. TroubleshootingLine Out is a mono channel, so if you connect a stereo
mini-plug, it plays on the L channel of line out.
Playback mode for the following channels is fixed to
Repeat playback (endless): Channels 61 to 64 (buzzer
patterns 1 to 4) and Channel 71 (buzzer pattern 5).
To change to another channel, use a command or switch
operation to stop the audio playback, and then specify achannel to play or skip a track.
The MP3 file was created in an unsupported format. The
following formats are supported by this product.

Reference"7.10. Setting Up the Speaker
Volume" on page 122"8.5.4. Changing the Sound
Volume" ( ☞ page 253)–
"7.10. Setting Up the Speaker
Volume" on page 122"8.5.4. Changing the Sound
Volume" ( ☞ page 253)–
"7.16. Setting Up Voice
Registration" ( ☞ page 128)–––

MPEG1 AudioLayer3 CBR 32, 64, 128 kbps
Are there too many line breaks or symbols typed in?
Speech synthesis fails.

Reduce the number of line breaks and symbols.

–

Reduce the number of characters to be registered.
Are you registering MP3 files with long playback times?
Cannot give notification soundand register voice.

Shorten the playback time and re-register the file.
Is the registration speed slowing down when there are alarge number of text-to-speech characters?

––

Reduce the number of characters or speed up the speed.
Cannot read Chinese
Chinese cannot be selected invoice registration

Check if the firmware version is 1.13 or higher.
Check whether "Chinese" is displayed in the language
setting of "Voice Registration".
Products produced before the addition of Chinese
speech synthesis will not display "Chinese".

383"9.7.1. Voice Registration" ( ☞page 356)

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

12.1.4. NHV-D Series
Issue
Digital output and varioustransmissions do not run under
the condition set in the digital
input condition.

NHV Series ( D model)

Check content

Reference

Check if there is a conflict in conditions. [Digital Input
Condition Settings] are processed in order, starting fromsetting 1, and operations for settings processed later
have priority.

–

Set as the condition, is digital input set to [Disabled]?
Set the digital input to [Enabled].

Even though the Clear button
is pressed, the relay contact
output does not turn off

Digital output function does notoperate as controlled by therelay contact–

In the contact output setting, check if the contact output
is set to [Enabled], or if the target port is set to the digital
output.

"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact
Output Settings" ( ☞ page 143)

Check if there is a state change in a short period of time(within 100 ms).
The output terminal block reflects the digital output statein 100 ms cycles.
The state of digital output is updated as required in theorder of received control elements (priority given to thelast received control element).
As a result, if the digital output state changes within 100
ms, only a part of the state change is reflected in the
output terminal block.
* The various command and email transmissions arereflected in the control content order.

–

If a large amount of processing occurs in other functions,or if processing takes a long time, output terminal block
operations may be delayed.

–

There may be a problem with the contact.
Contact the distributor from whom you purchased thisproduct, or the technical support center listed on thewebsite.
Check that the rated current and inrush current ofequipment connected to the terminal block do not exceed
the ratings of the output terminal block.
Is the contact input setting correct?
Check if [Contact Input] is set to [Enabled].

Device-to-cloud Message does
not notify there are changes todigital input.
MQTT Publish function does
not notify changes in digital
input"8.4.4. Contact Input Status
Monitoring" ( ☞ page 222)

When the [Relay Contact Output] setting is set to [Busyoutput], while the channel is playing the relay contact
output remains ON.
When channel playback stops, the relay contact output
turns OFF.
You cannot turn it off using any variety of commands.

Check if Digital Output Setting is set to [Auto OFF].

Digital input does not work

12. Troubleshooting"8.1.4. Setting Up Contact
Output Settings" ( ☞ page 143)–

"8.4.4. Contact Input Status
Monitoring" ( ☞ page 222)

Check the input terminal block for cut or disconnected
wires, short circuit, and so on.

–

Check if the input signal is being transmitted properly tothe input terminal block.
The input signal must have a duration of 110 ms or
longer.

–Check the signal definition in the digital input settings.
Notification is sent for changes to the defined content.
Check the signal definition in the digital input settings.
Notification is sent for changes to the defined content.

384"8.2. Using the Cloud" ( ☞ page
144)

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

12.1.5. NHV-P Series
Issue
Power does not turn on

13. Replacement and Optional Parts

NHV Series ( P model)

Check content
Is the product connected to the PoE power supply?
Connect the product to the PoE power supply.

385

Reference–Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

13. Replacement and Optional Parts

13. Replacement and Optional Parts
13.1. Replacement Parts
Various parts are available to the customer for exchange or replacement.
Individual Box
Tier 0, 1 Signal Tower

AC Adapter

Tier 2, 3 Signal Tower

Tier 4, 5 Signal Tower

Head CoverHead Cover

φ40, off-White

φ60, off-White

Adhesive Sheet

13.2. Optional Parts
The following options are available for this product.
Wall Mounting Bracket

Partition Mounting Bracket

Global AC adapter

NH-001

NH-002

ADP-001

UL

386

CCC

VDE

KC

UK

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14. Free Software License Agreement
This chapter clarifies the license for the free software used with NHB and NHV Series.

14.1. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
14.1.1. Version 1.0
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1, February 1989
Copyright (C) 1989 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, butchanging it is not allowed.
Preamble
The license agreements of most software companies try to keep users at the mercy of thosecompanies. By contrast, our General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom toshare and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. The General
Public License applies to the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program
whose authors commit to using it. You can use it for your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Specifically, theGeneral Public License is designed to make sure that you have the freedom to give away orsell copies of free software, that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you
can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you cando these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights
or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities foryou if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of a such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or
can get the source code. And you must tell them their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands
that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else andpassed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

387

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSETERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placedby the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public
License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on
the Program" means either the Program or any work containing the Program or a portion ofit, either verbatim or with modifications. Each licensee is addressed as "you".
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receiveit, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy
an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices thatrefer to this General Public License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any otherrecipients of the Program a copy of this General Public License along with the Program. You
may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, and copy anddistribute such modifications under the terms of Paragraph 1 above, provided that you also
do the following:a) cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files andthe date of any change; andb) cause the whole of any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains
the Program or any part thereof, either with or without modifications, to be licensed at nocharge to all third parties under the terms of this General Public License (except that you
may choose to grant warranty protection to some or all third parties, at your option).
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause
it, when started running for such interactive use in the simplest and most usual way, toprint or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a noticethat there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may
redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy ofthis General Public License.
d) You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at youroption offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
Mere aggregation of another independent work with the Program (or its derivative) on a volume
of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of theseterms.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a portion or derivative of it, under Paragraph2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Paragraphs 1 and 2 above provided
that you also do one of the following:a) accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, whichmust be distributed under the terms of Paragraphs 1 and 2 above; or,b) accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party free(except for a nominal charge for the cost of distribution) a complete machine-readable
copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Paragraphs 1
and 2 above; or,c) accompany it with the information you received as to where the corresponding sourcecode may be obtained. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution andonly if you received the program in object code or executable form alone.)388

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For
an executable file, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains;but, as a special exception, it need not include source code for modules which are standard
libraries that accompany the operating system on which the executable file runs, or for standard
header files or definitions files that accompany that operating system.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, distribute or transfer the Program except as expressly
provided under this General Public License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, distribute or transfer the Program is void, and will automatically terminate yourrights to use the Program under this License. However, parties who have received copies, orrights to use copies, from you under this General Public License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. By copying, distributing or modifying the Program (or any work based on the Program) you
indicate your acceptance of this license to do so, and all its terms and conditions.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
7. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present
version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version
number of the license which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option offollowing the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by theFree Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the license,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
8. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation;
we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals ofpreserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
9. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTYFOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPTWHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHERPARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST
OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
10.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITINGWILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FORDAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCHHOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES.
389

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONSAppendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to humanity,
the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute andchange under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start ofeach source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should haveat least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) 19yy <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 1,or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program;if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston MA
02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactivemode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19xx name of author Gnomovision comes with
ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you arewelcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of theGeneral Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than`show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits yourprogram.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to signa "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (aprogram to direct compilers to make passes at assemblers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!

390

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.1.2.Version 2.0
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, butchanging it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change
it.By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to shareand change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General
Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any otherprogram whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software
is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to yourprograms, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if
you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and thatyou know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights
or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities foryou if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or
can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands
that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else andpassed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid thedanger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effectmaking the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be
licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

391

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSETERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the
Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is tosay, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitationin the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from theProgram is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of
having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Programdoes.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receiveit, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy
an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices thatrefer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of theProgram a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming awork based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under theterms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed thefiles and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or
is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge toall third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you mustcause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print
or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that
there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may
redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copyof this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print
such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print anannouncement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of thatwork are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent andseparate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections
when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as partof a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on theterms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, andthus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written
entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative
or collective works based on the Program.

392

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (orwith a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does notbring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also
do one of the following:a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, whichmust be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily
used for software interchange; or,b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party,
for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, acomplete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for softwareinterchange;or,c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding
source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only ifyoureceived the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with
Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to
it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules
it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the sourcecode distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binaryform) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designatedplace, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source
along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distributethe Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However,parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will nothave the irlicenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothingelse grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptanceof this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing
compliance by third parties to this License.

393

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any
other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether bycourt order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do
not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy
simultaneously your obligations under thisLicense and any other pertinent obligations, thenas a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License
would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance,the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole isintended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property rightclaims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license
practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to
the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system
and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of therest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents
or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under thisLicense may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, sothat distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, thisLicense incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to thepresentversion, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies aversionnumber of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the optionof following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version publishedby the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of thisLicense,you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation;wesometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals ofpreserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
394

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO INWRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PROGRAM(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES ORA FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVENIF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public,the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistributeand change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start ofeach source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should haveat least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY;without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with thisprogram;if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactivemode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with
ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you arewelcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of theGeneral Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than`show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits yourprogram.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to signa "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (whichmakes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
395

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary
programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit
linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU
Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
14.1.3.Version 3.0
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <https://fsf.org/>
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, butchanging it is not allowed.
Preamble
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds ofworks.
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away yourfreedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License isintended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to makesure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU
General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released thisway by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you
know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you tosurrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of thesoftware, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that
they,too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so theyknow their rights.
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission
to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty
for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified
versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously toauthors of previous versions.
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of thesoftware inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible
with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern ofsuch abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it ismost unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practicefor those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready toextend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the
freedom of users.
396

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow
patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in thosethat do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could makeit effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render
the program non-free.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
0. Definitions.
This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
Copyright also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as
semiconductor masks.
The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee isaddressed as "you". "Licensees" and "recipients" may be individuals or organizations.
To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring
copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called amodified version of the earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.
A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.
To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you
directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing
it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying,distribution (with orwithout modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as
well.
To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or
receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of acopy, is not conveying.
An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices" to the extent that it includes aconvenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice,and(2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties areprovided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy ofthis License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, aprominent item in the list meets this criterion.
1. Source Code.
The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications toit. "Object code" means any non-source form of a work.
A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official standard defined by arecognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming
language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.

397

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other than the work as awhole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is
not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major
Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available tothe public in source code form. A "Major Component", in this context, means a major essential
component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on
which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code
interpreter used to run it.
The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all the source codeneeded to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify
the work,including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's
System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which
are use dunmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For
example,Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files
for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms thatthe work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control
flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work.
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automaticallyfrom other parts of the Corresponding Source.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.
2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program,and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms yourunlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work
is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This
License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions
so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others
for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide youwith facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License
in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or runningthe covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction andcontrol,on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside
their relationship with you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions statedbelow. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary.
3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any
applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20
December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures.
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention oftechnological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under
this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation
or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third
parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.

398Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy anappropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
nonpermissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all noticesof the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with theProgram.
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support
or warranty protection for a fee.
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from theProgram, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meetall of these conditions:a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant
date.
b)The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any
conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 tokeep intact all notices.
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes intopossession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section
7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they arepackaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does
not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal
Notices;however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate
Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by
their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to forma larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an aggregate
if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of thecompilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an
aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and
5,provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the termsof this License, in one of these ways:a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physicaldistribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physicalmedium customarily used for software interchange.
b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physicaldistribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid
for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to giveanyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source forall the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium
customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable costof physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding
Source from a network server at no charge.
399

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreementc) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer toprovide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally andnoncommercially,and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord withsubsection 6b.
d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for acharge),and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way
through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy theCorresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a
network server,the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or athird party)that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions
next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of whatserver hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available
for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers
where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to thegeneral public at no charge under subsection 6d.
A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding
Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work.
A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any tangible personal
property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything
designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is aconsumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular
product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a typical or common use ofthat class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which theparticular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is aconsumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial
or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the
product.
Installation Information for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys,
or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that
User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice
to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented orinterfered with solely because modification has been made.
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User
Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession anduse of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardlessof how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section
must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply ifneither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User
Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue
to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installedby the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Accessto a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects theoperation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the
network.
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with thissection must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available
to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking,reading or copying.
400

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

7. Additional Terms.
Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making
exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable tothe entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent
that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of theProgram,that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program
remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions.
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional
permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written torequire their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional
permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give
appropriate copyright permission.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work,youmay (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of thisLicense with terms:a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of thisLicense; orb) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in thatmaterial or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; orc) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versionsof such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; ord) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; ore) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, orservice marks; orf) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys
the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to therecipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on thoselicensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further restrictions" within themeaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a noticestating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may
remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or
conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the termsof that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing
or conveying.
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant
source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicatingwhere to find the applicable terms.
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately
written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under thisLicense. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automaticallyterminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the thirdparagraph of section 11).
401

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyrightholder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finallyterminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of theviolation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the
copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the firsttime you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyrightholder,and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who
have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminatedand not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the samematerial under section 10.
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program.
Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peertopeer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However,nothingother than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work.
These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from theoriginal licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are notresponsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially
all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation ofa covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives
a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor ininterest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of theCorresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or
can get it with reasonable efforts.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed
under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge
for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including
across-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed bymaking,using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
11. Patents.
A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Programor a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's
contributor version.
A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims owned or controlled by thecontributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by somemanner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version,but do
not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of thecontributor version. For purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant patent
sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License.
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under thecontributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise
run,modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.
402

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express agreement orcommitment,however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission
to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent
license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent
against the party.
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding
Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms ofthis License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means,thenyou must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange todeprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange,ina manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license todownstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have actual knowledge that, but forthe patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of thecovered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country thatyou have reason to believe are valid.
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or
propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some ofthe parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a
specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended
to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.
A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within the scope of its
coverage,prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of therights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work
if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing
software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activityof conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would
receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copiesof the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for
and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless
you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license orotherdefenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patentlaw.
12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of thisLicense. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligation
sunder this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may notconvey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty forfurther conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy
both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any
covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License
into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License willcontinue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the
GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will
apply to the combination as such.

403

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14. Revised Versions of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present
version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain
numbered version of the GNU General Public License "or any later version" applies to it, youhave the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify
a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version everpublished by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General
Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version
permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no addition
alobligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing tofollow a later version.
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BYAPPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHTHOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUTWARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCEOF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITINGWILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FORDAMAGES,INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDINGBUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local
legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely
approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless awarranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.

404

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public,the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistributeand change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start ofeach source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have atleast the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY;without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program.
If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in
an interactive mode:<program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is
free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of theGeneral Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI
interface, you would use an "about box".
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a
copyright disclaimer for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how toapply and follow the GNU GPL, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary
programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit
linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU
Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <https://www.gnu.
org/licenses/why-not-lgpl.html>.

405

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.2. GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
14.2.1.Version 2.1
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, butchanging it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU
Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change
it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom toshare and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide
to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this licenseorthe or dinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case,
based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies offree software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get
it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs;andthat you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give therecipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files tothe recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the libraryand recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you
this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the freelibrary. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should
know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will
not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wishto
make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained fora version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.

406

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designatedlibraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license forcertain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, thecombination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original
library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire
combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax
criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect theuser's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free softwaredevelopers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are
the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser
license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible
use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-freeprograms must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does thesame job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the freelibrary to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greaternumber of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the
GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU
operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does
ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and thewherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses thelibrary". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combinedwith the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSETERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a
notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License").Each
licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to beconveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) toform executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed
under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either
verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to
it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains,plus
any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation andinstallation of the library.
407

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License;theyare outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted,and output
from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library(independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on
what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish oneach copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all thenotices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy ofthis License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed thefiles and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under
the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by
an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when thefacility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event anapplication does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs
whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.(For example, a function in a library
to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of theapplication. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function
or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, thesquare root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work
are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you
distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of awhole
which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of thisLicense, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to eachand every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written
entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative
or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or witha work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bringthe other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of thisLicense to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer tothis License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,insteadof to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public
License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not makeany other change in these notices.
408

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that
copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is
not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) inobject code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used forsoftware interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place,thenoffering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies therequirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy
the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to workwith the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library".
Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside
the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a
derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work thatuses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms
for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the
Library,the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though thesource code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without
the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely
defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors,and
small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing
this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for thework under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section
6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the
Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distributethat work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the workfor the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that
the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If
the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice forthe Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License.
Also, you must do one of these things:

409

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreementa) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code forthe Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed
under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the
Library,with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code
and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce
a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user
who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able torecompile the application to use the modified definitions.)b)Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism
is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's
computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2)will
operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as
the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the sameuser the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the costof performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you havealready sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data
and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special
exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed(in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of theoperating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies theexecutable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietarylibraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means
you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single
library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute sucha combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Libraryand of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these twothings:a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
Library,uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under theterms ofthe Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work basedon the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of thesame work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will nothave their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

410

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothingelse grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. The
seactions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of
this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with ormodify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any
other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether bycourt order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do
not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, thenas a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License
would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance,the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole isintended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property rightclaims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license
practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to
the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system
and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of therest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents
or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under thisLicense may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, sothat distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, thisLicense incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13.The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to thepresent version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version numberof this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following theterms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the FreeSoftw
are Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any
version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. Forsoftw
are which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the twogoals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting thesharing and reuse of software generally.
411

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTYFOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPTWHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHERPARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITINGWILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND /OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FORDAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDINGBUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, werecommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do soby permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary
General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them tothe start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each fileshould have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation;either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY;without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along withthis library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth
Floor,Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to signa "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library fortweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
412

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.2.2.Version 3.0
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <https://fsf.org/>
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, butchanging it is not allowed.
This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates the terms and conditionsof version 3 of the GNU General Public License, supplemented by the additional permissions
listed below.
0. Additional Definitions.
As used herein, "this License" refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser General Public
License,and the "GNU GPL" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
The Library refers to a covered work governed by this License, other than an Application or a
Combined Work as defined below.
An "Application" is any work that makes use of an interface provided by the Library, but which
is not otherwise based on the Library. Defining a subclass of a class defined by the Library isdeemed a mode of using an interface provided by the Library.
A "Combined Work" is a work produced by combining or linking an Application with the Library.
The particular version of the Library with which the Combined Work was made is also called theLinked Version.
The "Minimal Corresponding Source" for a Combined Work means the Corresponding Source
for the Combined Work, excluding any source code for portions of the Combined Work
that,considered in isolation, are based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version.
The "Corresponding Application Code" for a Combined Work means the object code and/or
source code for the Application, including any data and utility programs needed for reproducing
the Combined Work from the Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the CombinedWork.
1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL.
You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License without being bound bysection 3 of the GNU GPL.
2. Conveying Modified Versions.
If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a facility refers to a function
or data to be supplied by an Application that uses the facility (other than as an argument
passedwhen the facility is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified version:a) under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event
an Application does not supply the function or data, the facility still operates, and performs
whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful, orb) under the GNU GPL, with none of the additional permissions of this License applicable tothat copy.
3. Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files.
413

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from a header file that is partof the Library. You may convey such object code under terms of your choice, provided that,if
the incorporated material is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure layouts andaccessors, or small macros, inline functions and templates (ten or fewer lines in length), you doboth of the following:a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the Library is used in it andthat the Library and its use are covered by this License.
b) Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license document.
4. Combined Works.
You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that, taken together, effectively
do not restrict modification of the portions of the Library contained in the Combined Work andreverse engineering for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of the following:a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that the Library is used in it
and that the Library and its use are covered by this License.
b) Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license document.
c) For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during execution, include thecopyright notice for the Library among these notices, as well as a reference directing theuser to the copies of the GNU GPL and this license document.
d) Do one of the following:0) Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, and theCorresponding Application Code in a form suitable for, and under terms that permit,theuser to recombine or relink the Application with a modified version of the Linked
Version to produce a modified Combined Work, in the manner specified by section 6 of
the GNU GPL for conveying Corresponding Source.
1) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A
suitablemechanism is one that (a) uses at run time a copy of the Library alreadypresent on the user's computer system, and (b) will operate properly with a modified
version of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Linked Version.
e) Provide Installation Information, but only if you would otherwise be required to provide
such information under section 6 of the GNU GPL, and only to the extent that suchinformation is necessary to install and execute a modified version of the Combined Workproduced by recombining or relinking the Application with a modified version of the Linked
Version. (If you use option 4d0, the Installation Information must accompany the Minimal
Corresponding Source and Corresponding Application Code. If you use option 4d1, youmust provide the Installation Information in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU
GPL for conveying Corresponding Source.)
5. Combined Libraries.
You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single
library together with other library facilities that are not Applications and are not covered by thisLicense, and convey such a combined library under terms of your choice, if you do both of thefollowing:a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
Library,uncombined with any other library facilities, conveyed under the terms of thisLicense.

414

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreementb) Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it is a work based on the
Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the samework.
6. Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU Lesser
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to thepresent version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library as you received it
specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU Lesser General Public License "or any
later version" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either ofthat published version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If
the Library as you received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser General
Public License, you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser General Public License everpublished by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide whether future versions of the
GNU Lesser General Public License shall apply, that proxy's public statement of acceptance ofany version is permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the Library.

415

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.3. BSD License
14.3.1.２-Clause
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORSAS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
14.3.2.３-Clause
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORSAS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

416

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.3.3.４-Clause
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display thefollowing acknowledgement:This product includes software developed by the <organization>.
4. Neither the name of the <organization> nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY <COPYRIGHT HOLDER> ''AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL <COPYRIGHT HOLDER> BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

417

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.4. Python Software Foundation License
A. HISTORY OF THE SOFTWARE
Python was created in the early 1990s by Guido van Rossum at Stichting MathematischCentrum (CWI, see http://www.cwi.nl) in the Netherlands as a successor of a language called
ABC. Guido remains Python's principal author, although it includes many contributions fromothers.
In 1995, Guido continued his work on Python at the Corporation for National Research
Initiatives (CNRI, see http://www.cnri.reston.va.us) in Reston, Virginia where he released
several versions of the software.
In May 2000, Guido and the Python core development team moved to BeOpen.com to form the
BeOpen PythonLabs team. In October of the same year, the PythonLabs team moved to Digital
Creations, which became Zope Corporation. In 2001, the Python Software Foundation (PSF,
see https://www.python.org/psf/) was formed, a non-profit organization created specifically to
own Python-related Intellectual Property. Zope Corporation was a sponsoring member of the
PSF.
All Python releases are Open Source (see http://www.opensource.org for the Open Source
Definition). Historically, most, but not all, Python releases have also been GPL-compatible; thetable below summarizes the various releases.
ReleaseDerived
from

Year

Owner
		

0.9.0 thru 1.2
1.3 thru 1.5.2
1.6
2.0
1.6.1
2.1
2.0.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2 and above

1.2
1.5.2
1.6
1.6
2.0+1.6.1
2.0+1.6.1
2.1+2.0.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.1

1991-1995
1995-1999
2000
2000
2001
2001
2001
2001
2002
2002
2001-now

CWI
CNRI
CNRI
BeOpen.com
CNRI
PSF
PSF
PSF
PSF
PSF
PSF

GPLcompatible? (1)
yes
yes
no
no
yes (2)
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes

Footnotes:(1) GPL-compatible doesn't mean that we're distributing Python under the GPL. All Python
licenses, unlike the GPL, let you distribute a modified version without making your changes
open source. The GPL-compatible licenses make it possible to combine Python with othersoftware that is released under the GPL; the others don't.
(2) According to Richard Stallman, 1.6.1 is not GPL-compatible, because its license has achoice of law clause. According to CNRI, however, Stallman's lawyer has told CNRI's
lawyer that 1.6.1 is "not incompatible" with the GPL.
Thanks to the many outside volunteers who have worked under Guido's direction to makethese releases possible.

418

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

B. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR ACCESSING OR OTHERWISE USING PYTHONPYTHON SOFTWARE FOUNDATION LICENSE VERSION 2
1. This LICENSE AGREEMENT is between the Python Software Foundation ("PSF"), and theIndividual or Organization ("Licensee") accessing and otherwise using this software ("Python")in source or binary form and its associated documentation.
2. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, PSF hereby grants Licensee
a nonexclusive, royalty-free, world-wide license to reproduce, analyze, test, perform and/or
display publicly, prepare derivative works, distribute, and otherwise use Python alone or inany derivative version, provided, however, that PSF's License Agreement and PSF's noticeof copyright, i.e., "Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009,2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017 Python Software Foundation; All Rights
Reserved" are retained in Python alone or in any derivative version prepared by Licensee.
3. In the event Licensee prepares a derivative work that is based on or incorporates Python
or any part thereof, and wants to make the derivative work available to others as provided
herein, then Licensee hereby agrees to include in any such work a brief summary of thechanges made to Python.
4. PSF is making Python available to Licensee on an "AS IS" basis. PSF MAKES NO
REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. BY WAY OF EXAMPLE,
BUT NOT LIMITATION, PSF MAKES NO AND DISCLAIMS ANY REPRESENTATION OR
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE
OR THAT THE USE OF PYTHON WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
5. PSF SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER USERS OF PYTHONFOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS AS A
RESULT OF MODIFYING, DISTRIBUTING, OR OTHERWISE USING PYTHON, OR ANY
DERIVATIVE THEREOF, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF.
6. This License Agreement will automatically terminate upon a material breach of its terms andconditions.
7. Nothing in this License Agreement shall be deemed to create any relationship of agency,
partnership, or joint venture between PSF and Licensee. This License Agreement does notgrant permission to use PSF trademarks or trade name in a trademark sense to endorse or
promote products or services of Licensee, or any third party.
8. By copying, installing or otherwise using Python, Licensee agrees to be bound by the terms
and conditions of this License Agreement.
BEOPEN.COM LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 2.0
BEOPEN PYTHON OPEN SOURCE LICENSE AGREEMENT VERSION 1
1. This LICENSE AGREEMENT is between BeOpen.com ("BeOpen"), having an office at 160
Saratoga Avenue, Santa Clara, CA 95051, and the Individual or Organization ("Licensee")accessing and otherwise using this software in source or binary form and its associateddocumentation ("the Software").
2. Subject to the terms and conditions of this BeOpen Python License Agreement, BeOpen
hereby grants Licensee a non-exclusive, royalty-free, world-wide license to reproduce,
analyze, test, perform and/or display publicly, prepare derivative works, distribute, andotherwise use the Software alone or in any derivative version, provided, however, thatthe BeOpen Python License is retained in the Software, alone or in any derivative version
Python Software Foundation License prepared by Licensee.
419

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

3. BeOpen is making the Software available to Licensee on an "AS IS" basis. BEOPEN
MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. BY WAY
OF EXAMPLE, BUT NOT LIMITATION, BEOPEN MAKES NO AND DISCLAIMS ANYREPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE WILL NOT INFRINGE
ANY THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
4. BEOPEN SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER USERS OF THE
SOFTWARE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
LOSS AS A RESULT OF USING, MODIFYING OR DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE, OR
ANY DERIVATIVE THEREOF, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF.
5. This License Agreement will automatically terminate upon a material breach of its terms andconditions.
6. This License Agreement shall be governed by and interpreted in all respects by the law of theState of California, excluding conflict of law provisions. Nothing in this License Agreement
shall be deemed to create any relationship of agency, partnership, or joint venture between
BeOpen and Licensee. This License Agreement does not grant permission to use BeOpen
trademarks or trade names in a trademark sense to endorse or promote products or servicesof Licensee, or any third party. As an exception, the "BeOpen Python" logos available at
http://www.pythonlabs.com/logos.html may be used according to the permissions granted onthat web page.
7. By copying, installing or otherwise using the software, Licensee agrees to be bound by theterms and conditions of this License Agreement.
CNRI LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 1.6.1
1. This LICENSE AGREEMENT is between the Corporation for National Research Initiatives,having an office at 1895 Preston White Drive, Reston, VA 20191 ("CNRI"), and the Individualor Organization ("Licensee") accessing and otherwise using Python 1.6.1 software in sourceor binary form and its associated documentation.
2. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, CNRI hereby grants Licensee
a nonexclusive, royalty-free, world-wide license to reproduce, analyze, test, perform and/or display publicly, prepare derivative works, distribute, and otherwise use Python 1.6.1
alone or in any derivative version, provided, however, that CNRI's License Agreement and
CNRI's notice of copyright, i.e., "Copyright (c) 1995-2001 Corporation for National Research
Initiatives; All Rights Reserved" are retained in Python 1.6.1 alone or in any derivative
version prepared by Licensee. Alternately, in lieu of CNRI's License Agreement, Licensee
may substitute the following text (omitting the quotes): "Python 1.6.1 is made available
subject to the terms and conditions in CNRI's License Agreement. This Agreement together
with Python 1.6.1 may be located on the Internet using the following unique, persistentidentifier (known as a handle): 1895.22/1013. This Agreement may also be obtained from a
proxy server on the Internet using the following URL: http://hdl.handle.net/1895.22/1013".
3. In the event Licensee prepares a derivative work that is based on or incorporates Python 1.6.1
or any part thereof, and wants to make the derivative work available to others as provided
herein, then Licensee hereby agrees to include in any such work a brief summary of thechanges made to Python 1.6.1.
4. CNRI is making Python 1.6.1 available to Licensee on an "AS IS" basis. CNRI MAKES NO
REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. BY WAY OF EXAMPLE,
BUT NOT LIMITATION, CNRI MAKES NO AND DISCLAIMS ANY REPRESENTATION OR
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE
OR THAT THE USE OF PYTHON 1.6.1 WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.

420

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

5. CNRI SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER USERS OF PYTHON 1.6.1
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS AS A
RESULT OF MODIFYING, DISTRIBUTING, OR OTHERWISE USING PYTHON 1.6.1, OR
ANY DERIVATIVE THEREOF, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF.
6. This License Agreement will automatically terminate upon a material breach of its terms andconditions.
7. This License Agreement shall be governed by the federal intellectual property law of theUnited States, including without limitation the federal copyright law, and, to the extent such
U.S. federal law does not apply, by the law of the Commonwealth of Virginia, excluding
Virginia's conflict of law provisions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, with regard to derivative
works based on Python 1.6.1 that incorporate non-separable material that was previously
distributed under the GNU General Public License (GPL), the law of the Commonwealth of
Virginia shall govern this License Agreement only as to issues arising under or with respect
to Paragraphs 4, 5, and 7 of this License Agreement. Nothing in this License Agreement shallbe deemed to create any relationship of agency, partnership, or joint venture between CNRI
and Licensee. This License Agreement does not grant permission to use CNRI trademarks
or trade name in a trademark sense to endorse or promote products or services of Licensee,
or any third party.
8. By clicking on the "ACCEPT" button where indicated, or by copying, installing or otherwise
using Python 1.6.1, Licensee agrees to be bound by the terms and conditions of this License
Agreement.
ACCEPTCWI LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 0.9.0 THROUGH 1.2
Copyright (c) 1991 - 1995, Stichting Mathematisch Centrum Amsterdam, The Netherlands. All
rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of Stichting Mathematisch Centrum or CWI not be used inadvertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written priorpermission.
STICHTING MATHEMATISCH CENTRUM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD
TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL STICHTING MATHEMATISCH CENTRUM BE LIABLE
FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGESWHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

421

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.5. OpenSSL License
LICENSE ISSUESThe OpenSSL toolkit stays under a double license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL
License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license
texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues
related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License																											Copyright (c) 1998-2018 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display thefollowing acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL
Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL"
appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITSCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
														This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

422

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The
implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions
are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it theRC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included
with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be
removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as theauthor of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program
startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and thefollowing disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display thefollowing acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric
Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from thelibrary being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory(application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software
written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code
cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution
licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]423

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.6. Open Software License 3.0
Open Software License ("OSL") v. 3.0
This Open Software License (the "License") applies to any original work of authorship (theOriginal Work) whose owner (the "Licensor") has placed the following licensing noticeadjacent to the copyright notice for the Original Work:
Licensed under the Open Software License version 3.0
1) Grant of Copyright License. Licensor grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, sublicensable
license, for the duration of the copyright, to do the following:a) to reproduce the Original Work in copies, either alone or as part of a collective work;b) to translate, adapt, alter, transform, modify, or arrange the Original Work, thereby creating derivative works("Derivative Works") based upon the Original Work;c) to distribute or communicate copies of the Original Work and Derivative Works to the public, with theproviso that copies of Original Work or Derivative Works that You distribute or communicate shall belicensed under this Open Software License;d) to perform the Original Work publicly; ande) to display the Original Work publicly.
2) Grant of Patent License. Licensor grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, sublicensable license,
under patent claims owned or controlled by the Licensor that are embodied in the Original Work as furnishedby the Licensor, for the duration of the patents, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, and import theOriginal Work and Derivative Works.
3) Grant of Source Code License. The term "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Original Workfor making modifications to it and all available documentation describing how to modify the Original Work.
Licensor agrees to provide a machine-readable copy of the Source Code of the Original Work along witheach copy of the Original Work that Licensor distributes. Licensor reserves the right to satisfy this obligationby placing a machinereadable copy of the Source Code in an information repository reasonably calculated topermit inexpensive and convenient access by You for as long as Licensor continues to distribute the OriginalWork.
4) Exclusions From License Grant. Neither the names of Licensor, nor the names of any contributors to theOriginal Work, nor any of their trademarks or service marks, may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this Original Work without express prior permission of the Licensor. Except as expressly statedherein, nothing in this License grants any license to Licensor's trademarks, copyrights, patents, trade secrets
or any other intellectual property. No patent license is granted to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made,or import embodiments of any patent claims other than the licensed claims defined in Section 2. No license
is granted to the trademarks of Licensor even if such marks are included in the Original Work. Nothing in thisLicense shall be interpreted to prohibit Licensor from licensing under terms different from this License any
Original Work that Licensor otherwise would have a right to license.

424

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

5) External Deployment. The term "External Deployment" means the use, distribution, orcommunication of the Original Work or Derivative Works in any way such that the Original
Work or Derivative Works may be used by anyone other than You, whether those works are
distributed or communicated to those persons or made available as an application intended
for use over a network. As an express condition for the grants of license hereunder, You
must treat any External Deployment by You of the Original Work or a Derivative Work as a
distribution under section 1(c).
6) Attribution Rights. You must retain, in the Source Code of any Derivative Works that You
create, all copyright, patent, or trademark notices from the Source Code of the Original Work,as well as any notices of licensing and any descriptive text identified therein as an Attribution
Notice. You must cause the Source Code for any Derivative Works that You create to carrya prominent Attribution Notice reasonably calculated to inform recipients that You havemodified the Original Work.
7) Warranty of Provenance and Disclaimer of Warranty. Licensor warrants that the copyrightin and to the Original Work and the patent rights granted herein by Licensor are owned by
the Licensor or are sublicensed to You under the terms of this License with the permissionof the contributor(s) of those copyrights and patent rights. Except as expressly stated in theimmediately preceding sentence, the Original Work is provided under this License on an AS
IS BASIS and WITHOUT WARRANTY, either express or implied, including, without limitation,
the warranties of non-infringement, merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL WORK IS WITH YOU. ThisDISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY constitutes an essential part of this License. No license to theOriginal Work is granted by this License except under this disclaimer.
8) Limitation of Liability. Under no circumstances and under no legal theory, whether in tort(including negligence), contract, or otherwise, shall the Licensor be liable to anyone for any
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a resultof this License or the use of the Original Work including, without limitation, damages for lossof goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial
damages or losses. This limitation of liability shall not apply to the extent applicable law
prohibits such limitation.
9) Acceptance and Termination. If, at any time, You expressly assented to this License, thatassent indicates your clear and irrevocable acceptance of this License and all of its terms
and conditions. If You distribute or communicate copies of the Original Work or a Derivative
Work, You must make a reasonable effort under the circumstances to obtain the express
assent of recipients to the terms of this License. This License conditions your rights toundertake the activities listed in Section 1, including your right to create Derivative Works
based upon the Original Work, and doing so without honoring these terms and conditions
is prohibited by copyright law and international treaty. Nothing in this License is intended toaffect copyright exceptions and limitations (including "fair use" or "fair dealing"). This License
shall terminate immediately and You may no longer exercise any of the rights granted to You
by this License upon your failure to honor the conditions in Section 1(c).
10) Termination for Patent Action. This License shall terminate automatically and You may nolonger exercise any of the rights granted to You by this License as of the date You commence
an action, including a cross-claim or counterclaim, against Licensor or any licensee alleging
that the Original Work infringes a patent. This termination provision shall not apply for an
action alleging patent infringement by combinations of the Original Work with other softwareor hardware.

425

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

11) Jurisdiction, Venue and Governing Law. Any action or suit relating to this License may bebrought only in the courts of a jurisdiction wherein the Licensor resides or in which Licensor
conducts its primary business, and under the laws of that jurisdiction excluding its conflictoflaw provisions. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. Any use of the Original Work outside
the scope of this License or after its termination shall be subject to the requirements andpenalties of copyright or patent law in the appropriate jurisdiction. This section shall survive
the termination of this License.
12) Attorneys' Fees. In any action to enforce the terms of this License or seeking damages
relating thereto, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover its costs and expenses,
including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection withsuch action, including any appeal of such action. This section shall survive the termination ofthis License.
13) Miscellaneous. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision
shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable.
14) Definition of "You" in This License. "You" throughout this License, whether in upper or lower
case, means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with allof the terms of, this License. For legal entities, "You" includes any entity that controls, iscontrolled by, or is under common control with you. For purposes of this definition, "control"means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity,
whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of theoutstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
15) Right to Use. You may use the Original Work in all ways not otherwise restricted or
conditioned by this License or by law, and Licensor promises not to interfere with or be
responsible for such uses by You.
16)Modification of This License. This License is Copyright (c) 2005 Lawrence Rosen.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute, or communicate this License without modification.
Nothing in this License permits You to modify this License as applied to the Original Work or
to Derivative Works. However, You may modify the text of this License and copy, distributeor communicate your modified version (the "Modified License") and apply it to other original
works of authorship subject to the following conditions: (i) You may not indicate in any way
that your Modified License is the "Open Software License" or "OSL" and you may not use
those names in the name of your Modified License; (ii) You must replace the notice specified
in the first paragraph above with the notice "Licensed under <insert your license namehere>" or with a notice of your own that is not confusingly similar to the notice in this License;and (iii) You may not claim that your original works are open source software unless your
Modified License has been approved by Open Source Initiative (OSI) and You comply with
its license review and certification process.

426

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.7. MIT License
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this softwareand associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies orsubstantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORTOR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWAREOR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

427

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.8. Apache License
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as definedby Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is
granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, arecontrolled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition,"control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such
entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of theoutstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by thisLicense.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited
to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a
Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation,and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available
under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work
(an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (orderived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or othermodifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of thisLicense, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (orbind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Workand any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionallysubmitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or
Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of thisdefinition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to
the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic
mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, oron behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding
communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyrightowner as "Not a Contribution.""Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom aContribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

428

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, eachContributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly
display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in
Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, eachContributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use,
offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only
to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such
Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including across-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated
within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent
licenses Apache License granted to You under this License for that Work shall ter inate as ofthe date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works
thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided
that You meet the following conditionsa) You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License;
andb) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed thefiles; andc) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, allcopyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work,excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; andd) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative
Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained
within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file
distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if
provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative
Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the
NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may
add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongsideor as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional
attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional ordifferent license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications,or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distributionof the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution
intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under
the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such
Contributions.

429

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks,
service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable andcustomary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the
NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor
provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS,WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied,
including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely
responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work andassume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including
negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate
and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You fordamages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages ofany character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work(including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or
malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works
thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty,
indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However,in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole
responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted
against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional
liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONSAPPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields
enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include thebrackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format.
We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on thesame "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the
License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OFANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governingpermissions and limitations under the License.

430

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.9. Academic Free License
The Academic Free License v. 2.1
This Academic Free License (the "License") applies to any original work of authorship (the"Original Work") whose owner (the "Licensor") has placed the following notice immediately
following the copyright notice for the Original Work:
Licensed under the Academic Free License version 2.1
1) Grant of Copyright License. Licensor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, nonexclusive, perpetual, sublicenseable license to do the following:a) to reproduce the Original Work in copies;b) to prepare derivative works ("Derivative Works") based upon the Original Work;c) to distribute copies of the Original Work and Derivative Works to the public;d) to perform the Original Work publicly; ande) to display the Original Work publicly.
2) Grant of Patent License. Licensor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, nonexclusive, perpetual, sublicenseable license, under patent claims owned or controlled by the
Licensor that are embodied in the Original Work as furnished by the Licensor, to make, use,sell and offer for sale the Original Work and Derivative Works.
3) Grant of Source Code License. The term "Source Code" means the preferred form of theOriginal Work for making modifications to it and all available documentation describing
how to modify the Original Work. Licensor hereby agrees to provide a machine-readable
copy of the Source Code of the Original Work along with each copy of the Original Workthat Licensor distributes. Licensor reserves the right to satisfy this obligation by placing
a machine-readable copy of the Source Code in an information repository reasonably
calculated to permit inexpensive and convenient access by You for as long as Licensor
continues to distribute the Original Work, and by publishing the address of that information
repository in a notice immediately following the copyright notice that applies to the OriginalWork.
4) Exclusions From License Grant. Neither the names of Licensor, nor the names of any
contributors to the Original Work, nor any of their trademarks or service marks, may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this Original Work without express prior written
permission of the Licensor. Nothing in this License shall be deemed to grant any rights totrademarks, copyrights, patents, trade secrets or any other intellectual property of Licensor
except as expressly stated herein. No patent license is granted to make, use, sell or offer
to sell embodiments of any patent claims other than the licensed claims defined in Section
2. No right is granted to the trademarks of Licensor even if such marks are included in theOriginal Work. Nothing in this License shall be interpreted to prohibit Licensor from licensing
under different terms from this License any Original Work that Licensor otherwise would
have a right to license.

431

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement5)This section intentionally omitted.
6)Attribution Rights. You must retain, in the Source Code of any Derivative Works that You
create, all copyright, patent or trademark notices from the Source Code of the Original Work,as well as any notices of licensing and any descriptive text identified therein as an Attribution
Notice. You must cause the Source Code for any Derivative Works that You create to carrya prominent Attribution Notice reasonably calculated to inform recipients that You havemodified the Original Work.
7) Warranty of Provenance and Disclaimer of Warranty. Licensor warrants that the copyrightin and to the Original Work and the patent rights granted herein by Licensor are owned by
the Licensor or are sublicensed to You under the terms of this License with the permissionof the contributor(s) of those copyrights and patent rights. Except as expressly stated in theimmediately proceeding sentence, the Original Work is provided under this License on an"AS IS" BASIS and WITHOUT WARRANTY, either express or implied, including, without
limitation, the warranties of NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINALWORK IS WITH YOU. This DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY constitutes an essential part ofthis License. No license to Original Work is granted hereunder except under this disclaimer.
8) Limitation of Liability. Under no circumstances and under no legal theory, whether in tort(including negligence), contract, or otherwise, shall the Licensor be liable to any person forany direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising asa result of this License or the use of the Original Work including, without limitation, damages
for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all othercommercial damages or losses. This limitation of liability shall not apply to liability for deathor personal injury resulting from Licensor's negligence to the extent applicable law prohibits
such limitation. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental orconsequential damages, so this exclusion and limitation may not apply to You.
9) Acceptance and Termination. If You distribute copies of the Original Work or a Derivative
Work, You must make a reasonable effort under the circumstances to obtain the express
assent of recipients to the terms of this License. Nothing else but this License (or anotherwritten agreement between Licensor and You) grants You permission to create Derivative
Works based upon the Original Work or to exercise any of the rights granted in Section 1
herein, and any attempt to do so except under the terms of this License (or another writtenagreement between Licensor and You) is expressly prohibited by U.S. copyright law, theequivalent laws of other countries, and by international treaty. Therefore, by exercising anyof the rights granted to You in Section 1 herein, You indicate Your acceptance of this License
and all of its terms and conditions.
10)Termination for Patent Action. This License shall terminate automatically and You may nolonger exercise any of the rights granted to You by this License as of the date You commence
an action, including a cross-claim or counterclaim, against Licensor or any licensee alleging
that the Original Work infringes a patent. This termination provision shall not apply for an
action alleging patent infringement by combinations of the Original Work with ther softwareor hardware.
11)Jurisdiction, Venue and Governing Law. Any action or suit relating to this License may bebrought only in the courts of a jurisdiction wherein the Licensor resides or in which Licensor
conducts its primary business, and under the laws of that jurisdiction excluding its conflictof-law provisions. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. Any use of the Original Work outside
the scope of this License or after its termination shall be subject to the Academic Free
License requirements and penalties of the U.S. Copyright Act, 17 U.S.C. Â§ 101 et seq.,
the equivalent laws of other countries, and international treaty. This section shall survive thetermination of this License.

432

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

12)Attorneys Fees. In any action to enforce the terms of this License or seeking damages
relating thereto, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover its costs and expenses,
including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection withsuch action, including any appeal of such action. This section shall survive the termination ofthis License.
13)Miscellaneous. This License represents the complete agreement concerning the subject
matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision
shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable.
14)Definition of "You" in This License. "You" throughout this License, whether in upper or lower
case, means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with allof the terms of, this License. For legal entities, "You" includes any entity that controls, iscontrolled by, or is under common control with you. For purposes of this definition, "control"means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity,
whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of theoutstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
15)Right to Use. You may use the Original Work in all ways not otherwise restricted or
conditioned by this License or by law, and Licensor promises not to interfere with or be
responsible for such uses by You.
This license is Copyright (C) 2003-2004 Lawrence E. Rosen. All rights reserved. Permission is
hereby granted to copy and distribute this license without modification. This license may not be
modified without the express written permission of its copyright owner.
														END OF ACADEMIC FREE LICENSE. The following is intended to describe the essential
differences between the Academic Free License (AFL) version 1.0 and other open source
licenses:
The Academic Free License is similar to the BSD, MIT, UoI/NCSA and Apache licenses in many
respects but it is intended to solve a few problems with those licenses.
* The AFL is written so as to make it clear what software is being licensed (by the inclusion of astatement following the copyright notice in the software). This way, the license functions better
than a template license. The BSD, MIT and UoI/NCSA licenses apply to unidentified software.
* The AFL contains a complete copyright grant to the software. The BSD and Apache licenses
are vague and incomplete in that respect.
* The AFL contains a complete patent grant to the software. The BSD, MIT, UoI/NCSA andApache licenses rely on an implied patent license and contain no explicit patent grant.
* The AFL makes it clear that no trademark rights are granted to the licensor's trademarks. The
Apache license contains such a provision, but the BSD, MIT and UoI/NCSA licenses do not.
* The AFL includes the warranty by the licensor that it either owns the copyright or that it isdistributing the software under a license. None of the other licenses contain that warranty. Allother warranties are disclaimed, as is the case for the other licenses.
* The AFL is itself copyrighted (with the right granted to copy and distribute without
modification). This ensures that the owner of the copyright to the license will control changes.
The Apache license contains a copyright notice, but the BSD, MIT and UoI/NCSA licenses do
not.

433

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

14.10. Texas Instruments Incorporated Technology and Software Publicly
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copiesof this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it.
By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to shareand change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General
Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any otherprogram whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software
is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to yourprograms, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; andthat you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights
or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities foryou if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or
can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands
that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else andpassed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid thedanger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effectmaking the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be
licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

434

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSETERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the
Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or withmodifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included
without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from theProgram is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of
having been made by running the Program).
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it,in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy anappropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that referto this License and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the termsof Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed thefiles and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or
is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge toall third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you mustcause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print
or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that
there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may
redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copyof this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print
such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print anannouncement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of thatwork are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent andseparate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections
when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as partof a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on theterms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, andthus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written
entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative
or collective works based on the Program.

435

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (orwith a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does notbring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also
do one of the following:a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, whichmust be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily
used for software interchange; or,b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, fora charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under theterms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange;or,c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding
source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if
you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord
with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to
it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules
it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the sourcecode distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binaryform) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designatedplace, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source
along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distributethe Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will nothave their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothingelse grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptanceof this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Program or works based on it.

436

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any
other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether bycourt order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do
not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, thenas a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License
would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole isintended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property
right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose ofprotecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented bypublic license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide rangeof software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of thatsystem; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence ofthe rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents
or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under thisLicense may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, sothat distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, thisLicense incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present
version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option offollowing the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version publishedby the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of thisLicense, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation;
we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals ofpreserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.

437

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO ARRANTYFOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPTWHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHERPARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST
OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITINGWILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FORDAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCHHOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public,
the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute andchange under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start ofeach source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should haveat least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program;if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301 USA

438

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactivemode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with
ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type`show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of theGeneral Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than`show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits yourprogram.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to signa "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (whichmakes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary
programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit
linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU
Library General Public License instead of this License.

439

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

Texas Instruments Incorporated
Technology and Software Publicly Available
Software License Agreement
IMPORTANT – PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY.
THIS IS A LEGALLY BINDING AGREEMENT. DO NOT DOWNLOAD THE LICENSED
MATERIALS UNLESS: (1)YOU ARE AUTHORIZED TO ACCEPT AND AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT AND (2) YOU INTEND TO ENTER INTO AND TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS
OF THIS AGREEMENT.
This Software License Agreement ("Agreement") is a legal agreement between you (either anindividual or entity) and Texas Instruments Incorporated ("TI"), 12500 TI Boulevard, Dallas,
Texas 75243. The "Licensed Materials" subject to this Agreement include, in whole or inpart, the software programs that accompany this Agreement and any "on-line" or electronic
documentation associated with these programs. By installing, copying or otherwise using the
Licensed Materials you agree to abide by the terms of this Agreement. If you choose not to
accept or agree with these terms, do not download or install the Licensed Materials.
NOTE: The Licensed Materials may be bundled with open source software. By accepting thisAgreement, you may gain access to software identified as being licensed under open source
licenses, which software and corresponding open source licenses will be listed in the applicable
software manifest (in whole or in part, the "Open Source Materials"). Your use of the Open
Source Materials is subject to the separate licensing terms applicable to such Open Source
Materials as specified in the applicable software manifest. For clarification, this Agreement
does not limit your rights under, or grant you rights that supersede, the license terms of any
applicable Open Source Materials license agreement. If any of the Open Source Materials havebeen provided to you in object code, the source code versions of such Open Source Materials
may be provided to you by notifying TI at Texas Instruments Incorporated, 12500 TI Boulevard,
Mail Station 8638, Dallas, Texas 75243, Attention: Contracts Manager. You may terminate thisAgreement in the event you choose not to accept or agree with the terms in any applicableOpen Source Materials license agreement, provided that such termination occurs within five(5) days of acceptance of this Agreement and you abide by all applicable license terms in thisAgreement until such termination.

1. License.
a) Source Code License. For the Licensed Materials provided in source code format, TI
hereby grants to you a limited, non-exclusive license to reproduce, use, and create
modified or derivative works of the Licensed Materials provided to you in source code
format and to distribute an unlimited number of copies of such source code Licensed
Materials, or any derivatives thereof, in any format.
b) Object Code License. For the Licensed Materials provided in object code format, TI
hereby grants to you a limited, non-exclusive license to reproduce and use the Licensed
Materials provided to you in object code format and to distribute an unlimited number ofobject or executable copies of such object code Licensed Materials.
2. Termination. This license is effective until terminated. Without prejudice to any other rights,
TI may terminate your right to use the Licensed Materials under this Agreement if you fail tocomply with the terms of this Agreement. In such event, you shall destroy all copies of theLicensed Materials, including all portions and derivatives thereof.

440

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

3. Intellectual Property Rights.
a) The Licensed Materials being provided to you hereunder are being made publicly
available by TI, even though they contain copyrighted material of TI and its licensors, if
applicable. In no event may you alter, remove or destroy any copyright notice included in
the Licensed Materials. To the extent that any of the Licensed Materials are provided inbinary or object code only, you may not unlock, decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble
or otherwise translate such binary or object code to human-perceivable form. The sourcecode of such reverse engineered code may contain TI trade secret and other proprietary
information. TI reserves all rights not specifically granted under this Agreement.
b) Certain Licensed Materials may (i) require patent licenses from third parties claiming
patent rights covering implementation of the Licensed Materials or (ii) be based on
industry recognized standards or software programs published by industry recognized
standards bodies and certain third parties may claim to own patents or copyrights thatcover implementation of those standards. You acknowledge and agree that this Agreement
does not convey a license to any such third party patents and copyrights.
c) YOU ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT TI SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR AND SHALLNOT DEFEND OR INDEMNIFY YOU AGAINST ANY THIRD PARTY INFRINGEMENT
CLAIM THAT RELATES Texas Instruments Incorporated Technology and Software
Publicly TO OR IS BASED ON YOUR MANUFACTURE, USE, OR DISTRIBUTION OF
THE LICENSED MATERIALS OR YOUR MANUFACTURE, USE, OFFER FOR SALE,
SALE, IMPORTATION OR DISTRIBUTION OF YOUR PRODUCTS THAT INCLUDE OR
INCORPORATE THE LICENSED MATERIALS.
d) You acknowledge and agree that you are responsible for any fees or royalties that may bepayable to any third party based on such third party’s interests in the Licensed Materials
described in Section 3(b) above (the "Third Party Payment Obligations"). You agree toindemnify TI against any Third Party Payment Obligations and will defend any claim, suitor proceeding brought against TI insofar as such claim, suit or proceeding is based onyour failure to pay any Third Party Payment Obligations.
4. Warranties and Limitations.
THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". TI AND ITS LICENSORS MAKE NO
WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDINGANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE, LACK OF VIRUSES, ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF RESPONSES,RESULTS AND LACK OF NEGLIGENCE. TI DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE,QUIET ENJOYMENT, QUIET POSESSION, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF ANY THIRDPARTY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS WITH REGARD TO THE LICENSED
MATERIALS OR USE OF THOSE MATERIALS.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE LICENSED MATERIALS MAY NOT BEINTENDED FOR PRODUCTION APPLICATIONS AND MAY CONTAIN IRREGULARITIESAND DEFECTS NOT FOUND IN PRODUCTION SOFTWARE. FURTHERMORE, YOU
ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE LICENSED MATERIALS HAVE NOT BEEN
TESTED OR CERTIFIED BY ANY GOVERNMENT AGENCY OR INDUSTRY REGULATORYORGANIZATION OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY ORGANIZATION. YOU AGREE THATPRIOR TO USING, INCORPORATING OR DISTRIBUTING THE LICENSED MATERIALSIN OR WITH ANY COMMERCIAL PRODUCT THAT YOU WILL THOROUGHLY TEST THE
PRODUCT AND THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS IN OR WITH
THAT PRODUCT AND BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS OR FAILURES.

441

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

IN NO EVENT SHALL TI OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT, OR YOURUSE OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS, WHETHER OR NOT TI HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. EXCLUDED DAMAGES INCLUDE, BUT ARE
NOT LIMITED TO, COST OF REMOVAL OR REINSTALLATION, OUTSIDE COMPUTER
TIME, LABOR COSTS, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA, LOSS OF GOODWILL, LOSSOF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, OR LOSS OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESSOR ANY OTHER ECONOMIC LOSS. IN NO EVENT WILL TI’S AGGREGATE LIABILITYUNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE LICENSED
MATERIALS EXCEED FIVE HUNDRED U.S. DOLLARS (US$500).
Because some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental orconsequential damages or limitation on how long an implied warranty lasts, the above
limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
5. Export Control. The software programs and any "on-line" documentation as well as any
updates or upgrades to such software programs or documentation may be subject tothe export or import regulations of certain countries. You agree to comply with all such
regulations and acknowledge that you have the responsibility to obtain any licenses or otherauthorizations that may be required to export, re-export or import the Licensed Materials.
6. Governing Law, Jurisdiction and Severability. This Agreement will be governed by andinterpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of Texas, without reference to that state’s
conflict of laws principles. This Agreement shall not be governed by the United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, nor shall it be governed by the
Uniform Computer Information Transactions Act (UCITA). Any dispute arising out of or related
to this Agreement will be brought in, and each party consents to the exclusive jurisdiction andvenue in the state and federal courts sitting in Dallas Country, Texas. Each party waives all
defenses of lack of personal jurisdiction and forum non-conveniens and agrees that process
may be served on either party in a manner authorized by applicable law or court rule. If
for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of the Agreement to be
unenforceable, that provision will be enforced to the maximum extent possible to effectuate
the intent of the parties and the remainder of the Agreement shall continue in full force andeffect.
7. PRC Provisions. If you are located in the People’s Republic of China ("PRC") or if theLicensed Materials will be sent to the PRC, the following provisions shall apply and shallsupersede any other provisions in this Agreement concerning the same subject matter as thefollowing provisions:a) Registration Requirements. You shall be solely responsible for performing all acts andobtaining all approvals that may be required in connection with this Agreement by
the government of the PRC, including but not limited to registering pursuant to, andotherwise complying with, the PRC Measures on the Administration of Software Products,
Management Regulations on Technology Import-Export, and Technology Import andExport Contract Registration Management Rules. Upon receipt of such approvals fromthe government authorities, you shall forward evidence of all such approvals to TI for its
records. In the event that you fail to obtain any such approval or registration, you shall besolely responsible for any and all losses, damages or costs resulting therefrom, and shallindemnify TI for all such losses, damages or costs.
b) Governing Language. This Agreement is written and executed in the English language.
If a translation of this Agreement is required for any purpose, including but not limited toregistration of the Agreement pursuant to any governmental laws, regulations or rules, you
shall be solely responsible for creating such translation. Any translation of this Agreement
into a language other than English is intended solely in order to comply with such laws
or for reference purposes, and the English language version shall be authoritative andcontrolling.
442

Network Signal Tower Control / Network Signal Tower with Voice Annunciator Control - Instruction Manual

14. Free Software License Agreement

8. Entire Agreement. This is the entire Agreement between you and TI and supersedes any
prior agreement between the parties related to the subject matter of this Agreement. No
amendment or modification of this Agreement will be effective unless in writing and signed
by a duly authorized representative of TI. You hereby warrant and represent that you haveobtained all authorizations and other applicable consents required empowering you to enter
into this Agreement.
Version: 221850v2443

444